JP2021159358A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can prevent an engaging member from being detached improperly.SOLUTION: A retaining pin Wo580 is formed so that it can be attached to an engaging part Wo530a. The displacement of the engaging part Wo530a in a direction in which the engagement of a box cover Wo200 and the engaging part Wo530a is released can be prevented by the retaining pin Wo580. Consequently, it is possible to prevent a protection cover Wo500 from being detached improperly from the box cover Wo200 and a box base W300. On the other hand, even if the retaining pin Wo580 is attached to the engaging part Wo530a, the engaging part Wo530a can be separated (broken) from the body part, so that in normal work, by separating (breaking) the engaging part Wo530a, the protection cover Wo500 (body part) can be easily detached from the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 100

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, and an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member is known (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-244900

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in suppressing the illegal removal of the engaging member.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing unauthorized removal of an engaging member.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a first member and a second member, and at least an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with the first member, and is provided with an mounting member. The engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member, and the mounting member is mounted on the engaging portion. It is possibly formed, and the displacement of the engaging portion in the direction in which the engaging portion is disengaged from the first member can be suppressed by the mounting member.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1. When the engaging portion is displaced in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the first engaging portion of the engaging portion is used. When the surface side is close to the first member and the mounting member is mounted on the engaging portion, a part of the mounting member is arranged between the first surface of the engaging portion and the first member. Will be done.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the attachment member is formed so as to be attached to the engaging portion engaged with the first member.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 2, the engaging portion can be smoothly engaged with the first member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 1st operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotary operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotary operation unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 2nd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a rotary operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotary operation unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit. (A) and (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 3rd operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the opening / closing operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an opening / closing operation unit. It is a rear view of the opening / closing operation unit of the 3rd operation unit. It is a rear view of the opening / closing operation unit of the 3rd operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light guide plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a light guide plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. It is a rear view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit in the XLVIIIa-XLVIIIa line of FIG. 47, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit in the XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb line of FIG. 47. (A) to (f) are schematic front views of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. It is a front view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the auxiliary light guide plate unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. 54. It is an exploded front perspective view of the downstream side guide member. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the downstream side guide member. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the structure of the visual appearance mode change sheet. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing a change in appearance of a downstream guide member due to a difference in directional vision. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic rear view of the 1st operation unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic rear view of the 1st operation unit. It is a schematic rear view of the 1st operation unit. (A) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the ball guide unit according to the fourth embodiment. (A) and (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit according to the fifth embodiment. It is sectional drawing of the front side component of the flow path in 6th Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a board box. It is a rear perspective view of a board box. It is a front view of a board box. (A) is a rear view of the substrate box, and (b) is a side view of the substrate box in the direction of arrow LXXIb of FIG. 71 (a). (A) is a partial front perspective view of the substrate box, and (b) is a partial rear perspective view of the substrate box. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the substrate box, and (c) and (d) are partial rear views of the substrate box. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the line LXXIVa-LXXIVa of FIG. 73 (b), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. (A) is a partial front view of the board box, and (b) is a partial rear view of the board box. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 75 (b). (A) is a partial front view of the board box, and (b) is a partial rear view of the board box. (A) is a partial rear view of the substrate box according to the eighth embodiment, (b) is a partial sectional view of the substrate box in the line LXXVIIIb-LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box. 9 is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover in the embodiment. (A) is a partial rear view of the substrate box according to the tenth embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the line LXXIXb-LXXIXb of FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 79 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box on the LXXIXc-LXXIXc line, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box on the LXXIXd-LXXIXd line of FIG. 79 (a). (A) to (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box in the eleventh embodiment, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the twelfth embodiment. (A) is a partial rear view of the substrate box according to the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the line LXXXXIb-LXXXXLb of FIG. 81 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box according to the 14th embodiment, (b) is a partial rear view of the substrate box according to the 15th embodiment, and (c) is a partial rear view of the substrate box of FIG. 82 (b). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in -LXXXIIc line. (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box according to the 16th embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (a), and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate. It is a partial cross-sectional view of a box. (A) is a front view of the protective cover of the substrate box according to the 17th embodiment, (b) is a side view of the protective cover in the direction of arrow LXXXIVb of FIG. 84 (a), and (c) is a side view of the protective cover. It is a rear view of the protective cover in the direction view of the arrow LXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b). (A) is a rear view of the substrate box, (b) is a side view of the substrate box in the direction of arrow LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and (c) is a side view of the substrate box of FIG. 85 (b). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the LXXXVc line. (A) is a side view of the protective cover of the substrate box according to the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 73 (b). (A) is a front view of the protective cover of the substrate box according to the nineteenth embodiment, (b) is a side view of the protective cover in the direction of arrow LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a), and (c) is a side view of the protective cover. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 73 (b). (A) is a partial rear view of the protective cover of the substrate box according to the twentieth embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 73 (b). Is a partial rear view of the protective cover according to the 21st embodiment, and (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover in the line LXXXXViid-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 88 (c). (A) is a partial rear view of the protective cover Wg500 according to the 22nd embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover in the line LXXXXb-LXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a), and FIG. It is a partial rear view of the substrate box in the 23rd embodiment. (A) is a side view of the protective cover of the substrate box according to the 24th embodiment, (b) is a side view of the substrate box, and (c) is the XCc-XCc line of FIG. 90 (b). It is sectional drawing of the board box. (A) is a partial rear view of the substrate box according to the 25th embodiment, (b) is a partial side view of the substrate box in the direction of arrow XCIb of FIG. 91 (a), and (c) is a protection. It is a rear view of a cover. (A) and (c) are the rear view of the substrate box in the XCIIa part of FIG. Yes, (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the XCIId-XCIId line of FIG. 92 (c). (A) is a rear view of the substrate box in the XCIIa portion of FIG. 91 (a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the line XCIIIb-XCIIIb of FIG. 93 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the substrate box according to the 26th embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 94 (a), and FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of 94 (a). (A) and (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a), and (b) and (d) are the substrates in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 94 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view of a box. (A) is a partial rear view of the substrate box according to the 27th embodiment, (b) is a partial sectional view of the substrate box in the XCVIb-XCVIb line of FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 96 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the XCVIc-XCVIc line, (d) is a rear view of the protective cover, and (e) is a protective cover in the XCVIe-XCVIe line of FIG. 96 (d). It is a cross-sectional view of. (A) is a rear view of the substrate box in the XCVIIa portion of FIG. 96 (a), (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the XCVIb-XCVIb line of FIG. 96 (a), and (c). Is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the XCVIc-XCVIc line of FIG. 96 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the substrate box according to the 28th embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 98 (a). (A) is a partial front view of the substrate box according to the 29th embodiment, (b) is a side view of the protective cover in the direction of arrow XCIXb of FIG. 99 (a), and FIG. 99 (c) is a side view of the protective cover. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the XCIXc-XCIXc line of (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the substrate box according to the thirtieth embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box on the Cb-Cb line of FIG. 100 (a). It is a rear view of the protective cover in 31st Embodiment. (A) is a partial rear view of the substrate box in the 32nd embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in line CIIb-CIIb of FIG. 102 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box according to the 33rd embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box according to the 34th embodiment. (A) is a partial rear view of the substrate box in the 35th embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). It is a partial rear view of the substrate box in the 36th embodiment. (A) is a partial rear view of the substrate box according to the 37th embodiment, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box in the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). (A) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box according to the 38th embodiment, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box according to the 39th embodiment, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box according to the 40th embodiment. It is a partial rear view of the protective cover of.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 55, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (back) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board A13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board A13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board A13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board A13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board A13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. NS.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the area around the illumination portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board A13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board A13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board A13 has a base plate A60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for ball guidance, and a rail 61. , 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame 12 (FIG. It is attached to the back surface side (or front surface side) of (see 1).

The base plate A60 is formed of a wooden plate member. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and tapping screws are provided from the front side of the game board A13. It is fixed by etc. The base plate A60 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side thereof.

The front central portion of the game board A13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board A13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board A13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board A13, and the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board A13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board A13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board A13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board A13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than during normal times. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

The state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate that can be slid back and forth. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the opening / closing plate is retracted behind the front surface of the base plate A60, the game ball can enter the second winning opening 640 side, and the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state. Is configured so that the opening / closing plate closes the space between the game area and the second winning opening 640, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 (flowing to the left).

It should be noted that the state change between the open state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate which is provided with a rotating shaft at the lower end and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing toward the game area side. good. In this case, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening / closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening / closing plate is a game. By closing the space between the area and the second winning opening 640, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric motors are applied once. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time are not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the second symbol is displayed. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate A60) that can be visually recognized through the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and synchronizes with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while synchronizing with the variable display of the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame A86 is arranged on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The middle and bottom three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 may be performed during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for each hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board A13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board A13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be, for example, two.

Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, left or right or below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board A13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 in the front view, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. The arrangement of the second winning opening 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be below the front view of the first winning opening 64, or may be on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the game area.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second winning opening 640 may be configured as five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 without the electric accessory 640a The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained, and the big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory 640a is opened by passing through the through gate 67. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 while making the state.

In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or the second by "left-handed". You can also aim for the winning opening 640. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured so that the first winning opening 64 cannot be aimed at by "right-handed", and the ball launched by "left-handed" does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be requested to be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming slow by adding a game property that changes the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state shifts to a special game state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. For example, the lower right side of the first winning opening 64, the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side may be used.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board A13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided, and the certificate stamp, etc. attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board A13 is provided with an out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board A13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing drive and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. ..

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors AMT1, AMT2, AMT3, AMT4 and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the structures of the game board A13 and the operation unit A200 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13 and the operation unit A200. In FIGS. 5 and 6, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) arranged in the opening A211a of the rear case A210 is omitted, and the back side is visually visible through the opening A211a. Further, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The operation unit A200 includes a bottom wall portion A211 and a back case A210 formed in a box shape whose front side is open from the outer wall portion A212 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A211. The back case A210 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening A211a in the center of the bottom wall portion A211. The opening A211a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The rear case A210 is extended as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board A13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion A212, and faces the game board A13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion A213 supported by the above is provided.

With the support plate portion A213 supported by the game board A13 on a surface, the game board A13 and the operation unit A200 are integrally fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the base plate A60 of the game board A13. Therefore, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A200 as a whole.

A pair of displacement regulating devices A214 are arranged on the back side of the rear case A210. The displacement regulating device A214 is configured so that the state can be changed between a protruding state and an immersive state by a manual operation from the back surface of the rear case A210. 2 It is restricted that the operation unit A500) starts moving from the effect standby state.

By adopting the displacement regulating device A214, even when the central opening of the base plate A60 is blocked by the light guide plate unit A700 as in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be easily shipped and transported. be able to.

More specifically, conventionally, the cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) is packed in the displacement range of the movable accessory to suppress the displacement of the movable accessory, and the cushioning material is removed after arriving at the game hall. As a result, it may be possible to prevent the movable accessory from being displaced at the time of shipment or transportation. However, if the central opening of the base plate A60 is closed as in the present embodiment, there is no penetration point for removing the cushioning material. Therefore, the cushioning material must be removed unless the game board A13 and the back case A210 are disassembled. This may not be possible and the burden on the game hall may be heavy.

As a countermeasure, the displacement regulating device A214 is adopted in this embodiment. As a result, the state of the displacement regulating device A214 can be switched between the protruding state for restricting the movement of the movable accessory and the immersive state for restricting the movement of the game board A13 and the rear case A210 without releasing the fixation. can.

The pair of displacement regulating devices A214 are arranged as members that regulate the movement of different movable accessories. That is, if the number of movable accessories increases or decreases, it can be dealt with by increasing or decreasing the number of displacement regulating devices A214.

The base plate A60 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured so that the player can easily see various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side. As a result, regardless of the shape and arrangement of the base plate A60, the structure arranged on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects. If there is a part that the player does not want to see, a seal member having low light transmission (or light transmission) may be attached.

The operation unit A200 is arranged on the back side of the game board A13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit A200 is arranged on the rear case A210, the right side inside the front view and the upper part inside the front view of the back case A210, and the first operation unit A400 arranged closer to the front side of the back case A210. And the second operating unit A500 which is arranged on the inner left part of the rear case A210 and the upper part of the inner side of the front view and is arranged between the first operating unit A400 and the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210. A third operating unit A600 arranged in the lower part inside the front view of the rear case A210, and a light guide plate unit A700 fixed to the front end surface of the outer wall portion A212 of the rear case A210 on the front side of the first operating unit A400. To be equipped.

Specifically, the third operating unit A600 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210 at the position below the opening A211a and the second operating unit A500 at the left and upper positions of the opening A211a, respectively. NS. Further, the first operating unit A400 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210 at the right position of the opening A211a, and fastened and fixed to the front side surface of the second operating unit A500 at the upper position of the opening A211a. First, an outline of the operation control of the operation unit A200 will be described.

7 to 12 are front views of the operation unit A200 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit A200. FIG. 7 shows the first operation unit A400, the second operation unit A500, and the third operation unit A600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 8 shows the first operation unit A400 in the overhanging state and the second operation unit A400 in the effect standby state. The operating unit A500 and the third operating unit A600 are shown.

Further, in FIG. 9, the second operation unit A500 in the overhanging state and the first operating unit A400 and the third operating unit A600 in the effect standby state are shown, and in FIG. 10, the first operating unit A400 in the overhanging state is shown. The second operation unit A500 and the third operation unit A600 in the effect standby state are illustrated. In FIG. 11, the third operation unit A600 in the overhanging state and the first operation unit A400 and the second operation in the effect standby state are shown. Unit A500 is shown.

Further, in FIG. 12, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 after rotating operation without causing a change in the outer shape from the effect standby state, and the third after ascending while maintaining the outer shape in the effect standby state. The operating unit A600 is shown.

Further, in FIGS. 7 to 12, the shape surrounded by the edge portion of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b of the light guide plate unit A700, the edge portion of the decorative member A808, and the edge portion of the center frame A86 is illustrated by an imaginary line. The shape surrounded by the imaginary line is the actual size in which the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the front view, and the shape surrounded by the imaginary line is guided outside (especially on the left and right sides). Since it is blindfolded by the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b and the decorative member A808 of the light plate unit A700, the visibility of the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 in the retracted state can be reduced.

As shown in FIGS. 8 to 10, the displacement locus of the first operation unit A400 and the displacement trace of the second operation unit A500 partially overlap with each other in the front view, but the displacement locus of the first operation unit A400 and the displacement locus of the first operation unit A400. Since the displacement loci of the second operating unit A500 are deviated from each other in the front-rear direction (they do not overlap in top view), the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 do not collide with each other during operation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, both the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500 can be in the overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 8 to 11, the displacement locus of the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A500 and the displacement locus of the third operation unit A600 partially overlap each other in the front view. Therefore, for example, when the first operation unit A400 or the second operation unit A500 is in the overhanging state, if the third operation unit A600 changes state from the effect standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 from the effect standby state is executably controlled on condition that the third operation unit A600 is in the effect standby state. Or, the state change of the third operation unit A600 from the effect standby state is executably controlled on the condition that the first operation unit A400 is in the effect standby state and the second operation unit A500 is in the effect standby state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first operating unit A400 or the second operating unit A500 from colliding with the third operating unit A600. As a result, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the first operation unit A400, the second operation unit A500, and the third operation unit A600 can be improved (displacement loci can be allowed to overlap in the front view).

The operation modes of the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 are configured to be executed in such a manner that the vertical and horizontal lengths of the rotated rotation operation units A400b and A500b are changed during the rotation operation. Will be described later.

The operation mode of the third operation unit A600 is configured so that the raising / lowering operation of the opening / closing operation unit A600b and the opening / closing operation of the moving member A650 can be executed at different timings. That is, it is controlled so that the opening / closing operation of the moving member A650 is executed with the opening / closing operation unit A600b arranged at the upper terminal position.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in anticipation of the possibility of collision, the operation timings of the respective operation units A400, A500, and A600 may be controlled to be shifted, but the possibility of collision is eliminated from the beginning. Of course, it is possible to drive them at the same time if possible, and FIG. 12 shows a case where the operating units A400, A500, and A600 are simultaneously driven from the effect standby state and moved to a position where they do not collide with each other.

That is, each operation unit changes the state of moving the operation units A400, A500, and A600 from the effect standby state to the state shown in FIG. 12, provided that each operation unit A400, A500, and A600 is in the effect standby state. Since it is configured to be feasible by driving the drive devices that drive the A400, A500, and A600, respectively, it is possible to realize a unified operation effect by the plurality of operation units A400, A500, and A600.

In the state shown in FIG. 12, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 are in the posture immediately before the vertical and horizontal lengths of the rotational operation units A400b and A500b start to change during the rotational operation. That is, when a tilting motion more than this occurs, the driving force is consumed by changing the vertical and horizontal lengths of the rotary motion units A400b and A500b, so that the motion resistance of the rotary motion units A400b and A500b is increased. It will rise. Therefore, it is possible to easily stop the operation units A400 and A500 in the posture of FIG. 12, which is the posture in which the operation resistance starts to change.

If the tilting operation is further advanced, the amount of change in the vertical and horizontal lengths of the rotary operation units A400b and A500b becomes larger and larger, so that the operation resistance becomes larger and larger. Since this resistance can cause a change in operating resistance similar to the elastic force due to spring elasticity, the operating units A400 and A500 can be maintained in the posture shown in FIG. 12 or returned even if they are tilted too much. Can be made easier.

As will be described later, the third operation unit A600 is different from the drive device used for the elevating operation and the driving device for opening and closing the moving member A650, so that only the driving device used for the elevating operation is executed. However, by not executing the driving of the moving member A650, it is possible to easily control the third operation unit A600 to be stopped in the state shown in FIG.

In this way, it is possible to execute control for simultaneously driving the first operation unit A400, the second operation unit A500, and the third operation unit A600, and while realizing an operation with a sense of unity, each operation unit A400, A500, A600. Can be avoided from colliding.

Corresponding to the arrangement of the operation units A400, A500, and A600, the viewable range of the display of the third symbol display device 81 arranged behind the operation units A400, A500, and A600 changes. That is, when all of the operation units A400, A500, and A600 are in the effect standby state, the range (area) in which the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be seen is the maximum state (see FIG. 7), which is the overhanging state. Corresponding to the operation units A400, A500, and A600, the hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be different.

The hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 also differs depending on the degree of extension of each of the operation units A400, A500, and A600 from the effect standby state. Further, for example, even when the same operating unit (for example, the first operating unit A400) operates, the operating amount and the outer shape of the rotating operating unit A400b are different between the state shown in FIG. 8 and the state shown in FIG. (The overhanging position side is larger), so that the hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is different.

Further, for example, even when the same operating unit (for example, the third operating unit A600) operates, the vertical position is the same in the state shown in FIG. 11 and the state shown in FIG. 12, but the moving member Since the left and right arrangement of the A650 is different, the hidden range (area and position) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is different.

Further, for example, even when a plurality of the same operating units (for example, the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A500) operate, a plurality of states shown in FIG. 10 and a plurality of states shown in FIG. The number of ranges that are continuously visible as a range that is not hidden by a plurality of operating units A400 and A500 in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 due to the difference in whether or not the operating units A400 and A500 intersect. In FIG. 10, four pieces are different in the upper, lower, left and right sides, and one piece in FIG. 12).

In this way, by providing a plurality of types of ranges for hiding the display area of the third symbol display device 81 by the operation units A400, A500, and A600, the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the operation units A400, A500, and A600 can be obtained. It is possible to increase the variation of the production to make them visually visible.

That is, in the third symbol display device 81, the display effect is controlled to be developed in a range not hidden by the operation units A400, A500, A600, but the range hidden by the operation units A400, A500, A600. Is changed in a plurality of types, so that it is possible to increase the variation of the display effect in the range not hidden by each operation unit A400, A500, A600, and it is possible to improve the effect of the display effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12, when a continuously visible display area extending over a large range is maintained, the player can be relaxed by playing an animation on the full screen to make the player visually recognize. On the other hand, when the display area is visually recognized as being divided as shown in FIGS. 8, 9, or 10, the display in each divided range is distinguished (for example, advantageous development and disadvantageous development). (As the display distinguished by), if one of those displays is selected and the subsequent effect development is determined, the attention to the display in each divided range can be improved.

Next, the first operation unit A400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 26. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 14 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400.

The first operation unit A400 is rotatably supported by the support unit A400a held in the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5) and the rotation shaft rod AJ1 arranged in the lower right side of the front view of the support unit A400a. The rotary operation unit A400b and the like are provided.

In the first operation unit A400, the drive motor AMT1 is arranged on the upper left side, and the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is arranged on the lower right side. As a result, the structure around the rotating shaft rod AJ1 can be simplified as compared with the case where the drive motor AMT1 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating shaft rod AJ1, and the arrangement of the rotating shaft rod AJ1 can be moved to the right corner.

Further, as compared with the case where the drive motor AMT1 is arranged near the rotary shaft rod AJ1, the first operation unit is compared with the case where the drive motor AMT1 is arranged on the front side or the rear side of the rotary operation unit A400b. The front-rear width of the A400 can be shortened. Therefore, a sufficient space can be secured when a plurality of movable accessories are stacked and arranged in the front-rear direction of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5).

FIG. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and FIG. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. In FIGS. 15 and 16, the support unit A400a is disassembled, and the rotary operation unit A400b is shown in a non-disassembled state.

The support unit A400a has a fixed support unit A410 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5), and a drive motor AMT1 whose arrangement is fixed to the fixed support unit A410. A drive transmission unit A420, which is configured to be transmittable to the rotary operation unit A400b, is provided.

The fixed support unit A410 is arranged so as to face the vertically elongated member A411 to be fastened and fixed to the right portion of the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5) and the upper end side portion of the vertically elongated member A411 in the front-rear direction. The horizontally long member A413, the reinforcing member A415 in which the sheet metal member arranged between the horizontally long member A413 and the vertically long member A411 is bent forward, and the bent portion of the reinforcing member A415 are formed in the horizontally long member A413. The upper cover member A417 is fastened and fixed to the horizontally long member A413 in an arrangement sandwiched between the two.

The vertically long member A411 is not inserted with the cylindrical support portion A411a into which the rotary shaft rod AJ1 of the rotary operation unit A400b is inserted and the protruding tip of the displacement regulating device A214 (see FIG. 6) arranged on the lower right side. By detecting the arrangement of the effect hole A411b, the repair hole A411c formed through the fastening screw for maintenance, and the rotation operation unit A400b, the first operation unit A400 is in the effect standby state or stretched. It is provided with a detection sensor A411d for detecting that it is in the output state.

The non-directing hole A411b is formed in a portion blindfolded by the decorative member A808 on the right side in the front view (see FIG. 8). Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the rotary operation unit A400b, it is possible to easily prevent the displacement regulating device A214 (see FIG. 6) from being visually recognized by the player through the non-effect hole A411b.

It should be noted that such an effect of blindfolding also occurs in the upper displacement regulating device A214 as well. That is, the upper displacement regulating device A214 is for regulating the displacement of the second operation unit A500, but the displacement regulating device A214 is visually recognized by the player by being blindfolded by the upper decorative member A808. It can be easily avoided to be done.

As the detection sensor A411d, a photocoupler type sensor is usually used, but the detection sensor A411d is not limited to this. For example, it may be a magnetic sensor or a contact type sensor.

The horizontally long member A413 has a plate-shaped main body A413a formed in a horizontally long plate shape from a resin material, a guide elongated hole A414 formed through the plate-shaped main body A413a, and a bulge forward on the left end side of the plate-shaped main body A413a. A motor support hole A413b is formed through the bulging portion so as to support the drive motor MT1, and a plate-like extension is formed forward from the upper end portion of the plate-shaped main body A413a, and a female screw is formed on the extension tip side. It is provided with a plate-shaped extending portion A413d in which a plurality of protruding portions A413c are formed.

The reinforcing member A415 is a member that is bent and formed from a metal plate, is arranged so as to be bonded to the back side of the plate-shaped main body A413a, and is between the vertically elongated member A411 and the horizontally elongated member A413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 13). A plate-shaped main body A415a sandwiched between the two, and a bent plate A415c formed by bending from the upper end of the plate-shaped main body A415a to the front side and having a plurality of through holes A415b through which a plurality of projecting portions A413c can be inserted. A pair of holding bent portions A415d formed by bending from the bent plate A415c to form a through hole through which the metal rod AMB1 is inserted, and an elongated hole A415e formed so as to surround the guide elongated hole A414 from the outside. And.

The upper cover member A417 is a member formed of a resin material, and is screwed into the female screw of the projecting portion A413c inserted into the through hole A415b in a positional relationship in which the reinforcing member A415 is sandwiched between the upper cover member A417 and the horizontally elongated member A413. A plate-shaped main body A417a that is fastened and fixed to the horizontally long member A413 by a fastening screw, an urging spring A417b whose one end is supported by the plate-shaped main body A417a, and an urging spring that supports the other end of the urging spring A417b. It includes a damper member A417c that is urged to the right end of a range of motion that extends in the left-right direction by the urging force of A417b.

The drive transmission unit A420 is a sheet metal member in which the drive motor AMT1 is supported on the left end side, and is rotatably supported on the front side of the support member A421 and the support member A421 which is fastened and fixed to the horizontally long member A413 at both left and right ends. A transmission mechanism A423 composed of a plurality of rotating members, a covering cover A425 fastened and fixed to a support member A421 so as to cover the rotating members of the transmission mechanism A423 from the front side, a transmission mechanism A423, and a rotary operation unit A400b. It is provided with a connecting mechanism A427 for connecting the above.

The transmission mechanism A423 is a support member such that an annular belt A423a having teeth formed on the inner peripheral side and teeth having a shape that meshes with the teeth of the belt A423a are formed on the outer peripheral side so that the belt A423a can be supported without loosening. A pair of left and right pulleys A423b and A423c rotatably supported by the columnar portion A421a of A421, a drive gear A423d fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT1 so as not to operate relative to each other, and a left pulley A423c formed on the back side. The transmission gear A423f is rotatably supported by the columnar portion A421a of the support member A421 so as to be meshed with the gear portion A423e and the drive gear A423d.

The covering cover A425 is not only fastened and fixed to the female screw formed on the main body plate portion of the support member A421, but also to the female screw formed on the tip of the columnar portion A421a that supports the pulleys A423b and A423c and the transmission gear A423f. Is also fastened and fixed. As a result, the rigidity of the columnar portion A421a can be improved, and the rotation of the pulleys A423b and A423c and the transmission gear A423f can be stabilized.

In the connecting mechanism A427, the upper end side portion of the rotary operation unit A400b is connected, and the concave portion A427b on the front side receives the metal rod AMB1 so that the operating direction is set to the left-right direction, and the concave portion of the connecting member A427a. A belt A423a is placed between the prevention member A427c that prevents the metal rod AMB1 from falling off from the connection member A427a by fastening and fixing the A427b to the connection member A427a so as to close the front side, and the prevention member A427c. A belt fixing member A427d, which is fastened and fixed to the prevention member A427c in a sandwiching arrangement, is provided.

A cylindrical collar A427f through which the metal rod AMB1 is inserted is arranged in the pair of recesses A427b, and a pulley A427g that supports the metal rod AMB1 inserted through the collar in a groove on the outer circumference is rotatably connected. It is supported by A427a. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the posture of the connecting member A427a with respect to the metal rod AMB1 from being displaced, and it is possible to reduce the operating resistance.

An engaging protrusion A427h corresponding to the tooth shape formed on the inner peripheral side of the belt A23a is formed on the upper surface portion of the belt fixing member A427d which is arranged to face the belt A423a. The belt A423a is arranged so that the engaging protrusion A427h and the teeth of the belt A423a mesh with each other, and the prevention member A427c is arranged so as to face the outer peripheral side of the belt A423a (upper side of the upper belt A423a). And the prevention member A427c are fastened and fixed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the belt A423a from falling off from the engaging protrusion A427h. Further, unlike the case where the belt A423a is fixed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the belt A423a from slipping with respect to the connecting mechanism A427 while improving the durability of the belt A423a.

With such a structure, in the connecting mechanism A427, the drive motor AMT1 is driven and rotated, and the left pulley A423c is rotated by the meshing transmission, so that the portion extending to the left and right of the belt A423a is moved in the left-right direction. Along with this, it is guided by the metal rod AMB1 and moved in the left-right direction.

The connecting member A427a includes a guide elongated hole A427e extending in the vertical direction through which the columnar projecting portion A448 of the rotary operation unit A400b is inserted. The columnar projecting portion A448 of the rotary operation unit A400b is inserted into the guide elongated hole A427e and the guide elongated hole A414 of the fixed support unit A410, so that the connecting mechanism A427 is moved in the left-right direction and is rotated. The columnar projecting portion A448 of the unit A400b is moved in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

The driving force is transmitted to the rotary operation unit A400b via the connecting mechanism A427 that moves in the left-right direction in this way, and the rotary operation unit A400b is displaced. Hereinafter, the details of the rotary operation unit A400b will be described.

FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary operation unit A400b, and FIG. 18 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary operation unit A400b. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the rotary operation unit A400b has a base plate member A430 in which the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is fitted on the lower end side, and the rotary shaft rod AJ1 on a plane orthogonal to the rotary shaft rod AJ1. The moving member A440 connected to the base plate member A430 so as to be slidable in a linear direction passing through the base plate member A430, and the moving member A440 inserted through the base plate member A430 and the moving member A440 and orthogonal to the sliding movement of the moving member A440. The player is shown to change the length of the rotational operation unit 400b in the lateral direction by changing the arrangement or posture of the direction switching member A450 that is movable in the direction and the direction switching member A450. The direction switching member A450 is fitted or fastened to the base plate member A430 so as to be arranged in the space formed between the decorative member A460 for the purpose and the base plate member A430 to cover the direction switching member A450 from the front side. A covering member A470 formed in a shape is provided.

The base plate member A430 is a long plate-shaped plate-shaped main body A431 to which the rotating shaft rod AJ1 is fitted, and a pair of upper and lower guides bored in the plate-shaped main body A431 on the same straight line passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1. A plurality of auxiliary long holes A433 formed so as to extend in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide long hole A432 at a position between the long hole A432 and the pair of guide long holes A432, and an upper guide long hole A432. A pair of support elongated holes A434 formed as elongated holes parallel to the guide elongated holes A432 at the lateral end of the plate-shaped main body A431 near the lower end of the plate-shaped main body A431, and cylindrically projecting from the plate-shaped main body A431 to the back side. A pair of guide extension portions A436 protruding from the front of the lower end portion of the plate-shaped main body A431 and a plate-shaped main body A431 having a shape extending in parallel with a straight line in which the malfunction prevention cylinder portion A435 and the guide elongated hole A432 are arranged. A plate-shaped detection piece A437 that projects downward from the lower end in a plate shape is provided.

The malfunction prevention cylinder portion A435 is a through hole formed in a size that allows the protruding tip of the displacement regulating device A214 (see FIG. 6) on the right side to be inserted. The malfunction prevention cylinder portion A435 is arranged in front of the non-effect hole A411b (see FIG. 8) in the effect standby state of the first operation unit A400.

When the protruding tip of the displacement regulating device A214 is brought into a protruding state in which it protrudes forward, the protruding tip passes through the non-directing hole A411b and is inserted into the malfunction prevention cylinder portion A435, so that the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit A400b is performed. Be regulated.

The plate-shaped detection piece A437 is formed at a front-rear position so that it can be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor A411d (see FIG. 15). The plate-shaped detection piece A437 is formed on the side (back side) on which the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is supported. As a result, even if the rotating shaft rod AJ1 is bent (tilted) due to deformation of the rotating shaft rod AJ1 or the like, the displacement of the plate-shaped detection piece A437 can be minimized. It is possible to easily prevent the shape detection piece A437 from being arranged at a position deviating from the front-rear position within the detection groove of the detection sensor A411d.

By detecting the arrangement of the plate-shaped detection piece A437 by the detection sensor A411d (see FIG. 15), the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b can be grasped, so that a plurality of operation units A400 to A600 can be used as individual drive sources. Even when they are driven, it is possible to avoid a situation in which they collide with each other.

The moving member A440 is configured to be capable of illuminating the decorative plate A441 on the front side brightly by the light emitted from the light emitting means of the light emitting substrate arranged inside, and the light emitting substrate is placed between the moving member A440 and the decorative plate A441. A plate-shaped main body A442 arranged so as to be sandwiched, a pair of insertion protrusions A443 projecting from the back surface of the plate-shaped main body A442, and a vertical direction at a position corresponding to an auxiliary elongated hole A433 of the base plate member A430. A plurality of functional elongated holes A444 drilled in a shape that combines left-right tilting directions, an extension portion A445 extending parallel to a straight line in which a pair of insertion protrusions A443 are arranged, and a plate-shaped main body A422. It is provided with a columnar projecting portion A448 projecting from the upper right corner portion of the above to the rear side and being inserted into a guide slot A427e (see FIG. 15) of the drive transmission unit A420.

The decorative plate A441 includes a translucent region A441a extending in the longitudinal direction at the central portion in the lateral direction, and a plating region A441b coated with plating on both sides of the translucent region A441a in the lateral direction.

As a result, even if the arrangement of the substrate is limited to the central portion in the lateral direction due to the formation of the functional elongated hole A444, the light emission effect is produced in the translucent region A441a closer to the central portion in the lateral direction. In the other plating area A441b, the effect can be avoided from being lowered by performing the effect by the reflection from the plating.

The insertion protrusion A443 is configured to be inserted into the guide slot A432 of the base plate member A430 and to be prevented from falling out of the guide slot A432 by a screw screwed into the tip and a collar member AC1.

The functional elongated hole A444 is composed of four elongated holes, that is, a pair of upper and lower elongated holes and another pair of upper and lower elongated holes having a shape inverted by a straight line connecting the pair of insertion protrusions A443. The shape of each elongated hole is common except for the relationship of inversion.

Of the plurality of functional elongated holes A444, the pair of upper and lower elongated holes are formed at positions where one elongated hole is translated along a straight line connecting the pair of insertion protrusions A443. That is, the corresponding portions of the pair of upper and lower elongated holes extend on the same straight line or are arranged in parallel.

The extension portion A445 is formed with a width and length slightly shorter than the distance between the pair of guide extension portions A436 of the base plate member A430, and functions as a guide when the moving member A440 is moved. Further, the extension portion A445 is formed in a U shape in which the cross section in the extension direction is open on the front side. This shape not only improves the rigidity but also prevents the wiring A449 connected to the substrate from being broken. Is also working. That is, by holding the wiring A449 on the extending portion A445 from the open side of the U-shape, contact between other operating members and the wiring A449 can be avoided.

The wiring A449 is composed of a flat cable, and is composed of a wiring that can be bent in a direction corresponding to rotation around the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and a wiring that can be bent in a direction in which the extension portion A445 extends.

In the present embodiment, since the drive motor AMT1 is arranged at a position away from the rotary shaft rod AJ1 (see FIG. 14), it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotary shaft rod AJ1, and the wiring A449 provides this space. It can be used as a space for bending. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying an unreasonable load to the wiring A449, and it is possible to improve the durability of the wiring A449.

The direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460 will be described together. The direction switching member A450 is composed of a pair of left and right members, a plate-shaped main body A451, a columnar portion A452 projecting from the back surface in pairs on the left and right inner portions of the plate-shaped main body A451, and a plate-shaped main body A451. A pair of upper and lower through holes A453, which are formed in the left and right outer portions of the above, are provided.

The columnar portion A452 is inserted into the functional elongated hole A444 of the moving member A440 and the auxiliary elongated hole A433 of the base plate member A430 in order, and is a straight line connecting the pair of insertion protrusions A443 according to the arrangement of the moving member A440. It can be displaced in the direction orthogonal to. That is, depending on the arrangement of the moving member A440, the direction switching member A450 may be displaced in a direction orthogonal to the straight line connecting the pair of insertion protrusions A443 (displaced in a direction orthogonal to the moving direction of the moving member A440). obtain).

The decorative member A460 includes a pair of left and right parallel moving members A461 and a pair of left and right rotationally moving members A465. The translation member A461 includes a plate-shaped main body A462, a columnar portion A463 projecting from a lower corner on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped main body A462 toward the back side, and a plate-shaped main body A462 from the central side to the back surface on the left and right outer sides. A long columnar portion A464 projecting to the side is provided.

The rotational movement member A465 includes a plate-shaped main body A466, a columnar portion A467 projecting from the back surface at the upper end portion of the plate-shaped main body A466, and a through hole A468 formed below the columnar portion A467. To be equipped.

A female screw is formed at the tip of the columnar portion A463. The decorative member A460 and the direction switching member A450 are fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the through hole A453 on the lower side of the direction switching member A450 into the female screw.

The long columnar portion A464 has a female screw formed at its tip, but it is not used for fastening and fixing, but is used for the purpose of preventing the member from falling off. That is, the rotational movement member A465 through which the long columnar portion A464 is inserted is configured to be rotatable with respect to the parallel movement member A461.

The long columnar portion A464 is first inserted into the through hole A453 on the upper side of the direction switching member A450, and then inserted into the through hole A468 of the rotational movement member A465. By fixing a screw having a large screw head to the tip of the long columnar portion A464, it is possible to prevent the rotary moving member A465 from falling off from the long columnar portion A464.

The columnar portion A467 of the rotationally moving member A465 is supported by the support elongated hole A434 of the base plate member A430, so that the displacement is reduced. With this configuration, the displacement of the end (lower end) on the opposite side of the columnar portion A467 of the rotational movement member A465 can be made larger than the displacement of the direction switching member A450 that displaces the through hole A468.

The lining member A470 includes a translucent region A471 extending in the longitudinal direction in the central portion in the lateral direction, and a plating region A472 coated with plating on both sides of the translucent region A471 in the lateral direction.

As a result, by disposing the direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460, it is possible to maintain a high effect even at both side positions in the lateral direction where the light emitted from the moving member A440 side is easily blocked. That is, the light emission effect is performed in the translucent area A471 near the center in the lateral direction, and in the other plating area A472, the effect is produced by reflection from the plating, so that a decrease in the effect can be avoided.

The lining member A470 includes a pair of projecting portions A473 that project to the back side at the lower end portion. The projecting portion A473 is arranged at a position corresponding to the front end portion of the guide extending portion A436 of the base plate member A430.

By arranging in this way, it is possible to form an opening through which the extension portion A445 of the moving member A440 is inserted between the lining member A470 and the base plate member A430 in the assembled state. As a result, the moving direction of the moving member A440 can be stabilized in the extending direction of the extending portion A445.

19 (a), 19 (b), 20 (a) and 20 (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit A400b. 19 (a), 19 (b), 20 (a), and 20 (b) show in chronological order how the moving member A440 of the rotary operation unit A400b moves relative to the base plate member A430. Will be done.

That is, from the rotation operation unit A400b (see FIG. 19 (a)) in the effect standby state (see FIG. 7) of the first operation unit A400 to the rotation operation unit A400b (see FIG. 20 (b)) in the overhanging state (see FIG. 8). The state of relative movement up to (see) is illustrated. The vertical direction on the paper surface of FIGS. 19 and 19 is different from the actual vertical direction, and is shown in a posture in which the sliding movement direction of the moving member A440 coincides with the vertical direction of the paper surface.

The functional elongated hole A444 is formed so as to connect one end to a first parallel portion A444a extending parallel to a straight line passing through a pair of insertion protrusions A443 and the first parallel portion A444a with respect to the first parallel portion A444a. It includes an inclined portion A444b that extends linearly in the inclined direction, and a second parallel portion A444c that is formed so as to be connected to the other end of the inclined portion A444b and extends parallel to the extending direction of the first parallel portion A444a.

Here, FIG. 19A shows a state in which the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is arranged on the end side of the first parallel portion A444a, and FIG. 19B shows the columnar portion of the direction switching member A450. The state in which the portion A452 is arranged at the intersection of the first parallel portion A444a and the inclined portion A444b is shown. In FIG. 20A, the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 has the inclined portion A444b and the second parallel portion A444c. A state in which the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is arranged on the end side of the second parallel portion A444c is illustrated in FIG. 20B.

The length of the first parallel portion A444a is formed to be sufficiently long. As a result, even if the moving member A440 starts moving relative to the base plate member A430 from the state shown in FIG. 19A, the direction is switched for a while (until the state shown in FIG. 19B). The member A450 is not moved in the lateral direction of the moving member A440, and the rotary operation unit A400b can be rotated while maintaining the appearance of the moving member A440 having a short width in the lateral direction.

The inclined portion A444b extends outward from the position where the first parallel portion A444a is formed toward the lateral side of the moving member A440. Therefore, when the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430 from the state where the columnar portion A452 of the direction switching member A450 is arranged in the first parallel portion A444a, and the columnar portion A452 enters the inclined portion A444b, the direction The switching member A450 moves outward in the lateral direction of the moving member A440.

The pair of columnar portions A452 of the direction switching member A450 is inserted through the pair of auxiliary elongated holes A433, and the pair is guided in parallel. Therefore, the relative movement of the direction switching member A450 with respect to the base plate member A430 is a translation of the base plate member A430 in the lateral direction.

The speed of movement is proportional to the speed at which the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430 because the inclined portion A444b is formed in a straight line. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the movement effect in which the moving member A440, the direction switching member A450, and the decorative member A460 are interlocked with each other.

The second parallel portion A444c is not as long as the first parallel portion A444a, and is formed with the minimum necessary length. The purpose of forming the second parallel portion A444c is to improve the effect of the rotary operation unit A400b.

That is, when the first operation unit A400 is driven to the overhanging state and the drive motor AMT1 (see FIG. 15) is stopped, the connecting mechanism A427 is slightly pushed back by the urging force given to the damper member A417c by the urging spring A417b. Even when the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430 in the opposite direction (returning direction), the presence of the second parallel portion A444c makes the moving member A440 the direction switching member A450 in the lateral direction. It is possible to keep the position of.

As a result, even if a push-back operation due to the urging force of the urging spring A417b, which may occur when the control of stopping the drive of the drive motor AMT1 in the overhanged state of the first operation unit A400, occurs, It is possible to easily maintain the appearance of the first operation unit A400 (the length of the rotary operation unit A400b in the lateral direction) in the overhanging state.

In the state shown in FIG. 19A, the distance between the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 is set to the first length AD1, and a pair of straight lines passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448. The angle between the straight line passing through the insertion protrusion A443 is the first angle Aθ1.

In the state shown in FIG. 19B, the distance between the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 is set to the second length AD2, and a pair of straight lines passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448. The angle between the straight line passing through the insertion protrusion A443 is the second angle Aθ2.

The second length AD2 is configured to be longer than the first length AD1 (first length AD1 <second length AD2). The second angle Aθ2 is configured to be smaller than the first angle Aθ1 (first angle Aθ1> second angle Aθ2).

In the state shown in FIG. 20A, the distance between the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 is set to the third length AD3, and a pair of straight lines passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448. The angle between the straight line passing through the insertion protrusion A443 is the third angle Aθ3.

The third length AD3 is configured to be longer than the second length AD2 (first length AD1 <second length AD2 <third length AD3). The third angle Aθ3 is configured to be smaller than the second angle Aθ2 (first angle Aθ1> second angle Aθ2> third angle Aθ3).

In the state shown in FIG. 20B, the distance between the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 is set to the fourth length AD4, and a pair of straight lines passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448. The angle between the straight line passing through the insertion protrusion A443 is the fourth angle Aθ4.

The fourth length AD4 is configured to be longer than the third length AD3 (first length AD1 <second length AD2 <third length AD3 <fourth length AD4). The fourth angle Aθ4 is configured to be smaller than the third angle Aθ3 (first angle Aθ1> second angle Aθ2> third angle Aθ3> fourth angle Aθ4).

Therefore, in the period from the effect standby state to the overhanging state of the first operation unit A400, the rotation operation unit A400b is changed so that the distance between the rotation shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 gradually increases. As a result, the angle between the straight line passing through the rotary shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 and the straight line passing through the pair of insertion projecting portions A443 is gradually reduced.

21, 22 and 23 are front views of the first operation unit A400. In FIGS. 21, 22 and 23, a state in which the first operation unit A400 is driven from the effect standby state to the overhanging state is illustrated in chronological order.

FIG. 21 shows the effect standby state of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 22 shows a state between the effect standby state and the overhanging state of the first operation unit A400, and the appearance of the rotary operation unit A400b is shown. A state in which the state is the same as the effect standby state except for the posture change is shown, and FIG. 23 shows the overhang state of the first operation unit A400.

In the state shown in FIG. 21, the plate-shaped detection piece A437 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor A411d. As a result, the corresponding control device can be made aware that the first operation unit A400 is in the effect standby state.

The guide slot A414 is more than the arcuate portion A414a formed on the right side of the columnar projecting portion A448 shown in FIG. 22 and the arcuate portion A414a centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 shown in FIG. It is provided with a straight line portion A414b formed linearly on the left side and smoothly connected to the arc portion A414a (extending in the tangential direction of the arc portion A414a in the continuous portion).

That is, in a state where the columnar projecting portion A448 is arranged in the arc portion A414a (see FIGS. 21 and 22), even if the rotation operation unit A400b rotates, the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 The distance between them is maintained at the first length AD1 (see FIG. 19A), and the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 does not occur, so that the appearance of the rotary operation unit A400b is maintained.

In the process of the rotation operation from the state shown in FIG. 22 to the state shown in FIG. 23, the appearance of the rotation operation unit A400b is changed so that the rotation movement member A465 projects in the lateral direction of the rotation operation unit A400b.

From the state shown in FIG. 22 to the state shown in FIG. 23, the straight portion A414b to which the columnar projecting portion A448 is guided is arranged so as to intersect the circle centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 at one point. Therefore, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the arrangement of the columnar projecting portion A448 and the distance between the rotary shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448.

Since the overhanging amount of the rotary moving member A465 is configured to correspond to the distance between the rotary shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the rotary moving member A465 begins to overhang. The position of the columnar projecting portion A448 and the amount of protrusion of the rotationally moving member A465 corresponding to the position of the columnar projecting portion A448 can be specified from the structural surface.

Therefore, in a state where the amount of change (angle) in the posture of the rotary motion unit A400b is insufficient, which may cause a problem when the posture change of the rotary motion unit A400b and the extension of the rotary moving member A465 are executed by individual drive sources. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the rotationally moving member A465 overhangs and collides with the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5).

When the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 (see FIG. 15) is transmitted and the belt A423a is operated, the connecting mechanism A427 is guided by the metal rod AMB1 and is slidably displaced in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the rotary operation unit A400b is operated so as to reciprocate between the state shown in FIG. 21 and the state shown in FIG. 22 by controlling the drive amount of the drive motor AMT1, or the rotary operation unit A400b is shown in FIG. The state and the state shown in FIG. 23 can be operated to reciprocate, or the rotary operation unit A400b can be operated to reciprocate between the state shown in FIG. 21 and the state shown in FIG. 23.

On the overhanging state side (left side), the connecting mechanism A427 comes into contact with the damper member A417c and is decelerated by the elastic force from the urging spring A417b. As a result, even when the belt A423a is operated at high speed in the direction in which the first operating unit A400 is in the overhanging state, the connecting mechanism A427 bounces off on the overhanging state side (left side), and the belt A423a It is possible to easily avoid applying an excessive load to the belt A423a, and the durability of the belt A423a and the connecting mechanism A427 can be improved.

When the rotary operation unit A400b is started from the effect standby state of the first operation unit A400 shown in FIG. 21, the starting direction of the columnar protrusion A448 is the tangential direction of the circle passing through the columnar protrusion A448 with the rotation shaft rod AJ1 as the center. It will go to AT1.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 21, the angle formed by the tangential direction AT1 and the direction in which the metal rod AMB1 extends (left-right direction) is small, so that the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 can be efficiently driven. The rotation operation of the rotation operation unit A400b can be executed.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the direction of the tangential direction AT1 is parallel to the straight line portion A414b. Therefore, the resistance in the rotation direction when the rotation operation unit A400b is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front can be reduced from the state shown in FIG.

From the state shown in FIG. 22 to the state shown in FIG. 23, the angle formed by the direction of the tangential direction AT1 and the direction in which the metal rod AMB1 extends (horizontal direction) gradually increases, and the downward component of the tangential direction AT1 increases. growing. Therefore, the ratio of the weight of the force for rotating the rotary operation unit A400b increases, and a surplus is generated in the drive force of the drive motor AMT1. This surplus driving force can be used for the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430.

In this way, while adopting a configuration in which the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is used for both the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit A400b and the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, it is possible to perform these multiple operations. By configuring the timing at which the driving force is required to be staggered, the maximum value of the driving force required at a temporary point can be lowered, and the drive motor AMT1 can be miniaturized.

As shown in FIG. 23, the moving member A440 is a base plate member rather than the angle formed by the straight line connecting the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 as the transmission point of the driving force and the extending direction of the metal rod AMB1. The angle formed by the moving direction AM1 as the relative moving direction with respect to the A430 and the extending direction of the metal rod AMB1 is configured to be smaller.

In the present embodiment, the angle formed by the moving direction AM1 and the extending direction of the metal rod AMB1 is an acute angle, and the component of the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 transmitted in the extending direction of the metal rod AMB1 is directed toward the moving direction AM1. Since it can be easily secured, the driving force is transmitted in the direction of rotating the rotary operation unit A400b before the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, and the operating resistance of the rotary operation unit A400b. It is possible to avoid the situation where the value becomes large. In this embodiment, the moving direction AM1 coincides with the longitudinal direction of the rotary operation unit A400b.

When the load from the drive motor AMT1 is transmitted to the columnar projecting portion A448 in the left-right direction, the load is a downward load that relatively moves the moving member A440 in the moving direction AM1 and the rotation operation unit A400b is centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1. It is disassembled into an upward load in the direction of rotation (raising). Since the load from the drive motor AMT1 is in the left-right direction (right lateral direction), the load can be smoothly decomposed in the vertical direction in this way.

At this time, since the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is not arranged in the direction of the load decomposed in the moving direction AM1, the load also acts to rotate the rotary operation unit A400b around the rotary shaft rod AJ1.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the columnar projecting portion A448 is arranged at a position deviated from the straight line parallel to the moving direction AM1 through the rotating shaft rod AJ1, a component for relatively moving the moving member A440 in the moving direction AM1. Since the load of Can be done.

24, 25 and 26 are rear views of the first operating unit A400. In FIGS. 24, 25 and 26, the state in which the first operation unit A400 is driven from the effect standby state to the overhanging state is illustrated in chronological order, and the vertically elongated member A411 is not shown.

FIG. 24 shows the effect standby state of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 25 shows a state between the effect standby state and the overhanging state of the first operation unit A400, and the appearance of the rotary operation unit A400b is shown. A state in which the state is the same as the effect standby state except for the posture change is shown, and FIG. 26 shows the overhang state of the first operation unit A400.

That is, FIG. 24 corresponds to a rear view of the rotary operation unit A400b in the state shown in FIG. 21, FIG. 25 corresponds to a rear view of the rotary operation unit A400b in the state shown in FIG. 22, and FIG. 26 corresponds to FIG. 23. Corresponds to the rear view of the rotary operation unit A400b in the state shown in.

The operation of the rotary operation unit A400b starting from the effect standby state of the first operation unit A400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 25. In addition, FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are referred to as appropriate.

From the state shown in FIG. 25, the rotary operation unit A400b is rotated clockwise in the rear view, and the distance between the rotary shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 becomes the second length AD2 (see FIG. 19B). Until then, the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, but the direction switching member A450 of the moving member A440 does not move in the lateral direction. Therefore, the appearance of the rotary operation unit A400b changes so as to extend in the longitudinal direction, and the change in the lateral direction does not occur.

The rotary operation unit A400b is further rotated clockwise in the rear view, and the distance between the rotary shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 is changed from the state of the second length AD2 to the third length AD3 (see FIG. 20A). ), The moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, and the direction switching member A450 of the moving member A440 moves in the lateral direction.

Therefore, the appearance of the rotary operation unit A400b changes so as to extend in the longitudinal direction and to widen in the lateral direction. As described above, the change in the appearance of the rotary operation unit A400b is divided into a state in which only the longitudinal direction changes and a state in which the longitudinal direction changes and the lateral direction changes during the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit A400b. It is configured to occur in stages.

The rotary operation unit A400b is further rotated clockwise in the rear view, and the distance between the rotary shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 is changed from the state of the third length AD3 to the fourth length AD4 (see FIG. 20B). ), The relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs, but the movement of the direction switching member A450 in the lateral direction of the moving member A440 does not occur. Therefore, the appearance of the rotary operation unit A400b changes so as to extend in the longitudinal direction, and the change in the lateral direction does not occur.

As a result, the push-back by the urging force of the urging spring A417b (see FIG. 21), which may occur when the control of stopping the driving of the drive motor AMT1 in the overhanging state of the first operating unit A400 (see FIG. 26) is adopted. Even when an operation occurs, it is possible to easily maintain the appearance of the first operation unit A400 (the length of the rotational operation unit A400b in the lateral direction) in the overhanging state.

As described above, in the tilting operation of the rotary operation unit A400b, the number of members that operate relative to the base plate member A430 is different in each section. By controlling to switch the control load of the drive motor AMT1 according to the number of members that operate relative to each other (for example, the control load is increased in the range where the number of members is large, and the control is controlled in the range where the number of members is small. By reducing the load), the influence of the change in the operating resistance can be suppressed, and it is possible to easily prevent the operating speed of the rotating operating unit A400b from changing locally.

From the state shown in FIG. 25, a change in the rotation angle of the rotation operation unit A400b when the speed component on the left side of the columnar projecting portion A448 moves constantly will be described. First, in the state shown in FIG. 25, the straight line connecting the rotary shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 and the straight line portion A414b of the guide slot A414 are orthogonal to each other.

From the state shown in FIG. 25, when the columnar projecting portion A448 moves constantly on the left side, the columnar projecting portion A448 is guided by the straight portion A414b of the guide slot A414, so that the rotary operation unit A400b As shown in FIG. 26, the rotation angle Aφ1 of is set on a straight line connecting the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 as an oblique side, and a straight line connecting the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and the columnar projecting portion A448 shown in FIG. 25. It is specified as the sharp angle of a right-angled triangle whose base is a straight line along the straight line portion A414b and whose height is AX1.

Here, assuming that the first length AD1 is the unit length, the equation 1 [tanAφ1 = AX1] is established from the trigonometric function as the relational expression of the right triangle, and therefore the equation 2 [Aφ1 = arctanAX1] is established as the inverse function. do.

From Equation 2, when the height AX1 increases at a constant speed as the columnar projecting portion A448 moves at a constant speed component on the left side, the amount of change in the rotation angle Aφ1 gradually decreases. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the drive motor AMT1 is driven at a constant speed and the connecting member A427a (see FIG. 21) of the connecting mechanism A427 is moved in the left-right direction at a constant speed, the state shown in FIG. The rotation operation unit A400b can be rotated in an operation mode in which the amount of change in the rotation angle Aφ1 at the time of starting toward the indicated state is maximized and the amount of change in the rotation angle Aφ1 gradually decreases.

That is, while adopting a simple control of driving the drive motor AMT1 at a constant speed, it is possible to realize an operation mode in which the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit A400b is gradually reduced.

As a result, when the first operation unit A400 operates from the effect standby state to the overhanging state, the rotation speed of the rotating operation unit A400b is increased as it approaches the overhanging state while rotating at a high speed at the time of starting. Reduce. Therefore, the drive motor AMT1 makes it easier for the player to leave the rotation operation unit A400b in the player's field of view by maintaining the arrangement and posture of the rotation operation unit A400b in the overhanging state while giving the player a surprise when the rotation operation unit A400b appears. Can be realized by controlling to drive at a constant speed.

On the other hand, when the first operation unit A400 operates from the overhanging state to the effect standby state, the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit A400b increases as it approaches the effect standby state while rotating at a slow speed at the start. Let me. Therefore, the rotary operation unit A400b can be quickly retracted by increasing the rotation speed of the rotary operation unit A400b in the vicinity of the effect standby state while leaving a lingering sound at the time of starting the rotary operation unit A400b to the retract side. , It can be realized by the control of driving the drive motor AMT1 at a constant speed.

As a result, as the operation of the rotary operation unit A400b, the displacement in the rotational direction is conspicuous (the rotation speed is high) and the displacement in the rotational direction is conspicuous while simultaneously causing the displacement in the rotational direction and the displacement in the linear motion direction. It is possible to configure an operating state in which there is no displacement (the rotation speed is small) and the displacement in the linear motion direction is conspicuous.

That is, when the rear view clockwise rotation operation is executed from the effect standby state (see FIG. 24) of the first operation unit A400, the moving member A440 is relatively moved with respect to the base plate member A430 until the state shown in FIG. In addition, in the rotation operation from the state shown in FIG. 25, the rotation speed of the first operation unit A400 when the drive motor AMT1 is driven at a constant speed is gradually reduced.

As a result, the operating state in which the displacement in the rotational direction is conspicuous is defined as the state in which the columnar projecting portion A448 is arranged at the position where the tip of the straight line of the second length AD2 coincides with the center line of the guide slot A414. It is possible to smoothly and comfortably shift the operating state from the operating state in which the displacement in the rotational direction is not conspicuous and the displacement in the linear motion direction is conspicuous.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 26, in the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit A400b from the effect standby state, the columnar projecting portion A448 is the arc portion A414a from the start of rotation from FIG. 24 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 does not occur, and only the rotational operation occurs.

From the state shown in FIG. 25 to the state shown in FIG. 26, the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430 as the rotating operation unit A400b rotates. The relative movement modes occur in the order shown in FIGS. 19 and 20.

In FIG. 25, the first length AD1, the second length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4 shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 are shown correspondingly. The postures of the first length AD1, the second length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4 shown in FIG. 25 are the first length AD1 and the second shown in FIGS. 19 and 20. It corresponds to the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b in each state of the length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4.

That is, when the rotation operation unit A400b rotates from the state shown in FIG. 25 to the posture of the second length AD2, only the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs (FIGS. 19A and 19A and FIG. 19 (b)).

Further, when the rotation operation unit A400b rotates from the posture of the second length AD2 to the posture of the third length AD3, in addition to the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430, the relative movement of the direction switching member A450 Also occur (see FIGS. 19 (b) and 20 (a)).

Further, when the rotation operation unit A400b rotates from the posture of the third length AD3 to the posture of the fourth length AD4, only the relative movement of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 occurs (FIGS. 20A and 20A). (See FIG. 20 (b)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the relative movements of the other plurality of members are configured to occur with the rotation movement of the rotation movement unit A400b, but the start timings of the relative movements of the respective members are not the same. It is configured to be offset from each other. As a result, it is possible to avoid a sudden increase in the driving force required for the operation of the rotary operation unit A400b.

The correspondence between the change in length of the first length AD1, the second length AD2, the third length AD3, and the fourth length AD4 shown in FIG. 25 and the change in posture will be described. Although the angle between the first length AD1 and the second length AD2 shown on the right side and the angle between the second length AD2 and the third length are almost the same (about 18 degrees), The difference between the first length AD1 and the second length AD2 and the difference between the second length AD2 and the third length AD3 is more than three times that of the former in the latter case.

Therefore, when the rotation operation unit A400b rotates from the posture of the first length AD1 shown on the right side to the posture of the second length AD2, it is larger than the moving length of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 per unit angle. When the rotation operation unit A400b rotates from the posture of the second length AD2 to the posture of the third length AD3, the moving length of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 per unit angle is three times or more longer. Become.

Further, when the rotation operation unit A400b rotates from the posture of the second length AD2 to the posture of the third length AD3, the rotation operation unit A400b is larger than the movement length of the movement member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 per unit angle. When rotating from the posture of the third length AD3 to the posture of the fourth length AD4, the moving length of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 per unit angle becomes longer.

As a result, the operation mode of the rotation operation unit A400b can be gradually shifted from the state in which the rotation operation is the main state to the state in which the relative movement (linear operation) of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 is the main state. can.

Here, at the final stage of the rotational operation of the first operation unit A400 toward the overhanging state (for example, the state from the posture of the third length AD3 to the posture of the fourth length AD4 in FIG. 25), the rotating shaft rod AJ1 With respect to the columnar projecting portion A448 that moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view with respect to the center, the moving direction AM1 is configured to return in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view (see FIGS. 19 and 20).

That is, since the angle between the columnar projecting portion A448 and the moving direction AM1 is reduced so as to partially cancel the rotation angle of the rotating operation unit A400b, the moving direction AM1 in the state shown in FIG. 26 (FIG. FIG. It is possible to suppress the change in angle (see 23). Thereby, for example, even if the rotational operation unit A400b is slightly pushed back by the urging force of the urging spring A417b via the damper member A417c (see FIG. 23), the change in the angle of the moving direction AM1 due to this can be suppressed.

As a result, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit A400, not only the width of the rotation operation unit A400b in the lateral direction is difficult to change (see FIG. 20), but also the change in the angle of the movement direction AM1 is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily stabilize the first operation unit A400 in the overhanging state.

Further, according to the rotary operation unit A400b, since it is configured to be longer in the longitudinal direction toward the overhanging state, the air resistance applied to the rotary operation unit A400b from the rotational direction becomes larger toward the tilted end side. Therefore, the braking action due to the air resistance can be effectively generated.

Further, according to the rotary operation unit A400b, the direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460 project in the lateral direction toward the overhanging state, so that the area in the front-rear direction becomes larger. Therefore, since the air resistance against the fall in the front-rear direction can be increased, it is possible to easily prevent the rotary operation unit A400b from falling in the front-rear direction.

Next, the second operation unit A500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 34. 27 is a front perspective view of the second operating unit A500, and FIG. 28 is a rear perspective view of the second operating unit A500.

The second operation unit A500 is rotatably supported by the support unit A500a held in the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5) and the rotation shaft rod AJ2 arranged in the lower left side of the front view of the support unit A500a. The rotary operation unit A500b and the like are provided.

In the second operation unit A500, the drive motor AMT2 is arranged on the upper right side, and the rotary shaft rod AJ2 is arranged on the lower left side. As a result, the structure around the rotating shaft rod AJ2 can be simplified as compared with the case where the drive motor AMT2 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotating shaft rod AJ2, and the arrangement of the rotating shaft rod AJ2 can be moved to the left corner.

Further, as compared with the case where the drive motor AMT2 is arranged near the rotary shaft rod AJ2, the second operation unit is compared with the case where the drive motor AMT2 is arranged on the front side or the rear side of the rotary operation unit A500b. The front-rear width of the A500 can be shortened. Therefore, a sufficient space can be secured when a plurality of movable accessories are stacked and arranged in the front-rear direction of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5).

Further, by setting the direction of the axis of the drive motor AMT2 to the vertical direction, the front-rear width is suppressed to the front-rear width of about the diameter of the main body of the drive motor AMT2. Thereby, the front-rear width of the second operation unit A500 can be shortened.

Further, by making the direction of the axis of the drive motor AMT1 (see FIG. 14) orthogonal to the direction of the axis of the drive motor AMT2, the vibration generated when one of the drive motors AMT1 is driven (vibration on a plane orthogonal to the axis). ), It is possible to easily prevent the other drive motor AMT2 from being moved (malfunctioned).

FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit A500, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit A500. In FIGS. 29 and 30, the support unit A500a is disassembled, and the rotary operation unit A500b is shown in a non-disassembled state.

The support unit A500a has a fixed support unit A510 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5) and a drive motor AMT2 whose arrangement is fixed to the fixed support unit A510, and the driving force of the drive motor AMT2 is applied. A drive transmission unit A520 configured to be transmittable to the rotation operation unit A500b is provided.

The fixed support unit A510 is a vertically long member A511 that is fastened and fixed to the right side of the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5) and a horizontally long member A513 that is fastened and fixed to the upper end side of the vertically long member A511. And the reinforcing member A515 which is bent and formed from the sheet metal member arranged on the back side of the horizontally elongated member A513 and the lower end of the rotary operation unit A500b arranged on the lower side of the vertically elongated member A511 so as to cover from the front side. The covering member A517, which is configured in the above, is provided.

The horizontally long member A513 has a plate-shaped main body A513a formed from a resin material in a horizontally long plate shape, a guide elongated hole A514 formed through the plate-shaped main body A513a, and a bifurcated front side on the right end side of the plate-shaped main body A513a. A support portion A513b formed so that the drive gear A523d of the drive transmission unit A520 can be supported by the protruding portion, an urging spring A513c whose one end is supported by the plate-shaped main body A513a, and the urging spring A513c. The other end is supported, and a damper member A513d is provided, which is urged to the left end of a movable range extending in the left-right direction by the urging force of the urging spring A513c.

The shape of the guide elongated hole A514 is symmetrical with the shape of the guide elongated hole A414 (see FIG. 24) described above in the first operation unit A400. As a result, the rotation operation described in the rotation operation unit A400b (FIGS. 21 to 26), except that the relationship between the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit A500b (the relationship between the rotation angle and the movement width in the longitudinal direction) is symmetrical. Since it is the same as (see), the description of the rotation operation for the second operation unit A500 will be omitted.

The guide slot A514 corresponds to a portion through which the tip of the protrusion of the upper displacement regulating device A214 (see FIG. 6) is inserted. When the upper displacement restricting device A214 is in the protruding state, the protruding tip interferes with the columnar projecting portion A546 (see FIG. 28) to limit the movement of the columnar projecting portion A546.

The reinforcing member A515 is a member that is bent and formed from a metal plate, and is a metal that is bent and formed from a plate-shaped main body A515a that is arranged so as to be bonded to the back side of the plate-shaped main body A513a and the plate-shaped main body A515a. It includes a pair of holding bent portions A515b in which a through hole through which the rod AMB2 is inserted is formed, and an elongated hole A515c formed so as to surround the guide elongated hole A514 from the outside.

The lining member A517 is a member formed of a resin material, and is a main body portion A517a formed from a shape in which the left and right side ends and the lower end portions of the plate-shaped portion extend to the back side, and the main body thereof. The second operation unit A500 is in the effect standby state or the overhanging state by detecting the arrangement of the cylindrical support portion A517b formed in the portion A517a and through which the rotation shaft rod AJ2 of the rotation operation unit A500b is inserted and the rotation operation unit A500b. A detection sensor A517c for detecting the presence is provided.

As the detection sensor A517d, a photocoupler type sensor is usually used, but the detection sensor A517d is not limited to this. For example, it may be a magnetic sensor or a contact type sensor.

The drive transmission unit A520 is composed of a support member A521 that is fastened and fixed to the right end of the horizontally long member A513 to support the drive motor AMT2, and a plurality of rotating members that are rotatably supported on the upper surface side of the support member A521. The transmission mechanism A523, the left end holding member A525 that holds the left end rotating member of the transmission mechanism A523 and is fastened and fixed to the horizontally long member A513, and the connecting mechanism A527 that connects the transmission mechanism A523 and the rotation operation unit A500b are provided. ..

The transmission mechanism A523 is a support member such that an annular belt A523a having teeth formed on the inner peripheral side and teeth having a shape that meshes with the teeth of the belt A523a are formed on the outer peripheral side so that the belt A523a can be supported without loosening. A pair of left and right pulleys A523b and A523c that are rotatably supported by the horizontally long member A513 via A521 and the left end holding member A525, a drive gear A523d that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT2 so as to be relatively inoperable, and a right pulley A523b. The transmission gear portion A523e, which is a gear-shaped portion formed at the lower end portion of the tubular portion extending in a tubular shape centered on the rotation axis from the lower surface of the above and meshes with the drive gear A523d, is provided.

The rotation axes of the pulleys 523b and 523c and the drive gear A523d are configured to be parallel to each other. As a result, when the drive motor AMT2 is driven and the drive gear A523d is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the transmission gear portion A523e to rotate the right pulley A523b, which extends in the left-right direction of the belt A523a. The belt A523a is driven in such a manner that the portion is moved in the left-right direction.

The left end holding member A525 sandwiches the left pulley A523c between the upper member A525a formed of a resin material and fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body A513a to rotatably support the left pulley A523c and the upper member A525a formed of a metal material. It includes a lower member A525b that is fastened and fixed to the upper member A525a in an arrangement.

In the connecting mechanism A527, the upper end side portion of the rotary operation unit A500b is connected, and the concave portion A527b on the front side receives the metal rod AMB2 so that the operating direction is set to the left-right direction, and the concave portion of the connecting member A527a. It is provided with a preventive member A527c that prevents the metal rod AMB2 from falling off from the connection member A527a by being fastened and fixed to the connecting member A527a so as to close the A527b from the front side.

The connecting member A527a is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion A527d at the upper end portion which is in contact with the rear surface of the belt 523a, and the prevention member A527c is a sawtooth-shaped saw-like contact portion at a position corresponding to the contact portion A527d. A527e is provided.

The contact portion A527d is arranged to face the flat portion (outer peripheral side portion) of the belt A523a, and the sawtooth contact portion A527e is arranged to face the sawtooth portion (inner peripheral side portion) of the belt A523a. By sandwiching the belt A523a between the portions A527d and the saw-shaped contact portion A527e, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the flat contact portion A527d and the saw-shaped contact portion A527e with respect to the belt A523a due to slippage.

A columnar fastening portion is formed on the connecting member A527a for fastening and fixing with the prevention member A527c, and the pulley A527g is rotatably supported in one of them, and the metal rod AMB2 is formed in the groove on the outer circumference of the pulley A527g. The coupling mechanism A527 is designed so that As a result, the operating resistance generated between the connecting mechanism A527 and the metal rod AMB2 can be reduced, so that the driving force required for the driving motor AMT2 to operate the second operating unit A500 can be reduced. , The drive motor AMT2 can be miniaturized.

With such a structure, in the connecting mechanism A527, the drive motor AMT2 is driven and rotated, and the right pulley A523b is rotated by the meshing transmission, so that the portion extending to the left and right of the belt A523a moves in the left-right direction. Then, it is guided by the metal rod AMB2 and moved in the left-right direction.

The connecting member A527a includes a guide elongated hole A527f extending in the vertical direction through which the columnar projecting portion A546 of the rotary operation unit A500b is inserted. The columnar projecting portion A546 of the rotary operation unit A500b is inserted into the guide elongated hole A527f and the guide elongated hole A514 of the fixed support unit A510, so that the connecting mechanism A527 is moved in the left-right direction and is rotated. The columnar projecting portion A546 of the unit A500b is moved in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction.

The driving force is transmitted to the rotary operation unit A500b via the connecting mechanism A527 that moves in the left-right direction in this way, and the rotary operation unit A500b is displaced. Hereinafter, the details of the rotary operation unit A500b will be described.

FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotary operation unit A500b, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotary operation unit A500b. As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the rotary operation unit A500b has a base member A530 rotatably supported by the rotary shaft rod AJ2 on the lower end side and a rotary shaft rod on a plane orthogonal to the rotary shaft rod AJ2. A moving member A540 connected to the foundation member A530 so as to be slidable in a linear direction passing through AJ2, and a direction orthogonal to the sliding movement when the moving member A540 is inserted through the foundation member A530 and the moving member A540. In order to show the player that the length of the rotary operation unit 500b in the lateral direction is changed by changing the arrangement or the posture of the direction switching member A550 which is movable in the direction and the direction switching member A550. The moving member A540 and the direction switching member A550 are arranged and fixed in front of the changing member A560 and the base member A530, and the moving member A540 and the direction switching member A550 are arranged via the fixed support member A565. A cover member A570, which is fixed to the foundation member A530, is provided.

The foundation member A530 includes a long plate-shaped plate-shaped main body A531, a pair of upper and lower guide elongated holes A532 drilled as elongated holes parallel to the elongated direction of the plate-shaped main body A531, and a pair of guide elongated holes thereof. Plate-shaped main body A531 so as to form a space between a plurality of functional elongated holes A533 drilled in a shape combining a vertical direction and a horizontal tilting direction at a position between A532 and a plate-shaped main body A531. A space constituent member A534 that is fastened and fixed to both ends in the lateral direction of the lower end portion of the above, a support hole A535 that is bored in the space constituent member A534 in the front-rear direction and supported by the rotary shaft rod AJ2, and a space constituent member A534 are fastened. A pair of overhanging insertion portions A536, which are formed so as to project in the lateral direction of the plate-shaped main body A531 above the fixed position and function as an insertion portion for the fastening screw, are provided.

The functional elongated hole A533 is composed of four elongated holes, one is a pair of upper and lower elongated holes and the other is a pair of upper and lower elongated holes that have an inverted shape with respect to the pair of elongated holes. The shape of the hole is common except for the inversion relationship.

Of the plurality of functional elongated holes A533, the pair of upper and lower elongated holes are formed at positions where one of the elongated holes is translated along the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole A532. That is, the corresponding portions of the pair of elongated holes on the upper and lower sides are on the same straight line or are arranged in parallel.

Of the functional elongated holes A533, the pair of upper and lower elongated holes and the other pair of upper and lower elongated holes are displaced from each other along the extending direction of the guide elongated holes A532. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to use the empty space as compared with the case where the arrangement is not shifted, and the length of the plate-shaped main body A531 in the short-side direction is suppressed while the length of the plate-shaped main body A531 in the short-side direction is suppressed. It is possible to easily secure the length of the functional elongated hole A533.

The space constituent member A534 includes a plate-shaped detection piece A534a that projects in a plate shape in a direction away from the support hole A535 starting from the lower end on the front side. The plate-shaped detection piece A534a is formed at a front-rear position so that it can be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor A517c (see FIG. 30).

The plate-shaped detection piece A534a is formed on the side (front side) on which the rotary shaft rod AJ2 is supported. As a result, even if the rotary shaft rod AJ2 is bent (tilted) due to deformation of the rotary shaft rod AJ2 or the like, the displacement of the plate-shaped detection piece A534a can be minimized. It is possible to easily prevent the shape detection piece A534a from being arranged at a position deviating from the front-rear position within the detection groove of the detection sensor A517c.

By detecting the arrangement of the plate-shaped detection piece A534a by the detection sensor A517c, the posture of the rotary operation unit A500b can be grasped, so that when a plurality of operation units A400 to A600 are driven by individual drive sources. Even if there is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which they collide with each other.

The moving member A540 emits light from a plate-shaped main body A541 formed of a resin material, a light emitting substrate A542 which is fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-shaped main body A541 and a plurality of light emitting means such as LEDs are arranged on the front side. A decorative member A543 that is shaped to cover the upper side of the substrate A542 and is configured to have a portion capable of transmitting light from the light emitting means of the light emitting substrate A542 and is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped main body A541, and a guide length of the base member A530. A pair of insertion protrusions A544 projecting to the extent that they are inserted into the hole A532 and a position corresponding to the functional elongated hole A533 of the base member A530 are bored so as to extend in a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide elongated hole A532. A plurality of auxiliary elongated holes A545, and a columnar projecting portion A546 projecting from the upper left corner of the plate-shaped main body A541 to the back side and being inserted into the guide elongated holes A527f (see FIG. 30) of the drive transmission unit A520. To be equipped with.

By configuring the moving member A540 in this way, it is possible to perform an effect of brightly illuminating the decorative member A543 with the light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the light emitting substrate A542. In addition, the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the light emitting substrate A542 is not limited to the LED whose optical axis is arranged in the forward direction (direction orthogonal to the front surface of the substrate), and the optical axis is particularly at the end in the lateral direction. It is provided with LEDs arranged sideways (direction parallel to the front surface of the substrate). This makes it possible to improve the effect of using light, which will be described in detail later.

The lower end of the moving member A540 is arranged in a space formed between the plate-shaped main body A531 of the base member A530 and the space constituent member A534 in the effect standby state (see FIG. 27) of the second operation unit A500. That is, the moving member A540 is configured to be able to overlap the rotating shaft rod AJ2 inserted into the support hole A535 in the front view, and the degree of freedom in arranging the moving member A540 can be improved.

The decorative member A543 includes a translucent region A543a extending in the longitudinal direction in the central portion in the lateral direction, and a plating region A543b coated with plating on both sides of the translucent region A543a in the lateral direction.

As a result, even if the arrangement of the substrate is limited to the central portion in the lateral direction due to the formation of the functional elongated hole A533 and the auxiliary elongated hole A545, the light emitting effect in the front direction is the central portion in the lateral direction. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the effect of the effect by performing the effect in the near translucent area A543a and in the other plating area A543b by reflecting from the plating.

Further, the lateral end portion of the decorative member A543 does not extend toward the back surface side and does not cover the side surface of the light emitting substrate A542. As a result, the light emitted in the lateral direction of the light emitting substrate A542 is not attenuated by the decorative member A543, and the object can be sufficiently illuminated in the light emitting effect.

The insertion protrusion A544 is configured to be inserted into the guide slot A532 of the foundation member A530 and to be prevented from falling out of the guide slot A532 by the screw screwed into the tip and the collar member AC1. With this configuration, the moving member A540 is configured to be movable relative to the foundation member A530 along the guide slot A532.

The direction switching member A550 is composed of a set of members corresponding to the left and right, and is arranged in a pair in the longitudinal direction protruding toward the front side in the corresponding plate-shaped main body A551 and the left and right inner portions of the plate-shaped main body A551. The front columnar portion A552, the back columnar portion A553 arranged in a pair in the longitudinal direction protruding toward the back side on the same straight line as the protrusion direction of the front columnar portion A552, and the left and right outer portions of the plate-shaped main body A551. In order to maintain a space in which the moving member A540 can be arranged between the through hole A554 bored in the longitudinal direction and the plate-shaped main body A551, the plate-shaped main body A551 is plate-shaped at the outer left and right outer and upper outer peripheral ends. It includes a moving decorative member A555 that is fastened and fixed to the main body A551, and a through hole A556 that is bored in the longitudinal direction (direction parallel to the through hole A554) from the lower end of the moving decorative member A555.

In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped main body A551 and the moving decorative member A555 are formed of a colored transparent light-transmitting resin material in consideration of the effect. In particular, since the color of the resin is yellow, the color continuity with the plating region A543b (golden plating) of the moving member A540 can be improved, and the light emission effect during operation can be improved. Can be done.

If the plate-shaped main body A551 and the moving decorative member A555 can be made of members having the same shape that are not completely different, there is a possibility that the members can be shared, which may be preferable. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plate-shaped main body A551 and the moving decorative member A555 are composed of two corresponding members and are not formed in exactly the same shape, but the difference in the shapes is functional. It was designed from the requirements.

For example, the difference in shape at the upper end is different because a notch is formed on the side of the moving member A540 where the columnar projecting portion A546 is located to avoid interference with the columnar projecting portion A546. ing.

Further, for example, the difference in the arrangement of the front columnar portion A552 and the back columnar portion A553 is that the functional elongated holes A533 and the auxiliary elongated holes A545 are arranged at asymmetrical positions, so that the shapes are different.

By taking such a functional requirement to the configuration on the back side, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the shape on the front side of the moving decorative member A555 visually recognized by the player, and in the present embodiment, the left and right sides can be improved. By making the shape symmetrical, it is possible to improve the effect of the rotary operation unit A500b.

The front columnar portion A552 is inserted through the auxiliary elongated hole A545 of the moving member A540, and the back columnar portion A553 is inserted through the functional elongated hole A533 of the foundation member A530. As a result, the direction switching member A550 can be displaced in the extending direction of the auxiliary elongated hole A545 according to the arrangement of the moving member A540 with respect to the foundation member A530.

The back columnar portion A553 is configured so as to be prevented from falling off from the functional elongated hole A533 by a screw inserted into the functional elongated hole A533 of the foundation member A530 and screwed into the tip and a collar member AC1.

On the other hand, the moving member A540 is connected to the foundation member A530 by the insertion protrusion A544, and the direction switching member A550 is connected by the back columnar portion A553, which is sufficient to prevent falling off. The collar member AC1 is arranged between the moving member A540 and the moving member A540, and the screw is not prevented from falling off due to screwing.

As a result, even if the light emitting substrate A542 is formed close to the auxiliary elongated hole A545, the color member AC1 and the light emitting substrate A542 do not rub against each other, so that the durability of the light emitting substrate A542 does not decrease and light emission occurs. The degree of freedom in designing the shape of the substrate A542 can be improved.

Further, it is possible to prevent the screw head from interfering with the moving decorative member A555, and it is possible to shorten the front-rear distance between the moving decorative member A555 and the moving member A540. Thereby, the front-rear thickness of the direction switching member A550 can be shortened.

The changing member A560 is composed of a pair of left and right members, and is supported by a guide support member A561 that is displaceable in the through hole A554 of the direction switching member A550 (rotational displacement and displacement in the extending direction of the through hole A554 are possible). , The wing-shaped member A562 to which the guide support member A561 is fastened and fixed to the back surface side, the intermediate displacement member A563 rotatably supported by the wing-shaped member A562, and the intermediate displacement member A563 are sandwiched between the wing-shaped member A562. A fixed member A564 that is fastened and fixed to the wing-shaped member A562, a fixed support member A565 that is fastened and fixed to the overhanging insertion portion A536 of the base member A530 and rotatably supports the intermediate displacement member A563, and a fixed support member A565 thereof. A fixed member A566, which is fastened and fixed to the fixed support member A565 in an arrangement in which the intermediate displacement member A563 is sandwiched between the two.

The wing-shaped member A562 is a columnar portion that rotatably supports the intermediate displacement member A563, and is a support fastening portion in which the fixing member A564 is fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw into a female screw formed at the tip portion. A562a and a fastened portion A562b to which the guide support member A561 is fastened and fixed are provided.

The intermediate displacement member A563 is a member formed in a plate shape, and is rotatably supported by the first through hole A563a through which the support fastening portion A562a is inserted and the fixed support member A565 through which the fixed support member A565 is inserted. It includes a second through hole A563b and an insertion protrusion A563c that is inserted through the through hole A556 of the direction switching member A550 and supported so as to be displaceable (rotational displacement and displacement in the extending direction of the through hole A556 are possible).

The fixed support member A565 has a symmetrical shape in which a pair of legs on a straight line are formed from the outer peripheral portion of the arcuate portion, and is projected in a columnar shape from the lower end of the leg portion to the back surface side to extend and insert the base member A530. A columnar fixing portion A565a that is fastened and fixed to the portion A536, and a columnar portion that is a columnar portion projecting to the back side at the left and right upper ends of the arcuate portion and rotatably supports the second through hole A563b of the intermediate displacement member A563. A support portion A565b and a support portion A565b are provided.

The columnar support portion A565b has a female screw formed at the tip thereof, and the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A566a of the fixing member A566 is screwed into the female screw, whereby the fixed support member A565 of the intermediate displacement member A563 is screwed. The fixing member A566 can be fastened and fixed to the fixing support member A565 in a manner of preventing the fixing member A566 from falling off.

In the present embodiment, not only the insertion hole A566a but also the fastening screw for fastening and fixing to the fixing support member A565 without sandwiching another member is inserted as the insertion portion of the fastening screw of the fixing member A566. Hole A566b is also provided.

Therefore, the screwing position of the fastening screw can be changed flexibly. For example, fastening screws may be inserted and screwed into all of the insertion holes A566a and A566b. In this case, since the strength of the columnar support portion A565b can be improved by the strength of the fastening screw, it is possible to easily prevent the columnar support portion A565b from being damaged and the intermediate displacement member A563 from falling off.

Further, for example, a fastening screw may be inserted and screwed into either the insertion hole A566a or the insertion hole A566b. In this case, since the required number of fastening screws can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

The lining member A570 includes a translucent region A571 extending in the longitudinal direction in the central portion in the lateral direction, a plating region A572 coated with plating on both sides of the translucent region A571 in the lateral direction, and the plating region A572. On the back side of the A columnar portion A574 is provided.

Even when the shape of the light emitting substrate A542 is limited to a shape that does not interfere with the auxiliary elongated hole A545 by the translucent region A571 and the plating region A572, it is possible to maintain a high effect of the light emitting effect. That is, the light emission effect is performed in the translucent area A571 near the center in the lateral direction, and in the other plating area A572, the effect is produced by reflection from the plating, so that a decrease in the effect can be avoided.

The claw-shaped portion A573 is configured to support both sides of the decorative member A543 of the moving member A540 in the lateral direction so as to be guideable. As a result, the displacement of the moving member A540 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed, so that the moving member A540 tilts forward or backward with respect to the foundation member A530, particularly in the overhanging state (see FIG. 9). This can be easily prevented.

The columnar portion A574 to be fastened is arranged at a position corresponding to the central side portion of the pair of legs of the fixed support member A565 and the central portion of the arcuate portion, and the fastening screw inserted into the fixed support member A565 is screwed at each position. By being inserted, it is fastened and fixed to the fixed support member A565.

33 (a), 33 (b), 34 (a) and 34 (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit A500b. In FIGS. 33 (a), 33 (b), 34 (a), and 34 (b), how the moving member A540 of the rotary operation unit A500b moves relative to the basic member A530 is illustrated in chronological order. NS. In addition, in FIG. 33 (a), FIG. 33 (b), FIG. 34 (a) and FIG. 34 (b), the illustration of the color member AC1 is omitted.

In FIGS. 33 (a), 33 (b), 34 (a) and 34 (b), the rotary operation unit A500b (see FIG. 33 (a)) in the effect standby state (see FIG. 7) of the second operation unit A500. The state of relative movement from the rotation operation unit A500b (see FIG. 34 (b)) in the overhanging state (see FIG. 9) is shown.

The guide elongated holes A532 are a pair of elongated holes extending in parallel, but are not formed in a straight line. The upper guide elongated hole A532 is formed in the central portion in the lateral direction of the foundation member A530, while the lower guide elongated hole A532 is arranged at a position slightly deviated from the central portion in the lateral direction so as to avoid the rotating shaft rod AJ2. Will be set up.

In this way, even when the guide elongated hole A532 is slightly displaced, since the moving member A540 is supported by the pair of guide elongated holes A532, the moving member A540 moves smoothly in the extending direction of the guide elongated hole A532. Can be made to. Further, by shifting the arrangement of the guide elongated holes A532 in this way, the rotary shaft rod AJ2 can be arranged at the center position in the lateral direction of the base member A530.

The functional elongated hole A533 is formed so that one end is connected to the first parallel portion A533a extending parallel to the extending direction of the guide elongated hole A532 and the first parallel portion A533a, and is inclined with respect to the first parallel portion A533a. It includes an inclined portion A533b extending linearly in a direction, and a second parallel portion A533c formed so as to be continuous with the other end of the inclined portion A533b and extending parallel to the extending direction of the first parallel portion A533a.

Here, in FIG. 33A, a state in which the back columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged on the end side of the first parallel portion A533a is shown, and in FIG. 33B, the direction switching member A550 The state in which the back columnar portion A553 is arranged at the intersection of the first parallel portion A533a and the inclined portion A533b is shown. The state of being arranged at the intersection with the parallel portion A533c is shown, and FIG. 34 (b) shows the state of the back columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 arranged on the end side of the second parallel portion A533c. NS.

The length of the first parallel portion A533a is formed to be sufficiently long. As a result, even if the moving member A540 starts moving relative to the foundation member A530 from the state shown in FIG. 33A, the direction switching member is for a while (until the state shown in FIG. 33B). The A550 is configured so as to be difficult to move in the lateral direction of the moving member A540.

In the operation of the second operation unit A500, the relative movement of the moving member A540 with respect to the base member A530 is performed at the same time as the rotational operation of the rotational operation unit A500b centered on the rotary shaft rod AJ2. From the state shown in FIG. 33 to the state shown in FIG. 33 (b), the rotary operation unit A500b can be rotated while maintaining the appearance of a short width in the lateral direction.

The inclined portion A533b extends from the position where the first parallel portion A533a is formed toward the outside of the foundation member A530 in the lateral direction. Therefore, when the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 from the state where the back columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is arranged in the first parallel portion A533a, and the back columnar portion A553 enters the inclined portion A533b, The direction switching member A550 moves outward in the lateral direction of the moving member A540.

A pair of back columnar portions A553 of the direction switching member A550 are inserted through a pair of auxiliary elongated holes A545 (see FIG. 32), and the pair is guided in parallel. Therefore, the relative movement of the direction switching member A550 with respect to the moving member A540 is a translation of the moving member A540 in the lateral direction.

The speed of movement is proportional to the speed at which the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 because the inclined portion A533b is formed in a straight line. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute the operation effect in which the moving member A540 and the direction switching member A550 are interlocked with each other.

The second parallel portion A533c is not as long as the first parallel portion A533a, and is formed with the minimum necessary length. The purpose of forming the second parallel portion A533c is to improve the effect of the rotary operation unit A500b.

That is, when the second operation unit A500 is driven to the overhanging state and the drive motor AMT2 (see FIG. 29) is stopped, the connecting mechanism A527 is slightly pushed back by the urging force given to the damper member A513d by the urging spring A513c. Even when the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 in the opposite direction (returning direction), the presence of the second parallel portion A533c allows the moving member A540 to move in the lateral direction of the moving member A540. It is possible to keep the position unchanged.

As a result, when the push-back operation due to the urging force of the urging spring A513c (see FIG. 29), which may occur when the control of stopping the drive of the drive motor AMT2 in the overhanged state of the second operation unit A500, occurs. Even so, it is possible to easily maintain the appearance of the second operation unit A500 (the length of the rotary operation unit A500b in the lateral direction) in the overhanging state.

Here, the difference between the rotary operation unit A500b of the second operation unit A500 and the rotary operation unit A400b of the first operation unit A400 will be described. First, as described above, in the rotary operation unit A500b, the guide elongated holes A532 are not arranged in a straight line.

In the rotary operation unit A500b of the second operation unit A500, the functional elongated holes A533 are not arranged in the lateral direction of the base member A530, but are arranged in the longitudinal direction. As a result, a part of the functional elongated holes A533 formed on the opposite side in the lateral direction can be inserted into the gap between the functional elongated holes A533 juxtaposed in the longitudinal direction of the foundation member A530. The length in the lateral direction can be shortened.

The arrangement of the back columnar portion A553 of the direction switching member A550 is configured to be vertically displaced according to the vertically displaced dimension of the arrangement of the functional elongated holes A533. As a result, the operation timings of the left and right direction switching members A550 in opposite directions (the lateral direction of the moving member A540) can be matched.

In the rotary operation unit A400b, the functional elongated hole A444 is formed in the moving member A440, but in the rotary motion unit A500b, the functional elongated hole A533 is formed in the base member A530.

From this, in the first operation unit A400, as the rotation operation unit A400b rotates and the moving member A440 moves relative to the base plate member A430, the functional elongated hole A444 also moves relative to the base plate member A430. However, in the second operation unit A500 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), even if the rotational operation unit A500b rotates and the moving member A540 moves relative to the basic member A530, the arrangement of the functional elongated holes A533 is basic. It does not move relative to member A530.

On the contrary, in the first operating unit A400, the auxiliary elongated hole A433 (see FIG. 17) was formed in the base plate member A430, whereas in the second operating unit A500, the auxiliary elongated hole A545 was formed in the moving member A540 (see FIG. 17). (See FIG. 32), the correspondence is reversed.

From this relationship, the functional elongated hole A533 formed in the rotary operating unit A500b of the second operating unit A500 has a vertical relationship with the functional elongated hole A444 formed in the rotating operating unit A400b of the first operating unit A400. ing.

In this way, the correspondence between the functional elongated holes A444 and A533 and the auxiliary elongated holes A433 and A545 is reversed, and the vertical relationship between the functional elongated holes A444 and A533 is reversed. The rotary operation unit A500b can also realize the same operation mode as the rotary operation unit A400b, in which the length of the rotary operation unit A500b in the lateral direction increases in the process of extending in the longitudinal direction.

In the second operation unit A500, the arrangement of the direction switching member A550 in the longitudinal direction of the rotation operation unit A500b corresponds to the arrangement of the auxiliary elongated holes A545 of the moving member A540. Therefore, as the moving member A540 moves relative to the base member A530 in the longitudinal direction of the rotating operation unit A500b, the direction switching member A550 moves the rotation operating unit A500b in the same amount as the moving amount of the moving member A540. It moves in the longitudinal direction, and at the same time, moves in the lateral direction of the moving member A540.

That is, the movement of the direction switching member A550 is relative to the moving member A540 in the lateral direction of the moving member A540 (the direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the guide slot A532), and is relative to the basic member A530. The relative movement is along the forming direction of the functional elongated hole A533.

The changing member A560 is supported by the columnar support portion A565b of the fixed support member A565 in which the second through hole A563b is fixed to the foundation member A530, while the insertion protrusion A563c is provided in the through hole A556 of the displaceable direction switching member A550. Supported, the guide support member A561 is supported by a displaceable through hole A554. As a result, the displacement of the moving member A540 and the displacement of the direction switching member A550 are different from each other in that the moving member A540 rotates with respect to the changing member A560 in accordance with the displacement amount in the lateral direction with the foundation member A530 as the fulcrum. Displacement can occur.

The rotation operation unit A500b is changed so that the distance between the rotation shaft rod AJ2 and the columnar projecting portion A546 gradually increases until the second operation unit A500 changes from the effect standby state to the overhanging state. As a result, the angle between the straight line passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ2 and the columnar projecting portion A546 and the straight line extending in the longitudinal direction of the rotating operation unit A500b (moving direction of the moving member A540) gradually decreases. Since this is the same as described above in the description of the first operation unit A400 with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the third operation unit A600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42. FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the third operating unit A600, and FIG. 36 is a rear perspective view of the third operating unit A600.

The third operation unit A600 includes a support unit A600a held by the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5) and an opening / closing operation unit A600b supported by the support unit A600a so as to be able to move up and down.

FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the third operating unit A600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the third operating unit A600. In FIGS. 37 and 38, the support unit A600a is disassembled, and the opening / closing operation unit A600b is shown in a non-disassembled state.

The support unit A600a has a fixed support unit A610 that is fastened and fixed to the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5), and a drive motor AMT3 whose arrangement is fixed to the fixed support unit A610. A drive transmission unit A620 configured to be transmittable to the opening / closing operation unit A600b is provided.

The fixed support unit A610 includes a horizontally long member A611 that is fastened and fixed to the lower part of the front view of the bottom wall portion A211 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5), and a decorative member A613 that is fastened and fixed to the upper right side of the horizontally long member A611. , The left side member to which the drive transmission unit A620 is fastened and fixed with a movable space between the right side member A615 to be fastened and fixed to the horizontally long member A611 on the lower side of the decorative member A613 and the left side portion of the horizontally long member A611. A617 and the like are provided.

The horizontally long member A611 is inserted and fixed in the vertical direction through the plate-shaped main body A611a, a set of support forming portions A611b bent from the upper and lower ends of the plate-shaped main body A611a to the front side, and the support forming portion A611b. It is provided with an elevating support rod A611c formed of a metal columnar member to be formed.

The elevating support rod A611c is supported by the support forming portion A611b in a state of being inserted into the back side portion of the opening / closing operation unit A600b to guide the elevating direction of the opening / closing operation unit A600b and to open / close the plate-shaped main body A611a. It functions to maintain the arrangement of the unit A600b in the front-rear direction.

The decorative member A613 includes a main body portion A613a formed in a box shape with the back side open, and an overhanging portion A613b formed so as to project from the left end portion of the front side surface of the main body portion A613a to the left. The overhanging portion A613b functions to suppress the forward tilting of the opening / closing operation unit A600b in the effect standby state of the third operation unit A600, which will be described in detail later.

The right side member A615 is a member that supports the light guide plate unit A700 (see FIG. 5) in collaboration with the left side member A617, and the light guide plate unit A700 is fastened and fixed. That is, the opening / closing operation unit A600b is arranged behind the light guide plate unit A700 in the effect standby state of the third operation unit A600, and is displaced upward toward the center side of the light guide plate unit A700 by changing the state to the overhanging state. It is configured to be.

The left side member A617 has a plate-shaped main body A617a, a support portion A617b formed in a columnar shape from the back side of the plate-shaped main body A617a, and a fan shape formed along an arc centered on the support portion A617b. The ascending direction is wound around a metal rod arranged on the plate-shaped main body A617a in a coaxial arrangement with the through hole A617c and the support portion A617b, and one end is fixed and the other end is arranged at a position facing the fan-shaped through hole A617c. The urging torsion spring A617d, the box-shaped portion A617e formed in a box shape with the back side open on the lower side of the plate-shaped main body A617a, and the box-shaped portion A617e formed in a columnar shape from the back side of the box-shaped portion A617e. An insertion hole A617g formed in the box-shaped portion A617e having a size capable of inserting the support portion A617f and the drive gear AMG3 of the drive motor AMT3, and an arcuate cross section from the lower edge portion of the insertion hole A617g to the back side. An covering portion A617h that is extended and partially covers the insertion hole A617g at the extending end portion, and a detection sensor A617i that is fastened and fixed to the back side of the box-shaped portion A617e in a posture that directs the detection gap toward the support portion A617f side. To be equipped.

The lining portion A617h functions as a stopper for preventing the drive gear AMG3 from coming off the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT3 and the drive gear AMG3 from falling off to the rear side. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive gear AMG3 falls off from the drive motor AMT3.

The detection sensor A617i is a device for detecting the arrangement of the drive transmission unit A620 so that it is possible to grasp whether the third operation unit A600 is in the effect standby state or the overhanging state.

The drive transmission unit A620 is attached to the rotation operation member A621 supported by the support portion A617b and connected to the opening / closing operation unit A600b so as to be rotatable between the horizontally long member A611 and the left side member A617, and the rotation operation member A621. A transmission member A625 that is rotatably supported by the support portion A617f so that the driving force of the drive motor AMT3 can be transmitted is provided.

The rotary operation member A621 has an insertion hole A621b in which a plate-shaped main body A621a and a support portion A617b of the left side member A617 can be inserted at an end portion of the plate-shaped main body A621a, and an insertion hole A621b in which a straight line in the longitudinal direction is inserted. A transmission slot A621c drilled as a long hole to pass through, a spring projecting portion A621d projecting from the upper end near the insertion hole A621b to the front side to receive the other end of the torsion spring A617d, and an insertion hole for the plate-shaped main body A621a. An insertion protrusion A621e is provided, which is formed in a columnar shape on the front side at an end opposite to the end on which the A621b is arranged and is inserted into the opening / closing operation unit A600b.

The rotary operation member A621 is rotatably supported by the left side member A617 by inserting the support portion A617b into the insertion hole A621b. The retaining screw screwed into the tip of the support portion A617b has a structure that can be attached and detached through the through hole A611d of the horizontally long member A611. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to adopt an assembly procedure in which the left side member A617 is fastened and fixed to the horizontally long member A611, and then a screw is screwed into the tip of the support portion A617b.

The transmission member A625 includes a main body gear portion A625a that is meshed with the drive gear AMG3, an overhanging portion A625b that projects from the entire circumference in a flange shape on the back surface side of the main body gear portion A625a, and an outer peripheral side of the overhanging portion A625b. An insertion protrusion A625c projecting in a columnar shape from the end portion to the back surface side, and an extension portion A625d formed by bending from the outer peripheral side end portion of the overhanging portion A625b and extending in a direction away from the rotation axis. Be prepared.

The insertion protrusion A625c is inserted into the transmission slot A621c of the rotation operation member A621 via the collar member AC1. Thereby, the rotation of the transmission member A625 and the rotation of the rotation operation member A621 can be interlocked with each other.

The extension portion A625d is arranged at a position capable of crossing the detection gap of the detection sensor A617i. That is, the posture of the transmission member A625 can be grasped by the corresponding control device depending on whether or not the extension portion A625d is arranged in the detection gap of the detection sensor A617i.

FIG. 39 is an exploded front perspective view of the opening / closing operation unit A600b, and FIG. 40 is an exploded rear perspective view of the opening / closing operation unit A600b. The opening / closing operation unit A600b is a space forming member A640 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-shaped member A630 so as to form a space between the plate-shaped member A630 formed of the resin material and the plate-shaped member A630. A pair of moving members A650 that are movably supported in the space between the plate-shaped member A630 and the space forming member A640, a drive motor AMT4 that is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member A630, and the driving force of the drive motor AMT4. A drive transmission unit A660 configured to be able to transmit to the moving member A650, a back cover member A670 to be fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member A630 so as to sandwich the drive transmission unit A660 between the plate-shaped member A630, and a back cover member A670 thereof. The guide unit A680 is fastened and fixed to the back cover member A670 so as to sandwich the elevating support rod A611c with the back cover member A670.

The plate-shaped member A630 is formed in an arc shape centered on the plate-shaped main body A631, the protruding support portion A632 projecting in a columnar shape on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A631, and the protruding support portion A632. The outer edge of the plate-shaped main body A631 to form a space between the pair of arcuate holes A633, the projecting support portion A634 projecting in parallel with the projecting support portion A632, and the back cover member A670. It is provided with a frame-shaped portion A635 which is frame-shaped along the portion and is projected toward the back side.

The space forming member A640 is hollowed out so as to surround the main body member A641 forming the framework, the translucent translucent member A642 fastened and fixed to the front side of the main body member A641, and the translucent member A642. A non-transmissive plating member A643 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member A641 with a plating applied to the front side, and a light emitting body that is formed so that light can be irradiated to the entire area of the translucent member A642 and fastened and fixed to the main body member A641. A substrate A644 and a detection sensor A645 arranged on the back surface side of the main body member A641 for detecting the arrangement of the moving member A650 are provided.

The main body member A641 includes a pair of guide groove portions A641a that are long in the left-right direction on the back surface side, and a stopper portion A641b that is formed so as to project from the vicinity of the end portion of the guide groove portion A641a. The guide groove portion A641a is a pair of grooves arranged in parallel in the vertical direction, and is a long linear groove extending from the upper left to the lower right, and is configured to be able to guide the movement of the moving member A650. The stopper portion A641b is a protrusion for preventing the moving member A650 from falling off from the space forming member A640, and is configured to be engageable with the moving member A650 arranged at the end position of the moving range.

The flat cable A644a extending from the light emitting substrate A644 makes it possible to supply electric power to the moving member A650. In the present embodiment, the flat cable A644a is arranged so as to extend along the elongated direction of the guide groove portion A641a. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid applying an excessive load to the flat cable A644a when the moving member A650 is moved, and it is possible to improve the durability of the flat cable A644a.

The moving member A650 includes a main body member A651 formed of a pair of members having the same shape arranged symmetrically and forming a framework, and a decorative member A655 formed in a different shape and fastened and fixed to the corresponding main body member A651. Be prepared.

With this configuration, by making the shape of the part where the driving force is transmitted common, it is possible to simplify the transmission mechanism and also use the resin mold, but on the other hand, the side that is visible to the player. By disposing the decorative member A655 on the surface, it is possible to prevent the simplified shape from affecting the effect surface.

The main body member A651 is arranged in a posture in which the elongated direction is along the elongated direction of the guide groove portion A641a, and extends from the leading side to the front side when moving outward in the left-right direction, thereby forming an L-shape in a top view. A long main body portion A652 formed in the above, and a pair of roller members A653 rotatably formed and formed in a size that can be arranged inside the guide groove portion A641a.

The long main body portion A652 includes a stopper portion A652a that is arranged to face the stopper portion A641b and can come into contact with the stopper portion A641b when moving outward in the left-right direction, and a detected portion A652b that projects in a plate shape from a substantially central portion in the longitudinal direction in the lateral direction. A concave portion A652c which has a rectangular shape extending in the lateral direction and is recessed from the back surface side is provided.

The detected portion A652b is arranged in a shape capable of crossing the detection groove of the detection sensor A645. By arranging the detected portion A652b in the detection groove of the detection sensor A645, it is possible to make the corresponding control device know that the moving member A650 is arranged at the end of the movement.

In the present embodiment, since the detection sensor A645 is arranged only on the lower side of the lower main body member A651, it is sufficient that the detected portion A652b is arranged on the lower main body member A651, and the upper side. Although the main body member A651 does not require the detected portion A652b, the detected portion A652b is also formed on the upper main body member A651 due to the common resin mold.

The roller member A653 functions to reduce the operating resistance of the moving member A650 with respect to the guide groove portion A641a. That is, as compared with the case where the moving member A650 slides with respect to the guide groove portion A641a, the frictional force can be reduced by rolling the roller member A653, so that the moving member A650 can be moved smoothly. can.

The decorative member A655 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front side portion of the end portion opposite to the end portion on the side where the stoppered portion A652a of the main body member A651 is arranged, and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material. A light-emitting substrate including a light-transmitting member A656, a frame-shaped member A657 formed in a frame shape surrounding the light-transmitting member, and a light-emitting means such as an LED that irradiates the light-transmitting member A656 and the frame-shaped member A657 side with light. A658 and.

By fastening the decorative member A655 and the main body member A651, it is possible to form a U-shape in which one of the left and right directions is open when viewed from above. A flat cable A644a is arranged inside the U-shape, and one end of the flat cable A644a is connected to the light emitting substrate A658. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the flat cable A644a from protruding to the outside of the main body member A651 and the decorative member A655 and being visually recognized by the player.

The decorative member A655 is arranged so as to cover the front side of the translucent member A642 in the closed state (see FIG. 7) of the moving members A650 arranged close to each other, and in the open state (see B5) of the moving members A650 separated from each other. , The translucent member A642 and the decorative member A655 are arranged so as to be visually recognized at the same time, retreating from the front side of the translucent member A642.

That is, the arrangement of the moving member A650 is a state in which only the decorative member A655 is visually recognized to perform a light emitting effect, and a state in which a translucent member A642 is arranged between the decorative members A655 and these are simultaneously visually recognized to perform a light emitting effect. It can be switched according to.

The drive transmission unit A660 includes a drive gear A661 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor AMT4 so as not to rotate relative to the drive shaft, a rotating plate member A662 rotatably supported by the projecting support portion A632 of the plate-shaped member A630, and a plate-shaped member. A transmission gear A663 that is rotatably supported by a projecting support portion A634 of the member A630 and interlocks the drive gear A661 and the rotary plate member A662 is provided.

The rotating plate member A662 includes a through hole A662a in which a protrusion support portion A632 is inserted so as to be inserted, a pair of fan-shaped plate portions A662b formed in a fan shape centered on the through hole A662a, and one fan-shaped plate portion. A position that is rotationally symmetric with respect to the arcuate gear portion A662c in which gear teeth meshed with the transmission gear A663 are formed in the arcuate portion of A662b and the through hole A662a (in this embodiment, a position displaced by 180 degrees). ) Provided a pair of projecting portions A662d projecting in a columnar shape on the front side of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b.

The area where the rotating plate member A662 and the plate-shaped main body A631 are rubbed because the rotating plate member A662 is formed not as a circular disk-shaped member but as if a part of a circle is hollowed out. Can be reduced. As a result, the resistance generated when the rotating plate member A662 rotates can be reduced, so that the driving force required for the drive motor AMT4 can be reduced.

The projecting portion A662d passes through the arcuate hole A633 of the plate-shaped member A630 and is inserted into the recessed portion A652c of the moving member A650. That is, the arrangement of the projecting portion A662d is changed, so that the arrangement of the recessed portion A652c is changed in conjunction with the movement of the moving member A650.

The back cover member A670 has an outer shape having the same outer shape as the frame-shaped portion A635 of the plate-shaped member A630, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-shaped member A630. It is related to the overhanging portion A672, the pair of upper and lower protruding support portions A673 projecting on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A671 to support the rotation axis of the rotating member of the guide unit A680, and the rotation locus of the rotating plate member A662. The plate-shaped main body A671 is provided with a plurality of arc-shaped through holes A674.

The overhanging portion A672 is a portion arranged behind the overhanging portion A613b (see FIG. 37) in the effect standby state, and temporarily returns from the overhang state to the effect standby state in a state where the opening / closing operation unit A600b is tilted forward. In some cases, etc., by receiving a backward load from the overhanging portion A613b, it functions as a portion for returning the posture of the opening / closing operation unit A600b to its original position (tilting it backward).

The guide unit A680 is a pair of upper and lower rollers rotatably configured by a box-shaped main body A681 formed in a box shape with an open front side and a rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction arranged inside the box-shaped main body A681. A pulley-like member A683, which is arranged inside a box-shaped main body A681 and is rotatably configured by a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a pair of left and right members are arranged vertically. It is provided with a long through hole A684 to be formed.

Since the roller member A682 is configured to protrude from the through hole A681a of the box-shaped main body A681 to the back side, the back surface of the box-shaped main body A681 is arranged to face the plate-shaped main body A611a of the fixed support unit A610 (see FIG. 37). In this case, the relationship of contact with the plate-shaped main body A611a can be the rolling of the roller member A682 instead of the rubbing of the box-shaped main body A681. As a result, it is possible to easily reduce the resistance received from the fixed support unit A610 when the opening / closing operation unit A600b is raised and lowered.

An elevating support rod A611c (see FIG. 37) through which the recessed portion A681b of the box-shaped main body A681 is passed is arranged between the pulley-shaped members A683. As a result, the guide unit A680 is guided by the elevating support rod A611c to move up and down in the vertical direction, so that the operation direction of the opening / closing operation unit A600b can be stabilized.

The long through hole A684 is a long hole through which the insertion protrusion A621e (see FIG. 37) of the rotary operation member A621 is inserted. That is, the driving force of the driving motor AMT3 (see FIG. 37) is transmitted to the opening / closing operation unit A600b through the long through hole A684.

41 and 42 are rear views of the opening / closing operation unit A600b of the third operation unit A600. FIG. 41 shows the opening / closing operation unit A600b in the effect standby state of the third operation unit A600, and FIG. 42 shows the opening / closing operation unit A600b in the overhanging state of the third operation unit A600.

In addition, in FIGS. 41 and 42, in order to facilitate understanding, the back cover member A670 and the guide unit A680 are not shown, and the arrangement of the arcuate through hole A674 of the back cover member A670 is shown by an imaginary line. The arrangement of the projecting portion A662d of the rotating plate member A662 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation mode of the opening / closing operation unit A600b is that the arrangement of the projecting portion A662d changes along the arc centered on the projecting support portion A632 with the rotation of the rotating plate member A662. Along with this, the pair of moving members A650 move in opposite directions on the upper side and the lower side of the projecting support portion A632 along the forming direction (direction parallel to each other) of the corresponding guide groove portion A641a (see FIG. 40). That is.

Here, as described above, the main body member A651 of the moving member A650 is composed of a pair of members having the same shape arranged in rotational symmetry, and the arrangement of the projecting portion A662d is also the rotation of the main body member A651. Since the positions are symmetrical with respect to the projecting support portion A632, which is a symmetrical rotation axis, the influence exerted by the projecting portion A662d on the moving member A650 is commonly given to the pair of members.

That is, for example, if the rotating plate member A662 rotates at a high speed, the pair of moving members A650 move in parallel at a high speed at a common speed, and even when the rotating plate member A662 suddenly reverses (changes the direction of rotation). , The pair of moving members A650 can be reversed at the same time.

The arrangement relationship between the fan-shaped plate portion A662b of the rotating plate member A662 and the arc-shaped through hole A674 of the back cover member A670 will be described. The area where the fan-shaped plate portion A662b and the arc-shaped through hole A674 overlap in the front-rear direction changes in the process of rotation of the rotating plate member A662. Air resistance is generated by the air sandwiched between the fan-shaped plate portion A662b and the back cover member A670, but the air resistance is reduced at the place where the arc-shaped through hole A674 is formed in the back cover member A670. It will be.

FIG. 42 shows the angle width of the arrangement range (see FIG. 41) of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b of the rotating plate member A662 in the effect standby state of the third operating unit A600 in the first region AE21, and rotates from the state shown in FIG. 41. The angular width of the arrangement range of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b after the plate member A662 is rotated clockwise in the rear view is shown in the second region AE22, and the plate member A662 is rotated from the state of being arranged in the fan-shaped plate portion A662b in the second region AE22. The angular width of the arrangement range of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b after the plate member A662 is rotated clockwise in the rear view is shown in the third region AE23, and the fan-shaped plate of the rotating plate member A662 in the overhanged state of the third operating unit A600. The angular width of the arrangement range of the portion A662b is illustrated in the fourth region AE24.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, one fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged to face at least one arc-shaped through hole A674 regardless of the posture of the rotating plate member A662. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG. 41 (the state in which the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the first region AE21), the overlapping area between the fan-shaped plate portion A662b and the arc-shaped through hole A674 is the smallest, that is, the fan-shaped plate portion A662b. It is illustrated as a state where the air resistance applied to the fan is maximized.

In the state of being arranged in the first region AE21, the edge portion on the rear view clockwise side of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged at a position where the fitting does not overlap with the arc-shaped through hole A674. Therefore, when the rotating plate member A662 starts rotating clockwise in the rear view, in addition to the arc-shaped through hole A674 (arc-shaped through hole A674 arranged on the left and right) originally overlapped with the fan-shaped plate portion A662b, another circle It also begins to overlap with the arc-shaped through hole A674 (arc-shaped through hole A674 arranged vertically), and the state continues until the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the second region AE22.

Since the area where the other arc-shaped through hole A674 and the fan-shaped plate portion A662b overlap increases as the rotation angle of the rotating plate member A662 increases, the air resistance can be gradually reduced from the start of rotation of the rotating plate member A662, and further. As the rotation progresses, the air resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 can be further reduced. As a result, the rotation of the rotating plate member A662 and the movement of the moving member A650 can be smoothly executed.

In the state where the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the second region AE22, the edge portion of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the rear is furnished, and the edges of the arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged on the left and right are counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. It is placed so that it overlaps the side edge. That is, when the rotating plate member A662 rotates clockwise in the rear view, the edge portion of the fan-shaped plate portion A662b on the counterclockwise side in the rear view enters the inside of the arcuate through hole A674 in the rear view.

Therefore, when the rotating plate member A662 continues to rotate clockwise in the rear view, the area where the arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged on the left and right and the fan-shaped plate portion A662b overlap gradually becomes smaller, but on the other hand, the other arc-shaped through holes A662 b. The area where the through hole A674 (arc-shaped through hole A674 arranged above and below) and the fan-shaped plate portion A662b overlap gradually increases. Since these change by the same angle, the area where the arc-shaped through hole A674 and the fan-shaped plate portion A662b overlap is maintained constant after all.

This state is continued until the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the third region AE23. That is, the air resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 can be kept constant from the state in which the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the second region AE22 to the state in which the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the third region AE23.

From the state where the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the third region AE23 to the state where the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the fourth area AE24, the fan-shaped plate portion A662b overlaps with the arc-shaped through holes A674 arranged on the left and right. Since the area is gradually reduced, the air resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 can be increased as the rotation of the rotating plate member A662 progresses, so that the deceleration of the rotating plate member A662 and the moving member A650 can be smoothly performed. It can be carried out.

The state in which the fan-shaped plate portion A662b is arranged in the fourth region AE24 is the rear view clockwise edge portion of the arc-shaped through hole A674 in which the rear view counterclockwise side edge portion of the fan shape plate portion A662b is arranged on the left and right. It is said to be a position where the furniture overlaps.

Therefore, even when the rotating plate member A662 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the rear from the state shown in FIG. 42 (when the third operation unit A600 is operated from the arrangement in the overhanging state to the arrangement in the effect standby state), the above-mentioned It is possible to cause a change in air resistance similar to the above.

Therefore, regardless of whether the rotating plate member A662 rotates clockwise from the rear view from the state shown in FIG. 41 or the rotating plate member A662 rotates counterclockwise from the rear view from the state shown in FIG. 42. In both directions, changes in air resistance as described above can occur.

Further, the moving member A650 operated by transmitting the driving force via the rotating plate member A662 is composed of a pair in the vertical direction, and the direction of the load applied from the moving member A650 to the rotating plate member A662 is the operation of the rotating plate member A662. It is the same regardless of the direction.

That is, when the rotating plate member A662 rotates clockwise from the rear view from the state shown in FIG. 41, the load from the upper moving member A650 is generated to the left, and the load from the lower moving member A650 is to the right. On the other hand, when the rotating plate member A662 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the rear from the state shown in FIG. 42, the load from the upper moving member A650 is generated to the right, and the load from the lower moving member A650 is generated. Occurs to the left.

That is, the load applied to the rotating plate member A662 is only reversed in the direction, and does not change due to the difference in the rotating direction. Therefore, regardless of whether the rotary plate member A662 rotates clockwise from the rear view from the state shown in FIG. 41 or the rotary plate member A662 rotates counterclockwise from the rear view from the state shown in FIG. 42. The operating resistance generated can be the same in both directions, and the operating speed can be made common.

Next, the light guide plate unit A700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 48. FIG. 43 is an exploded front perspective view of the light guide plate unit A700, and FIG. 44 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light guide plate unit A700.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the light guide plate unit A700 is held by the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5) and is formed to cover most of the front opening of the rear case A210. A700a and an auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b fastened and fixed to the left side portion of the concealed light guide plate unit A700a are provided.

The concealed light guide plate unit A700a has a plate-shaped light guide plate A701 and a plurality of light emitting means such as an LED that irradiates the light guide plate A701 with light, and is a left light emitting substrate arranged on the left side of the light guide plate A701. A702, an upper light emitting substrate A703 having a plurality of light emitting means such as an LED that irradiates light toward the light guide plate A701 and arranged above the light guide plate A701, and the light guide plate A701, the left light emitting substrate A702, and the upper A pair of front and rear frame-shaped members A710 for fixing the light emitting substrate A703 so as to prevent misalignment are provided.

The light guide plate A701 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material into a rectangular flat plate shape, and has a notch A701a in the lower right portion. A groove is formed on the back surface of the light guide plate A701 along the outline of the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, etc., and light is incident on the light guide plate A701 from the left light emitting substrate A702 or the upper light emitting substrate A703. Then, the light is refracted in the groove portion, and the player can visually recognize the line-shaped light along the contour of a specific character or the like.

The left light emitting substrate A702 and the upper light emitting substrate A703 are arranged so that the optical axes of the plurality of LEDs are incident on the end faces of the light guide plate A701 at right angles. By configuring the direction of incident on the light guide plate A701 in two directions, the above-mentioned line-shaped light is at least when only the light from the left light emitting substrate A702 is incident and the light from the upper light emitting substrate A703. It is possible to generate two types, that is, the case where the light is incident.

The frame-shaped member A710 is formed from a rectangular frame-shaped notch A701a of the light guide plate A701, and is fastened and fixed to the front end portion of the outer wall portion A212 of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 5). The left and right fixing portions A711, a pair of lower fixing portions A712 fastened and fixed to the right side member A615 and the left side member A617 of the third operating unit A600 (see FIG. 5), and the supporting member A421 of the first operating unit A400 (see FIG. 13). ) Is provided with a contact support portion A713 that abuts in the front-rear direction.

The contact support portion A713 is arranged between the belts A423a (see FIG. 15) arranged one above the other. Since the connecting mechanism A427 is arranged on the upper belt A423a, the contact support portion A713 is arranged at a position closer to the lower belt A423a so that the connecting mechanism A427 does not hinder the movement of the connecting mechanism A427. The rigidity of the support member A421 can be used to support the contact support portion A713 of the member A710.

FIG. 45 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, and FIG. 46 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b. The auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b is capable of receiving light emitted from a plate-shaped light emitting substrate A720 in which LEDs are arranged on the front and back surfaces and a plate-shaped light emitting substrate A720 formed of a light-transmitting resin material. The front side plate member A730 arranged on the front side of the light emitting substrate A720 and the light transmitting resin material are formed in a plate shape so as to be able to receive the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting substrate A720. A front cover member A750 arranged so as to sandwich the front plate member A730 between the rear side plate member A740 arranged on the back surface side of the substrate A720 and the light emitting substrate A720 formed of a light-transmitting resin material. To be equipped with.

The light emitting substrate A720 includes a vertically long plate-shaped main body A721, a plurality of bulging plate portions A722 formed so as to bulge from the plate-shaped main body A721 to the right in an arc shape at the tip, and the bulging plate portion A722. It is a light emitting means such as a plurality of recessed portions A723 recessed on the left side portion of the plate-shaped main body A721 at a position corresponding to the above, and a plurality of highly directional LEDs arranged vertically on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A721. Up and down at a position on the back side of a plurality of front light emitting portions A724 whose optical axes are directed to the left and a plate-shaped main body A721 corresponding to the front light emitting portion A724 (positions moved in parallel on arrows FB). It is provided with a plurality of rear light emitting portions A725 which are light emitting means such as LEDs having low directivity and whose optical axis is directed to the left.

Since the bulging plate portions A722 are formed at a plurality of positions in the vertical direction, a large support area (area in surface contact with each other) between the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 and the light emitting substrate A720 can be secured. .. This makes it possible to stabilize the posture of the light emitting substrate A720 in the assembled state.

The light from the front light emitting unit A724 is received by the front plate member A730. Since the optical axes of the light of the plurality of front light emitting portions A724 are oriented to the left and parallel to each other, the front plate member A730 can be uniformly illuminated in a wide range.

The light from the rear light emitting unit A725 is received by the rear plate member A740. Since the optical axes of the light of the plurality of rear light emitting portions A725 are directed to the left and parallel to each other, the rear plate member A740 can be uniformly illuminated in a wide range.

As described above, since the front light emitting unit A724 and the rear light emitting unit A725 are arranged at corresponding positions in the front-rear direction, the range of the front side plate member A730 illuminated by the front light emitting unit A724 and the rear light emitting unit A725 It can correspond to the range of the illuminated rear plate member A740.

As a result, when both the front light emitting unit A724 and the back light emitting unit A725 are made to emit light, the light is combined to cause the front light emitting unit A724 or the rear light emitting unit A725 of the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 to emit light. The illuminated area can be visually recognized brighter.

On the other hand, even when one side of the front light emitting portion A724 or the back light emitting portion A725 is made to emit light, the bright portion of the front side plate member A730 or the rear side plate member A740 does not shift in position, which causes a sense of discomfort in the production. It can be made difficult.

Since the range brightly illuminated by the front light emitting unit A724 or the rear light emitting unit A725 is the same, for example, even if the state in which only the front light emitting unit A724 is emitted is shifted to the state in which only the rear light emitting unit A725 is emitted. , It is possible to avoid changing the pattern of light and darkness of the flat light received by the player (the pattern of which position is bright and which position is dark in the front view). This makes it possible to reduce the fatigue of the player.

The front side plate member A730 is formed on the plate-shaped main body A731 in which the front side surface is formed as a smooth surface and the back side side surface of the plate-shaped main body A731 along the contour of the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, or the like. The line-shaped groove A732 and the female screw formed in a columnar shape on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A731 are screwed into the female screw to be fastened and fixed to the frame-shaped member A710 (see FIG. 43). On a long hole that is long in the vertical direction for alignment between the plurality of fastening portions A733 to be formed, the insertion through hole A734 drilled in a circular shape for fastening and fixing the front cover member A750, and the front cover member A750. It is provided with an alignment elongated hole A735 to be drilled in the.

When the light from the front light emitting portion A724 is received by the front plate member A730, the light is refracted by the line-shaped groove portion A732, so that the outline of the shape of the above illustration is visually recognized as a line.

The rear side plate member A740 is a plate formed from a plate-shaped main body A741 having the same shape as the front view outer shape of the front side plate member A730 and formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and a plate formed from the same shape as the front view outer shape of the plate-shaped main body A741. A white sheet A742 that is light-impermeable (or has low transparency) arranged on the back side of the main body A741 and is formed from the same shape as the front view outer shape of the plate-shaped main body A741 and arranged on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A741. First through holes A741a, A742a, which are formed at the same position so as to penetrate the light-transmitting thin-walled resin plate A743 and the plate-shaped main body A741, the sheet A742, and the thin-walled resin plate A743 in the front-rear direction at the upper left corner. A743a and second through holes A741b, A742b, A743b formed at the same position so as to penetrate the plate-shaped main body A741, the sheet A742, and the thin-walled resin plate A743 in the front-rear direction on the lower side are provided.

The plate-shaped main body A741 has a smooth surface on the front side surface and innumerable textures on the back surface side surface. As a result, of the light received by the plate-shaped main body A741, when the light that has passed to the back surface side is reflected by the sheet A742, the light is diffused by innumerable grain and surface-emitted. As a result, the back side portion of the plate-shaped main body A741 can be efficiently brightened.

An illustration that is the basis of the outline of the line-shaped groove A732 is drawn on the thin-walled resin plate A743, and in the present embodiment, the color corresponding to the illustration is painted. Therefore, when the light from the back light emitting portion A725 is received by the rear side plate member A740, the illustration drawn on the thin-walled resin plate A743 is visually recognized brightly by surface light emission due to the texture on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A741.

The front cover member A750 is a plate-shaped main body A751 in which innumerable hemispherical projecting portions are formed on the back surface side, and a plate-shaped main body A751 extending from the upper edge portion and the right edge portion of the plate-shaped main body A751 to the back surface side. A753 extension edge portion, a fastening portion A753 composed of a protruding portion used for aligning the light emitting substrate A720 at the left end portion of the plate-shaped main body A751 and a female screw portion used for fastening, and a plate-shaped main body. A plurality of columnar fastening portions A754 projecting from the right end of the A751 to the back side in a columnar shape, a projecting portion A755 having a smaller diameter and a shorter projecting length than the columnar fastening portion A754, and a projecting portion A755 on the front side. It is provided with a light-transmitting decorative sticker A756 which is decorated and attached to the front side of the plate-shaped main body A751.

In the assembly, the projecting portion A755 is inserted into the positioning elongated hole A735 of the front side plate member A730, and the columnar fastening portion A754 is inserted into the insertion through hole of the front side plate member A730 to cover the front side plate member A730. It can be aligned with the member A750.

Further, the light emitting substrate A720 is aligned with the fastening portion A753 so as to be overlapped with the front side plate member A730, and the rear side plate member A740 is arranged so as to be overlapped with the light emitting substrate A720. At this time, the columnar fastening portion A754 is inserted into the first through holes A741a, A742a, A743a of the rear side plate member A740, and the fastening portion A733 at the lower right of the front side plate member A730 is the second through hole A741b of the rear side plate member A740. By being inserted through A742b and A743b, the rear side plate member A740 can be aligned with the front side plate member A730.

When the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b is fastened and fixed to the covering light guide plate unit A700a (see FIG. 43) with the front side plate member A730, the light emitting substrate A720, and the rear side plate member A740 aligned with the front cover member A750, the front side plate A pressing force (fastening force) is applied to the fastening portion A733 of the member A730 and the columnar fastening portion A754 of the front cover member A750.

In the present embodiment, since the fastening portion A733 and the columnar fastening portion A754 are arranged outside the light emitting substrate A720, the pressing force (fastening force) is unintentionally excessive in the assembly. However, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the light emitting substrate A720 is cracked or damaged.

The columnar fastening portion A754 arranged on the upper right of the front cover member A750 aligns the front side plate member A730, the rear side plate member A740, and the front cover member A750, and aligns the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 with respect to the light emitting substrate A720. Pressing (pressing) can be performed at one place. As a result, the man-hours for assembly can be reduced.

47 is a rear view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, FIG. 48 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b in the XLVIIIa-XLVIIIa line of FIG. 47, and FIG. 48 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b. It is sectional drawing of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b in line XLVIIIb-XLVIIIb of the above. In FIG. 48A, a cross section passing through the center of the columnar fastening portion A754 is shown.

When assembling the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the female screw of the fastening portion A753 is formed when the light emitting substrate A720 is assembled to the front cover member A750 after the front side plate member A730 is aligned and assembled to the front cover member A750. The height (position in the front-rear direction) of the end surface of the fastening portion and the back surface side surface of the front side plate member A730 with which the bulging plate portion A722 abuts on the surface is matched, and the posture of the light emitting substrate A720 is stable. It has become like.

Further, when the rear side plate member A740 is assembled from the back of the light emitting substrate A720, the front side surface of the rear side plate member A740 comes into contact with the bulging plate portion A722 over a wide area, so that the posture of the rear side plate member A740 is stable and local. We are trying to reduce the load.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 (a), since the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 are formed so as to have the same shape overlapping with the light emitting substrate A720, they are screwed into the columnar fastening portion A754. The pressing force by the fastening screw is transmitted to the light emitting substrate A720 in a well-balanced manner via the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740. Since it is possible to prevent the pressing force from functioning as a force for shearing the light emitting substrate A720, it is possible to avoid cracking or chipping of the light emitting substrate A720.

By applying pressing pressure from the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 to the edge of the light emitting substrate A720, the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 are pressed against the front and back surfaces of the light emitting substrate A720.

As a result, by accurately aligning the front and rear positions of the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 with respect to the plate-shaped main body A721 of the light emitting substrate A720, the front and rear positions of the front side plate member A730 with respect to the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear position with respect to the rear light emitting portion A725 Since the front-rear position of the side plate member A740 can be easily aligned, the light receiving position with respect to the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 can be easily aligned.

The columnar fastening portion A754 is arranged at a position (interval position) that does not overlap with the optical axis of the front light emitting portion A724 and the rear light emitting portion A725. As a result, the cylindrical fastening portion A754 does not block the optical axis of the light from the front light emitting portion A724 received by the front plate member A730, so that the effect of the light emitting effect using the front plate member A730 can be improved. Can be done.

FIG. 48 (b) is shown as a cross section passing through the center of the back light emitting portion A725, which is the third from the bottom. As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48 (b), the fastening portion A733 is arranged at a position overlapping the optical axis of the rear light emitting portion A725.

Even when the fastening portion A733 is arranged in this way, the fastening portion A733 is not a portion that penetrates the front plate member A730 and does not block the light of the front light emitting portion A724. Further, since the light received by the rear side plate member A740 has a slightly lower directivity because the rear side plate member A740 is surface-emitted (because an LED having a low directivity is easily selected), the fastening portion is on the optical axis. Even if the A733 is arranged, the light is not completely blocked, so that the influence on the light emission effect can be reduced. That is, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the fastening portion A733 of the front side plate member A730 without lowering the effect of the light emitting effect using the rear side plate member A740.

In fastening and fixing the rear side plate member A740 to the front cover member A750, the front side surface of the plate-shaped main body A741 is fastened and fixed so as to sandwich the left edge of the thin-walled resin plate A743 with the back side surface of the plate-shaped main body A721. This prevents the thin-walled resin plate A743 from floating from the plate-shaped main body A741.

In this case, the load applied to the thin-walled resin plate A743 is not a load generated at points like the fastening screw, but a line (a line () along the left edge of the thin-walled resin plate A743 between the light emitting substrate A720 and the plate-shaped main body A721. Since the load is generated on the surface), the pressing force per unit area applied to the thin-walled resin plate A743 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the thin-walled resin plate A743.

As shown in FIGS. 48 (a) and 48 (b), the traveling path AL1 of the irradiation light from the front light emitting unit A724 selected from the highly directional LEDs is received by the front side plate member A730 and then before. It extends in the left-right direction until it reaches the line-shaped groove portion A732 in a manner of total reflection on the front and rear surfaces of the side plate member A730, and when it reaches the line-shaped groove portion A732, it is refracted and its direction is changed to the front side.

Therefore, when the front side plate member A730 is visually recognized from the front side and the light is emitted from the front light emitting portion A724, the light from the line-shaped groove portion A732 toward the front side reaches the player's eyes, so that the line shape The outline of the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. as the original shape of the groove A732 can be visually recognized as if it is shining.

Since the light from the rear light emitting unit A725 is considered to have lower directivity than the light from the front light emitting unit A724, the light from the rear light emitting unit A725 is not in a mode of total internal reflection in the rear side plate member A740. , It functions to uniformly illuminate the rear plate member A740.

As shown in FIG. 48, the end portion of the front side plate member A730 on the front light emitting portion A724 side and the end portion of the rear side plate member A740 on the back light emitting portion A725 side are the front light emitting portion A724 and the back light emitting portion A725 of the light emitting substrate A720. It is arranged on the front light emitting portion A724 and the back light emitting portion A725 side from the end portion on the irradiation direction side (right side).

As a result, the plate-shaped main body A721 of the light emitting substrate A720 can be used as a shielding plate, so that the light emitted from the front light emitting portion A724 (rear light emitting portion A725) is received by the front side plate member A730 (rear side plate member A740). You can avoid leaking before it is done. This makes it easier to avoid, for example, a situation in which the light emitted from the front light emitting unit A724 is received by the rear side plate member A740 and a situation in which the light emitted from the rear light emitting unit A725 is received by the front side plate member A730. This makes it easier to avoid poor light emission effects.

When the plate-shaped main body A751 receives the light from the front side by the innumerable hemispherical projecting portions A751a formed on the back side, the plate-shaped main body A751 diffuses the light and causes surface emission. As a result, the effect of the light effect can be improved, and the visibility of the back side of the front cover member A750 can be lowered, so that the light emitting substrate A720 can be used as a blindfold.

The front light emitting portion A724 of the light emitting substrate A720 is arranged on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A751, and the light emitted from the front light emitting portion A724 is a front side plate member in a direction orthogonal to the direction toward the plate-shaped main body A751. Since it is incident on the A730 and totally reflected inside the front plate member A730, the plate-shaped main body A751 is hard to be illuminated by the light emitted from the front light emitting portion A724, and is visually recognized darkly and used as an effect area. There is a situation that it is difficult.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the received light can be diffused by the innumerable hemispherical projecting portions A751a formed on the back surface side of the plate-shaped main body A751, so that the player is provided with the plate-shaped main body A751. It can be visually recognized in a bright state.

Further, by attaching a decorative sticker A756 having a shape covering the entire front side surface of the plate-shaped main body A751 to the front side of the plate-shaped main body A751, innumerable projecting portions formed on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A751 by light. The effect that the shape of A751a is conspicuous can be reduced, and the visibility of the decoration on the front side of the brightly illuminated decorative sticker A756 can be improved.

49 (a) to 49 (f) are schematic front views of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b schematically showing the visual mode of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b. For convenience of explanation, the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b is shown in a rectangular outer shape, and the triangular illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 are schematically shown inside. The triangular illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 correspond to an example of the outline of the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. formed by the thin-walled resin plate A743 and the line-shaped groove A732 (see FIG. 46).

In FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (f), the auxiliary light guide plate is different depending on whether the front light emitting unit A724 (see FIG. 45) is turned on or off and the rear light emitting unit A725 (see FIG. 46) is turned on or off. An example of the difference in appearance of the unit A700b is illustrated.

In FIG. 49 (a), the case where the front light emitting unit A724 (see FIG. 45) is turned off and the rear light emitting unit A725 (see FIG. 46) is turned off is illustrated. In this case, the illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin-walled resin plate A743 are visible.

In FIG. 49 (b), the case where the front light emitting unit A724 (see FIG. 45) is turned off and the rear light emitting unit A725 (see FIG. 46) is turned on is illustrated. In this case, the illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 including the specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin-walled resin plate A743 can be visually recognized in an illuminated state.

In FIG. 49 (c), the case where the front light emitting unit A724 (see FIG. 45) is turned on and the rear light emitting unit A725 (see FIG. 46) is turned off is shown. In this case, the contours of the shapes of the illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 including the specific character, logo, etc. formed in the line-shaped groove A732 (see FIG. 46) are illuminated and visually recognized as line-shaped light. In this case, the shapes of the illustrations AIL1 and AIL2 including the specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin-walled resin plate A743 are blocked by the line-shaped light, and the visibility is lowered.

In FIG. 49 (d), the case where the front light emitting unit A724 (see FIG. 45) is lit and the rear light emitting unit A725 (see FIG. 46) is lit is illustrated. In this case, the brightness of the front side portion of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b can be improved as compared with the state shown in FIG. 49 (c).

In FIG. 49 (e), the front light emitting portion A724 (see FIG. 45) above the upper and lower half positions of the plate-shaped main body A721 is turned off, and the front light emitting portion A724 below the upper and lower half positions of the plate-shaped main body A721 is turned off. It is lit, and the rear light emitting portion A725 (see FIG. 46) above the upper and lower half positions of the plate-shaped main body A721 is lit, and the rear light emitting portion A725 (FIG. 46) below the upper and lower half positions of the plate-shaped main body A721. The case where (see) is turned off is illustrated.

In this case, in the upper half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the illustration AIL1 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin resin plate A743 can be visually recognized in an illuminated state, and the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b can be visually recognized. In the lower half, the outline of the shape of the illustration AIL2 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed in the line-shaped groove A732 (see FIG. 46) is illuminated and visually recognized as a line-shaped light.

In FIG. 49 (f), the front light emitting portion A724 (see FIG. 45) above the upper and lower half positions of the plate-shaped main body A721 is lit, and the front light emitting portion A724 below the upper and lower half positions of the plate-shaped main body A721 is lit. The case where the light is turned off and the rear light emitting unit A725 (see FIG. 46) is turned off is illustrated.

In this case, in the upper half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the outline of the shape of the illustration AIL1 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed in the line-shaped groove A732 (see FIG. 46) is illuminated, and the line-shaped light is illuminated. In the lower half of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b, the illustration AIL2 including a specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin-walled resin plate A743 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (f), in the present embodiment, the front side of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b is visually recognized by turning on, off, and back of the front light emitting unit A724 (see FIG. 45). The light emitting unit A725 (see FIG. 46) can be changed according to the variation of the combination of lighting and extinguishing.

FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13. As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, in the game board A13, the center frame A86 is fastened and fixed to the window portion A60a of the base plate A60 from the front side so that the game ball can flow down to the left and right of the center frame A86. It is configured.

The game board A13 has a flow branch member A801 formed on the upper left side of the center frame A86, which is formed in a shape having a projecting portion for branching the flow of the game ball from a light transmissive resin material, and a light transmissive resin. A guide member A802 formed in a shape constituting two guide flow paths provided side by side as a flow path for guiding the flow of the game ball from the material and arranged on the right front side of the center frame A86, and a guide thereof. Downstream side formed in a shape forming two guide flow paths arranged side by side as a flow path for guiding the flow of a game ball from a light-transmitting resin material fixed to a base plate A60 below the member A802. A guide member A803 and an auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 arranged on the back side of the light-transmitting decorative member A808 arranged inside the center frame A86 and capable of irradiating the decorative member A808 with light are provided. ..

The flow-down branch member A801 is arranged in front of the region inside the window portion A60a when the center frame A86 is arranged on the base plate A60. In this case, the light directed from the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 to the flow-down branch member A801 does not pass through the base plate A60, but passes through the center frame A86, which is thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate A60, and reaches the flow-down branch member A801. , It is possible to suppress the attenuation of the light reaching the flow-down branch member A801.

The guide member A802 is a plate-shaped main body A802a formed from a shape that covers the upper right region A60b of the window portion A60a of the base plate A60 from the front side, and a pair of plate-shaped main bodies A802a extending from the plate-shaped main body A802a to the front side in a plate shape. It is provided with an extension plate A802b and a plurality of reduction protrusions A802c projecting from the plate-shaped main body A802a or the extension plate A802b to decelerate the game ball, and is fastened to the base plate A60 at the upper and lower positions of the upper right region A60b. It is fixed.

On the back side of the guide member A802, an auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is arranged so as to sandwich the overhang plate portion A86a of the center frame A86 which is housed in the upper right region A60b and has a thickness smaller than that of the base plate A60. .. In this case, the light directed from the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 to the guide member A802 does not pass through the base plate A60, but passes through the overhang plate portion A86a of the center frame A86, which is thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate A60, and reaches the guide member A802. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the attenuation of the light reaching the guide member A802.

The deceleration protrusion A802c projects from both of the pair of extending plates A802b facing each other with respect to the flow path on the left side, whereby the flowing game ball can be swung left and right. The flow path on the right side is projected from the extending plate A802b on the right side and is projected forward from the plate-shaped main body A802a, whereby the flowing game ball can be swung in the left-right and front-back directions.

In this way, both of the game balls flowing down the two flow paths formed by the guide member A802 are decelerated from the deceleration protrusion A802c, but the flow mode depends on which flow path is flowing down. different. As a result, the player can immediately grasp which flow path the game ball is flowing down by looking at the flow-down mode of the game ball.

Further, with such a configuration, it is not necessary to form a deceleration protrusion on the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2), so that the outer edge member 73 can be configured as a common component. As a result, the cost of the product can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, since the guide member A802 constitutes two flow paths having a width wider to the left and right than one flow path, a problem in terms of strength is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extension plate A802b forming the flow path is arranged in the center of the plate-shaped main body A802a, and also plays a role as a reinforcing material for the guide member A802. As a result, even if the guide member A802 is configured as a thin member, it is possible to easily avoid insufficient strength.

The downstream guide member A803 includes a plate-shaped main body A803a and an extended plate A803b extending from the back surface of the plate-shaped main body A803a, and their front-rear relationship is opposite to that of the guide member A802.

Unlike the two flow paths formed by the guide member A802, the two guide flow paths formed by the downstream guide member A803 have different flow path shapes on the left and right. That is, the flow path on the left side is a flow path that slopes downward to the left, but the flow path on the right side is formed as a path that meanders to the left and right. As a result, the flow mode of the game ball can be significantly changed depending on which flow path the ball flows down.

FIG. 52 is an exploded front perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810, and FIG. 53 is an exploded rear perspective view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810. The auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 includes a set of plate-shaped front light emitting boards A820 in which LEDs are arranged on the front surface, a set of plate-shaped back light emitting boards A830 in which LEDs are arranged on the back surface, and light transmission. The front plate member A840, which is formed in a plate shape from the resin material of the above and is arranged on the front side of the front light emitting substrate A820 so as to be able to receive the light emitted from the LED of the front light emitting substrate A820, and the light transmitting resin. The rear side plate member A850, which is formed from a material into a plate shape and is arranged on the back side of the back light emitting substrate A830 so as to be able to receive the light emitted from the LED of the rear light emitting substrate A830, and the white white having low light transmission. A base member A860 formed of a resin material and arranged so as to sandwich the rear side plate member A850 with the back light emitting substrate A830 is provided.

The front light emitting substrate A820 includes an upper substrate A821 arranged on the upper side and a right side substrate A825 arranged on the right side. The upper substrate A821 includes a plate-shaped main body A822, a plurality of edge light emitting portions A823 which are light emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged in the lower right corner on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A822 and whose optical axis is directed to the right side. A plurality of surface light emitting units A824, which are light emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged on the left side of the edge light emitting unit A823 and whose optical axis is directed to the front side, are provided.

The light from the edge light emitting unit A823 is received by the front plate member A840. Since the optical axes of the light of the plurality of edge light emitting units A823 face to the right and are parallel to the front plane of the front plate member A840, the front plate member A840 can be illuminated in a wide range.

Further, the edge light emitting unit A823 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED is not directed to the right, but is configured to be oriented in a radial direction such that the distance between the optical axes widens toward the right. .. As a result, the light from the edge light emitting portion A823 can be guided over a wide range of the front plate member A840.

The light from the surface light emitting unit A824 is received by the decorative member A808 (see FIG. 50) arranged on the front side. Since the optical axes of the light of the plurality of surface emitting units A824 face each other toward the front side and are parallel to each other, the decorative member A808 can be uniformly illuminated in a wide range.

The right substrate A825 includes a plate-shaped main body A826, a plurality of edge light emitting portions A827 which are light emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged in the upper left corner on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A826 and whose optical axis is directed upward. A plurality of surface light emitting units A828, which are light emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged below the edge light emitting unit A827 and whose optical axis is directed to the front side, are provided.

The light from the edge light emitting unit A827 is received by the front plate member A840. Since the optical axes of the light of the plurality of edge light emitting units A827 face upward and are parallel to the front plane of the front plate member A840, the front plate member A840 can be illuminated in a wide range.

Further, the edge light emitting unit A827 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED is not directed directly upward, but is configured to face in a radial direction such that the distance between the optical axes widens toward the upper side. .. As a result, the light from the edge light emitting portion A827 can be guided over a wide range of the front plate member A840.

Since the light from the edge light emitting portion A823 of the upper substrate A821 is received from the left end of the front plate member A840, the light from the edge light emitting portion A827 is received from the lower end of the front plate member A840. Even when the front side plate member A840 has a constricted shape so as to have a constricted portion A844 on the central side in the front view, it is possible to easily reach the entire area of the front side plate member A840.

The light from the surface light emitting unit A828 is received by the decorative member A808 (see FIG. 50) arranged on the front side. Since the optical axes of the light of the plurality of surface emitting units A828 are oriented toward the front side and parallel to each other, the decorative member A808 can be uniformly illuminated in a wide range.

The rear light emitting substrate A830 includes an upper substrate A831 arranged on the upper side and a right side substrate A835 arranged on the right side. The upper substrate A831 includes a plate-shaped main body A832 and a plurality of edge light emitting portions A833 which are light emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged in the lower right corner on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A832 and whose optical axis is directed to the right side. To be equipped with.

The light from the edge light emitting unit A833 is received by the rear plate member A850. Since the optical axes of the light of the plurality of edge light emitting portions A833 are directed to the right side and are parallel to the front plane of the rear side plate member A850, the rear side plate member A850 can be uniformly illuminated in a wide range.

Further, the edge light emitting unit A833 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED is not directed to the right, but is configured to be oriented in a radial direction such that the distance between the optical axes widens toward the right. .. As a result, the light from the edge light emitting portion A833 can be guided over a wide range of the rear side plate member A850.

The right substrate A835 includes a plate-shaped main body A836, and a plurality of edge light emitting portions A837 which are light emitting means such as a plurality of LEDs arranged in the upper left corner on the front side of the plate-shaped main body A836 and whose optical axis is directed upward. To be equipped with.

The light from the edge light emitting unit A837 is received by the rear plate member A850. Since the optical axes of the light of the plurality of edge light emitting portions A837 face upward and are parallel to the front plane of the rear side plate member A850, the rear side plate member A850 can be uniformly illuminated in a wide range.

Further, the edge light emitting unit A837 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the optical axis of each LED is not directed directly upward, but is configured to face in a radial direction such that the distance between the optical axes widens toward the upper side. .. As a result, the light from the edge light emitting portion A837 can be guided over a wide range of the rear side plate member A850.

Since the light from the edge light emitting portion A833 of the upper substrate A831 is received from the left end of the rear side plate member A850, the light from the edge light emitting portion A837 is received from the lower end of the rear side plate member A850. Even when the rear side plate member A850 has a shape constricted on the central side in the front view, it is possible to easily reach the entire area of the rear side plate member A850.

The edge light emitting parts A823 and A827 of the front light emitting board A820 and the edge light emitting parts A833 and A837 of the rear light emitting board A830 are arranged at corresponding positions in the front-rear direction (translation positions on arrows FB). Therefore, the range of the front side plate member A840 illuminated by the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 can correspond to the range of the rear side plate member A850 illuminated by the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837.

As a result, when both the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 of the front light emitting substrate A820 and the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837 of the rear light emitting substrate A830 are made to emit light, the light is combined to cause the front side plate member A840. And the range illuminated by the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 or the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837 in the rear side plate member A850 can be visually recognized brighter.

On the other hand, even when one side of the edge light emitting part A823, A827 of the front light emitting board A820 or the edge light emitting part A833, A837 of the back light emitting board A830 is made to emit light, the portion where the front side plate member A840 or the rear side plate member A850 becomes bright is. Since the position does not shift, it is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of discomfort in the production.

Since the range brightly illuminated by the edge light emitting parts A823 and A827 of the front light emitting board A820 or the edge light emitting parts A833 and A837 of the back light emitting board A830 is the same, for example, only the edge light emitting parts A823 and A827 of the front light emitting board A820 are used. Even if the state in which light is emitted is shifted to the state in which only the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837 of the rear light emitting substrate A830 are made to emit light, the flat light and dark pattern received by the player (which position is bright in front view, It is possible to avoid changing the pattern of which position becomes dark). This makes it possible to reduce the fatigue of the player.

The front plate member A840 is formed on the plate-shaped main body A841 whose front side surface is formed as a smooth surface and on the back side side surface of the plate-shaped main body A841 along the contour of the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, or the like. The line-shaped groove portion A842 to be formed, the insertion through hole A843 drilled in a circular shape for fastening and fixing the base member A860, and the constricted portion A844 formed so as to constrict the middle portion of the plate-shaped main body A841. To be equipped.

When the light from the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 of the front light emitting substrate A820 is received by the front plate member A840, the light is refracted by the line-shaped groove portion A842, so that the outline of the shape of the above illustration is visually recognized as a line. Will be done.

The shape of the plate-shaped main body A841 having the constricted portion A844 is the shape of the result of matching the outer shape of the shape of the illustration which is the basis of the line-shaped groove portion A842. That is, since the shape that shines in a line shape is visually recognized in the entire area of the plate-shaped main body A841, it is possible to prevent the plate-shaped main body A841 from causing unnecessary parts in the production.

The rear side plate member A850 is a plate formed from a plate-shaped main body A851 having the same shape as the front view outer shape of the front side plate member A840 and formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and a plate formed from the same shape as the front view outer shape of the plate-shaped main body A851. A first penetration formed at the same position so as to penetrate the light-transmitting thin-walled resin plate A855 arranged on the front side of the shape main body A851 and the plate-shaped main body A851 and the thin-walled resin plate A855 in the upper left corner. It includes holes A851a and A855a, and second through holes A851b and A855b formed at the same position so as to penetrate the plate-shaped main body A851 and the thin-walled resin plate A855 in the front-rear direction on the lower side.

The plate-shaped main body A851 includes a constricted portion A852 formed from the same shape as the constricted portion A844 at a position corresponding to the constricted portion A844 of the front plate member A840, and the front side surface is formed with a smooth surface and the back side side surface. Innumerable grain is formed. As a result, of the light received by the plate-shaped main body A851, when the light that has passed to the back surface side is reflected by the white base member A860, the light is diffused by innumerable grain and surface-emitted. As a result, the back side portion of the plate-shaped main body A851 can be efficiently brightened.

The plate-shaped main body A851 is provided with a constricted portion A852, and after the light received from one side of the constricted portion A852 passes through the constricted portion A852, it easily travels within a range limited to the width of the constricted portion A852. When the plate-shaped main body A851 of the present embodiment is formed to be wider than the width of the constricted portion A852 on both sides of the constricted portion A852, the light received from one side of the constricted portion A852 is received by the plate-shaped main body A851. It is difficult to spread it over the entire area.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the light from the edge light emitting portion A833 is received by the plate-shaped main body A851 on the upper side of the constricted portion A852, and the light from the edge light emitting portion A837 is received by the plate-shaped main body A851 on the lower side of the constricted portion A852. Although the constricted portion A852 is adopted, the light is received over the entire area of the plate-shaped main body A851 as compared with the case where the light is received only from the upper side or the lower side of the constricted portion A852. It is possible to make it. As a result, the entire area of the plate-shaped main body A851 can be efficiently brightened.

An illustration that is the basis of the outline of the line-shaped groove A842 is drawn on the thin-walled resin plate A855, and in the present embodiment, the color corresponding to the illustration is painted. Therefore, when the light from the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837 of the back light emitting substrate A830 is received by the rear side plate member A850, the illustration drawn on the thin resin plate A855 is surface-emitting by the grain on the back side of the plate-shaped main body A851. It is brightly visible.

The base member A860 is a member formed of a white resin material, and is aligned between a plate-shaped main body A861 formed in a substantially L-shape in front view and a rear side plate member A850 supported by the plate-shaped main body A861. The alignment protrusion A862, the fastening portion A863 to which the rear side plate member A850 is fastened and fixed, the substrate fastening portion A864 to which the rear light emitting substrate A830 is aligned and fastened and fixed, and the base from the plate-shaped main body A861 to the front side. A base portion A865 formed in a shape, and a columnar fastening portion A866 having a columnar protrusion at a height matching the front side surface of the base portion A861 from the front surface of the plate-shaped main body A861 and forming a female screw at the tip. A plate-shaped main body A861 is projected from the front in a columnar shape and a female screw is formed at the tip, and the plate sandwiching fastening portion is longer in the projecting direction by the thickness of the front light emitting substrate A820 than the projecting length of the columnar fastening portion A866. A867 and.

The auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is assembled by fastening and fixing the rear side plate member A850, the rear light emitting substrate A830, the front light emitting substrate A820, and the front side plate member A840 to the base member A860 in this order.

First, fastening and fixing of the rear side plate member A850 to the base member A860 will be described. To fasten and fix the rear side plate member A850 to the base member A860, a fastening screw that is inserted into the plate-shaped main body A851 with the first through hole A851a and the second through hole A851b inserted through the corresponding alignment protrusion A862 is fastened. This is done by being screwed into the portion A863.

At this time, the fastening screw is inserted through the plate-shaped main body A851, but not through the thin-walled resin plate A855. Therefore, the base member A860 and the plate-shaped main body A851 are formed by inserting the first through hole A855a and the second through hole A855b into the corresponding positioning protrusions A862 in a state where the plate-shaped main body A851 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860. The thin-walled resin plate A855 can be easily aligned with respect to the thin-walled resin plate A855.

Further, it is possible to prevent the thin-walled resin plate A855 from cracking due to the pressing force at the time of fastening. Further, it is possible to replace the thin-walled resin plate A855 while maintaining the fastening of the plate-shaped main body A851.

Next, fastening and fixing of the back light emitting substrate A830 to the base member A860 will be described. The rear light emitting substrate A830 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 by fastening and fixing the back light emitting substrate A830 to the substrate fastening portion A864.

The substrate fastening portion A864 also functions as an alignment of the rear side plate member A850 with respect to the base member A860 by being inserted into the through hole A853 of the rear side plate member A850.

In fastening and fixing the back light emitting substrate A830 to the base member A860, the back side surface of the plate-shaped main body A832 of the upper substrate A831 is fastened so as to sandwich the left edge portion of the thin resin plate A855 with the front side surface of the plate-shaped main body A851. The thin-walled resin plate is fixed so that the back side surface side of the plate-shaped main body A836 of the right side substrate A835 is fastened and fixed so as to sandwich the lower right side edge of the thin-walled resin plate A855 with the front side surface of the plate-shaped main body A851. It is prevented that A855 is lifted from the plate-shaped main body A851.

In this case, the load applied to the thin-walled resin plate A855 is not a load generated at points like a fastening screw, but a load generated at a line (face) along the left edge, so that the unit area applied to the thin-walled resin plate A855 is The pressing force per hit can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid cracking or chipping of the thin-walled resin plate A855.

As described above, in the fastening and fixing of the back light emitting substrate A830, the back side surface of the plate-shaped main body A832 is configured to be in contact with the front side surface of the rear side plate member A850. The optical axis of the portions A833 and A837 and the rear side plate member A850 can be easily aligned in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the front side surface of the rear side plate member A850 faces). As a result, it is possible to improve the light reception to the rear plate member A850.

Next, fastening and fixing of the front light emitting substrate A820 to the base member A860 will be described. To fasten and fix the front light emitting board A820 to the base member A860, the front light emitting board A820 is fastened to the columnar fastening part A866 with the lower left side portion of the back side surface of the front light emitting board A820 being in contact with the base portion A865. It is done by being fixed.

Since the front light emitting board A820 and the back light emitting board A830 are arranged so as to be parallel to each other and there is a gap between them, the front light emitting board A820, the back light emitting board A830, and the rear side plate member A850 are provided. It is configured so that no pressing force is generated between and.

Next, fastening and fixing of the front plate member A840 to the base member A860 will be described. The front plate member A840 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 by fastening and fixing the front plate member A840 to the plate sandwiching fastening portion A867.

Since the arrangement of the plate sandwiching fastening portion A867 is outside and near the front light emitting board A820, the pressing force generated at the time of fastening and fixing to the plate sandwiching fastening portion A867 is applied to the front light emitting board A820 as a load at points. Can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the front light emitting substrate A820 from being cracked or chipped.

The front plate member A840 is formed with a through hole A845 for securing an arrangement position of LEDs such as an edge light emitting portion A823 arranged on the front light emitting substrate A820, and the plate-shaped main body A841 excluding the through hole A845 is formed. The back side surface of the front light emitting substrate A820 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 so as to apply a pressing force on the plate-shaped main bodies A822 and A826 of the front light emitting substrate A820. Thereby, the support area of the front plate member A840 can be increased by utilizing the plate-shaped main bodies A822 and A826 of the front light emitting substrate A820.

In the fastening and fixing of the front side plate member A840 to the base member A860, the back side surface of the plate-shaped main body A841 of the front side plate member A840 is configured to be in contact with the front side surface of the front light emitting board A820. The optical axis of the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 of the A820 and the front side plate member A840 can be easily aligned in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the front side surface of the front side plate member A840 faces). As a result, it is possible to improve the light reception to the rear plate member A850.

As described above, the front light emitting substrate A820, the rear light emitting substrate A830, the front side plate member A840, and the rear side plate member A850 are respectively aligned with each component formed on the base member A860 and fastened and fixed. Thereby, the front light emitting substrate A820, the rear light emitting substrate A830, the front side plate member A840, and the rear side plate member A850 can be easily aligned in the direction parallel to the front side surface of the base member A860.

Further, even when the substrates are composed of a pair of front light emitting substrates A820 and rear light emitting substrates A830 arranged in the front-rear direction, the corresponding front side plate member A840 or rear side plate member A850 can be used as members for receiving light. By fastening and fixing the base member A860 so as to abut in the front-rear direction, the front light emitting substrate A820, the rear light emitting substrate A830, the front side plate member A840, and the rear side plate member A850 can be easily aligned in the direction intersecting the front side surface of the base member A860. be able to.

FIG. 54 is a front view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810, and FIG. 55 is a cross-sectional view of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 in the LV-LV line of FIG. 54. In FIG. 54, the outer shape of the decorative member A808 and the outer shape of the upper right region A60b (see FIG. 50) are shown by imaginary lines, and the portion of the outer shape of the front light emitting substrate A820 that overlaps with the front side plate member A840 is shown by hidden lines. In 55, a cross section passing through the center of the columnar fastening portion A866 (see FIG. 52) arranged on the center side of the base member A860 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 54, the front light emitting substrate A820 is arranged so as to fit within the outer shape of the decorative member A808 when viewed from the front, and is a front side plate that receives light from the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 of the front light emitting substrate A820. The member A840 is arranged so as to protrude from the decorative member A808 when viewed from the front.

As a result, the front-rear thickness of the entire auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 can be suppressed while the front light emitting substrate A820 is blindfolded by the decorative member A808. That is, when a light emitting substrate is arranged on the back side of the front side plate member A840 of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 to produce light emission of the front side plate member A840, the light emitting substrate is separated by an appropriate distance to cause the front side plate member A840 to emit light. Since it is necessary to arrange the unit, the front-rear width of the unit is increased, and the space for arranging the operating object behind the unit is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front light emitting substrate A820 is arranged at a position shifted in the left-right or front-rear direction with respect to the front plate member A840 instead of behind the front plate member A840, so that the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is arranged. Since the front-rear width of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 can be shortened, a sufficient space for arranging the operating accessory can be secured behind the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810.

In the present embodiment, by adopting the guide member A802 (see FIG. 50), a game area is also formed in front of the upper right area A60b of the window portion A60a. The right end of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 enters the upper right region A60b. That is, they are arranged inside the thickness of the base plate A60 in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the front-rear thickness of the game board A13 (see FIG. 50) can be reduced as compared with the case where the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is arranged behind the base plate A60. Further, the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 is arranged behind the base plate A60, and the light entering the game region is less likely to be attenuated than the light that passes through the thickness of the base plate A60 and reaches the game region. Therefore, it is possible to brightly illuminate the game area in front of the upper right area A60b.

The front plate member A840 is formed from a shape that overlaps with the edge portion of the front light emitting substrate A820. That is, when the front side plate member A840 is fastened and fixed to the base member A860 from the front side of the front light emitting board A820, the pressing force applied from the front side plate member A840 to the front light emitting board A820 is along the edge of the front light emitting board A820. Therefore, the load per unit area can be reduced.

As a result, the front light emitting substrate A820 and the front plate member A840 can be brought into surface contact with each other while avoiding an excessive load applied between the front light emitting substrate A820 and the front side plate member A840. The optical axis of the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 of the above can be easily aligned with the front plate member A840.

As shown in FIG. 55, the traveling path AL2 of the irradiation light from the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 selected from the highly directional LEDs is received by the front plate member A840 and then on the front and rear surfaces of the front plate member A840. It extends in the left-right direction until it reaches the line-shaped groove A842 in a manner of total reflection, and when it reaches the line-shaped groove A842, it is refracted and its direction is changed to the front side.

Therefore, when light is emitted from the edge light emitting portions A823 and A827 when the front side plate member A840 is visually recognized from the front side, the light from the line-shaped groove portion A842 toward the front side reaches the player's eyes. It is possible to visually recognize the outline of the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. as the original shape of the line-shaped groove portion A842 as if it were shining.

As the LED constituting the edge light emitting unit A833 and A837 (see FIG. 53), an LED having a lower directivity than the LED constituting the edge light emitting unit A823 and A827 is adopted. As a result, the entire area of the rear plate member A850 can be made to emit light uniformly.

That is, the light from the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837 (see FIG. 53) is not in a mode in which the light from the rear side plate member A850 is totally reflected inside the rear side plate member A850, and the rear side plate member A850 is uniformly illuminated. Function.

It will be described back to FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, the downstream side guide member A803 is arranged on the lower right side of the center frame A86 in the front view. The downstream guide member A803 constitutes a flow path in which the game ball guided by the guide member A802 is guided regardless of whether or not it passes through the through gate 67.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the downstream guide member A803, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the downstream guide member A803. In FIGS. 56 and 57, only a part of the base plate A60 to which the downstream guide member A803 is fixed is shown, and the other parts of the base plate A60 are not shown.

The downstream guide member A803 is arranged on the back side of the front member A803z having the plate-shaped main body A803a and the extending plate A803b extending from the back surface of the plate-shaped main body A803a, and the front side member A803z. With the rear member A804 formed from a light-transmitting resin material that is fastened and fixed to the base plate A60 while being fastened and fixed to the front member A803z so as to form a path through which the game ball can flow down with the A803z. A decorative plate member A805 attached to the front surface of the plate-shaped main body A803a of the front member A803z is provided, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 2), the game ball guided by the guide member A802 is the plate-shaped main body A803a and the rear. The area between the side member A804 and the side member A804 is configured to be able to flow down.

The extension plate A803b includes a left extension plate A803c extending from the left edge portion of the plate-shaped main body A803a and extending in the vertical direction and an inclined plate portion extending in the lower left direction, and the left extension plate A803c. From the middle left extension plate A803d, which is formed from the corresponding shape and is arranged to face each other and forms the left flow path ATL1 in the region between the left extension plate A803c, and the middle position of the middle left extension plate A803d. The middle right extension plate A803e, which has a part that branches and extends to the right and is formed so as to extend downward while bending left and right, and the middle right extension plate A803e that is arranged to face the middle right extension plate A803e. A right extension plate A803f that forms a right flow path ATL2 in a region between the right extension plate A803e and the right extension plate A803e is provided.

The game ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1 is flowing down in the lower left direction, which is the extending direction of the left extension plate A803c and the middle left extension plate A803d, and the left extension plate A803c and the middle left extension plate A803d. Passes through the detection sensor ASE1 for ball detection, which is arranged between the two members and is held by the sensor support portion A804a of the rear member A804 in the assembled state, passes through the opening A804b of the rear member A804, and is rearward of the base plate A60. It is discharged toward. Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the left channel ATL1 is not guided to the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2).

Since the extending direction of the left flow path ATL1 (lower left direction) is the direction away from the right flow path ATL2, the game ball flowing through the left flow path ATL1 and the right side when both the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are visible. It is possible to easily avoid mistaken for a game ball flowing through the flow path ATL2.

Various modes can be considered as the control when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor ASE1, but in the present embodiment, when the detection sensor ASE1 detects the passage of the game ball, one prize ball is paid out. It is controlled to be.

The number of prize balls is an example, and the number is not limited to one, and may be two or more. On the other hand, by setting the number of prize balls to one as in the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the ball loss when the right-handed game ball flows through the left flow path ATL1.

Further, when the number of prize balls is two or more, the number of balls held by the player increases due to the prize balls paid out to the player even if the launch balls are subtracted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the feeling of disappointment when the ball flows into the left flow path ATL1.

The game ball that has flowed into the right flow path ATL2 flows down along the inclined surface A803e1 extending in the lower right direction on the upstream side of the middle right extension plate A803e. In this case, the flow direction of the sphere is the direction away from the left flow path ATL1 provided adjacent to the right flow path ATL2. Therefore, when both the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 are visible, the left flow flow occurs. It is possible to easily avoid confusing the game ball flowing through the road ATL1 with the game ball flowing through the right flow path ATL2.

Since the sphere that rolls on the inclined surface A803e1 flows to the right near the upper edge of the plate-shaped main body A803a, it is on the downstream side as compared with the sphere that flows down the left flow path ATL1 that causes the sphere to flow down in a manner similar to free fall. It is possible to improve the visibility of the sphere when the guide member A803 is viewed from above in a directional view. In other words, it is possible to extend the period during which the sphere is visually recognized in a directional view such as looking into the downstream guide member A803 from above.

The game ball flowing down the right flow path ATL2 rolls the extension plate A803f1 extending from the inside of the right extension plate A803f to the left, and is formed to be curved in an arc shape so as to receive the rolling ball. It flows down along the curved surface A803e2 of the middle right extending plate A803e.

The sphere that rolls on the extension plate A803f1 flows down in the direction approaching the left flow path ATL1, but the curved surface A803e2 is arranged with a gap between it and the left side flow path ATL1 and is arranged on the curved surface A803e2. Since the ball flowing down along the line is configured to flow down in a direction away from the left flow path ATL1, it is possible to avoid confusing the game ball flowing through the left flow path ATL1 with the game ball flowing through the right flow path ATL2. It can be made easier.

Further, while the flow mode of the sphere flowing down the left flow path ATL1 is a mode in which the sphere flows down while inclining to the left along the direction of gravity, the flow mode of the sphere flowing down the right flow path ATL2 meanders to the left and right. However, when both the left flow path ATL1 and the right side flow path ATL2 are visible, the game ball flowing through the left side flow path ATL1 and the game ball flowing through the right side flow path ATL2 are mistaken for each other. This can be easily avoided.

Further, the period of staying in the internal flow path of the downstream guide member A803 can be different between the game ball flowing through the left side flow path ATL1 and the game ball flowing through the right side flow path ATL2. For example, when a sphere flows into the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 at the same time, the sphere flowing down the left flow path ATL1 is swiftly flowed downward, and the sphere flowing down the right flow path ATL2 meanders in the left-right direction. Therefore, the period in which the spheres flowing down the left flow path ATL1 and the right side flow path ATL2 are located at the same height can be shortened (the height positions of the spheres can be different). This makes it easy to avoid confusing the game ball flowing through the left flow path ATL1 with the game ball flowing through the right side flow path ATL2.

The game ball that has passed through the right flow path ATL2 flows downward on the front side of the base plate A60 and is guided toward the second winning opening 640 and the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2). Therefore, among the balls flowing down the downstream guide member A803, only the balls flowing down the right flow path ATL2 are configured to be able to enter the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a.

As described above, since the right-side flow path ATL2 is formed as a flow path meandering to the left and right, the velocity of the sphere in the vertical direction can be reduced as compared with the case where the sphere freely falls. As a result, the vertical speed of the ball when it reaches the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a can be reduced, so that the opening / closing plate of the electric accessory 640a or the variable winning device 65 may collide with the ball. It is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the opening / closing plate is damaged.

The decorative plate member A805 is a transparent sheet A805a formed of a resin material and transmitting light to the same extent regardless of the viewing direction, and a viewing mode changing sheet configured such that the light transmission changes depending on the viewing direction. A806 and.

The visual mode change sheet A806 is formed in a size including the left side flow path ATL1 in the front view, and the transparent sheet A805a is formed in a size including the right side flow path ATL2 in the front view. The decorative plate member A805 made of the transparent sheet A805a is formed in a shape that occupies a slightly smaller area than the outer edge portion of the plate-shaped main body A803a.

FIG. 58 is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the visual mode change sheet A806. The visual mode change sheet A806 can be rephrased as a viewing angle control sheet, and has a structure in which a transparent resin film A806c is laminated on the front and back of a louver film in which transparent silicone rubber A806a and black silicone rubber A806b are alternately arranged. Therefore, it is possible to design the angle range (viewing angle) of the transmitted light by changing the arrangement interval and the posture of the black silicone rubber A806b at the time of manufacturing.

As shown in FIG. 56, the visual mode change sheet A806 is a sheet attached to the front side of the plate-shaped main body A803a, and is arranged in a limited range of a gap between the glass unit 16 and the sheet. Its wall thickness is required to be very thin. Also in this embodiment, the transparent resin film A806c is a film made of polycarbonate and having a thickness of about 0.2 mm, and the black silicone rubber A806b has an arrangement interval (pitch) of about 0.1 mm, which is a finely designed sheet. It will be used.

FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) are schematic views showing a change in the appearance of the downstream guide member A803 due to a difference in directional vision. In FIG. 59 (a), the appearance in the arrow AEL1 direction view of FIG. 58 is shown, and in FIG. 59 (b), the appearance in the arrow AEL2 direction view of FIG. 58 is shown. In FIG. 59, the outer shape may change due to the difference in the directional view, but for convenience, the change in the outer shape is ignored and the figure is shown in the same shape. Further, in FIG. 59, the inner side surfaces of the left side flow path ATL1 and the right side flow path ATL2 that are visually recognized through the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 are shown by solid lines.

In the present embodiment, the arrangement interval and posture of the black silicone rubber A806b (see FIG. 58) are arranged so that the viewing angle at which the back side of the visual mode changing sheet A806 can be visually recognized is about 30 degrees by allowing the visual mode changing sheet A806 to pass through. Is designing.

That is, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), when the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 is visually recognized by the directional view of the arrow AEL1 (see FIG. 58) (when the viewing mode changing sheet A806 is visually recognized from directly in front of the downstream guide member A803), The left side flow path ATL1 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized through the visual recognition mode change sheet A806.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), when the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 is visually recognized by the directional view of the arrow AEL2 (see FIG. 58) having an angle larger than the viewing angle (from directly in front of the downstream guide member A803). At a position shifted to the side, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is viewed diagonally from directly in front of the display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the visual mode change sheet A806 cannot be transmitted, and the visual mode change sheet A806 Since the front side will be visible (because if the surface is decorated with figures, illustrations, etc., the decoration will be visible), it will be difficult to see the ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1. be able to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player is on the left side when the downstream guide member A803 is visually recognized by the direction of the arrow AEL1 than when the downstream guide member A803 is visually recognized by the direction of the arrow AEL2. It is easy to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the flow path ATL1.

By utilizing the function of the visual mode change sheet A806 as described above, it is possible to make the player visually recognize only the ball on the side that is profitable for the player among the balls passing through the downstream guide member A803. .. This will be described in detail.

A player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 10 basically has a display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and a movable accessory (for example, operation units A400 to A600) that operates in front of the display area. Since the game is played while visually recognizing the effect developed by the player, it is rare to stare at a specific range of the game area, and the third symbol display device 81 is also visually recognized from the front of the downstream guide member A803. It is often the case that the user looks sideways in the same posture (for example, looking in the direction of the arrow AEL2 in FIG. 58).

For example, the player can perform the right-handed game to shoot the ball toward the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2) during the time saving or the probability change, and the player can use the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2). Since we want to pay attention to the effect in the display area of 2), when we look sideways at the downstream guide member A803 and confirm that the game ball is flowing down, remove the line of sight from the downstream guide member A803 and perform the third. It is usual to pay attention to the display area of the symbol display device 81.

In the downstream guide member A803 that can be visually recognized only in such a short time, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has flowed into the left flow path ATL1 flows to the second winning opening 640 and the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 2). It will be discharged from the game area. Such a configuration is adopted in order to keep the prize ball performance per unit time of the pachinko machine 10 within the standard (for adjusting the game time and the prize ball), but for the player, The sphere flowing in the left flow path ATL1 is not a very preferable sphere.

By showing such an unfavorable flow of a ball, the player's interest is lowered, and it is easy to cause a result of discouraging the player to play the pachinko machine 10 again, which may be unfavorable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game that flows through the left flow path ATL1 in the directional view (for example, the directional view of the arrow AEL2) in which the player looks at the downstream side guide member A803 sideways by the visual mode change sheet A806. The ball is not visually recognized, and only the game ball flowing through the right flow path ATL2 is visually recognized.

That is, when the downstream guide member A803 is viewed sideways, only the ball flowing down the right flow path ATL2 is shown, so that the flow path through which the game ball flows down the downstream guide member A803 is referred to as the left flow path ATL1. Since it is possible to make the player visually recognize only the game balls flowing down the right flow path ATL2 while preparing a plurality of balls with the right side flow path ATL2, all of the launched balls are the second winning opening 640 for the player. It is possible to make the player seem to be guided to the specific winning opening 65a side (guided without waste), and it is possible to improve the interest of the player, so that the player's motivation to replay is improved. Can be done.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by using the visual mode change sheet A806, the player playing the game while visually recognizing the display effect developed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the left flow path ATL1. It can be configured so that it is not necessary to look at the disadvantageous ball (the ball that is not guided to the second winning opening 640 or the specific winning opening 65a side), and it is a convenient ball that flows down the right flow path ATL2 (the second winning opening). Only 640 and the ball guided to the specific winning opening 65a side) can be seen.

On the other hand, some players want to visually recognize a disadvantageous ball that flows down the left channel ATL1. In this case, the head is moved from the front of the third symbol display device 81 and viewed from the front of the downstream guide member A803 (direction view of the arrow AEL1 in FIG. 58) to flow through the left flow path ATL1. Since the ball can be visually recognized, it is possible to avoid the accumulation of dissatisfaction of the player who wants to visually recognize the disadvantageous ball flowing down the left flow path ATL1. It is possible to prevent the motivation for replaying from being reduced.

The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary operation unit 400b of the first operation unit A400 is configured to extend in the longitudinal direction (the direction connecting the rotary shaft rod AJ1 and the rotary tip) with the tilting motion has been described. The first operation unit A2400 of the second embodiment is configured to extend or contract in the longitudinal direction as the rotational operation unit 400b tilts. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 60 is a rear view of the first operation unit A2400 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 60, the first operation unit A2400 in the effect standby state is illustrated. In the first operation unit A2400 of the second embodiment, the rotary operation unit 400b is the same as that of the first embodiment, while the support unit A2400a has a guide slot with respect to the support unit A400a of the first embodiment. A2414 is different. In the description of FIG. 60, FIGS. 19 and 20 will be referred to as appropriate.

The support unit A2400a includes a guide slot A2414 in which the columnar projecting portion A448 of the rotary operation unit A400b is guided instead of the guide slot A414 described above in the first embodiment.

The guide slot A2414 is formed in a first arc portion A2414a extending in an arc shape from the right end portion to the left and an arc shape having a shorter radius than the first arc portion A2414a on the left side of the first arc portion A2414a. The two arc portions A2414b, the third arc portion A2414c formed in an arc shape having a longer radius than the first arc portion A2414a on the left side of the second arc portion A2414b, the left end portion and the second arc portion A2414a of the first arc portion A2414a. The first straight hole A2414d formed in a straight hole shape connecting the right end portion of the arc portion A2414b, and the straight hole shape connecting the left end portion of the second arc portion A2414b and the right end portion of the third arc portion A2414c. A second straight portion A2414e is provided.

The first arc portion A2414a is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 having a second radius AR2 having a radius of the second length AD2 (see FIG. 19B), and the second arc portion A2414b is formed. , The first straight line portion A2414d is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 of the first radius AR1 having a radius of the first length AD1 (see FIG. 19A). It is formed.

Therefore, when the drive motor AMT1 is driven from the effect standby state of the first operation unit A2400 and the rotation operation unit A400b starts the tilting operation, the rotation operation unit A400b while the columnar projecting portion A448 moves in the first arc portion A2414a. The length in the longitudinal direction of the is not changed, and only the rotational operation is continued.

Further, while the columnar projecting portion A448 moves in the first straight line portion A2414d, the rotational operation is continued while the length of the rotational operation unit A400b in the longitudinal direction is contracted, so that the driving resistance is increased.

Further, while the columnar projecting portion A448 moves in the second arc portion A2414b, the length of the rotational operation unit A400b in the longitudinal direction does not change and the rotational operation is continued, so that the driving resistance is reduced by that amount.

As described above, according to the guide elongated hole A2414, since the columnar projecting portion A448 is configured to increase the driving resistance when entering the first straight line portion A2414d, the columnar projecting portion A448 is the first. It is possible to easily perform motion control such as suddenly stopping the rotary motion unit A400b in the posture when entering the straight line portion A2414d.

When the columnar projecting portion A448 moves in the order of the first arc portion A2414a, the first straight portion A2414d, and the second arc portion A2414b, only the length of the rotary operation unit A400b in the longitudinal direction changes ( 19 (a) and 19 (b)), the length of the rotary operation unit A400b in the width direction does not change.

The second straight line portion A2414e is formed in an inclined straight line extending on the straight line AVL2 passing through the center of the rotating shaft rod AJ1. Therefore, when the columnar projecting portion A448 moves on the second straight line portion A2414e, the rotational operation of the rotary operation unit A400b is stopped, and only a displacement extending in the longitudinal direction occurs.

When the length between the columnar protrusion A448 and the rotary shaft rod AJ1 becomes longer than the second length AD2 while the columnar protrusion A448 moves to the left side of the second straight portion A2414e, the rotation operation is performed. In addition to the displacement extending in the longitudinal direction of the unit A400b, a displacement spreading in the lateral direction of the rotary operation unit A400b occurs (displacement of the direction switching member A450 and the decorative member A460 to the left and right outward, see FIG. 20).

Therefore, while the columnar projecting portion A448 moves in the second straight line portion A2414e, the resistance applied to the drive motor AMT1 is added to the resistance from the state in which the resistance due to the displacement extending in the longitudinal direction of the rotary operation unit A400b is applied. The rotation operation unit A400b is shifted to a state in which resistance is applied due to the displacement spreading in the lateral direction.

As a result, the resistance to displacement of the rotary operation unit A400b can be increased, so that the speed of displacement generated in the rotary operation unit A400b can be changed when the driving force from the drive motor AMT1 is constant. That is, the length between the columnar protrusion A448 and the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is smaller than that in the state where the length between the columnar protrusion A448 and the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is shorter than the second length AD2. Since the speed of displacement in a state longer than the second length AD2 can be slowed down, the player can be impressed with the displacement of the rotary operation unit A400b in the lateral direction.

The third arc portion A2414c is formed in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 having a fourth radius AR4 having a radius of the fourth length AD4 (see FIG. 20B), and the rotating operation unit A400b is tilted. The tip side is arranged on the lower side.

As a result, after the columnar projecting portion A448 enters the third arc portion A2414c from the second straight portion A2414e, the rotary operation unit A400b is displaced to the maximum in both the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction (FIG. 20 (b). ), Since the rotational motion (tilting motion) can be generated, the force of the rotary motion of the rotary motion unit A400b can be increased.

The position of the left end portion of the third arc portion A2414c is the same as the position of the left end portion of the guide elongated hole A414 in the first embodiment. When the drive motor AMT1 is driven in the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotary operation unit A400b is tilted from the state where the columnar projecting portion A448 is arranged at the left end of the third arc portion A2414c, the columnar projecting portion A448 Is guided to the right side through the guide slot A2414 so that the rotary operation unit A400b is rotated in the rising direction, which is the same as the first operation unit A400 in the first embodiment.

A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary operation unit 400b of the first operation unit A400 operates so as to fall down from the standing state with the tilting operation has been described, but in the first operation unit A3400 of the third embodiment, , It is configured to operate so as to fall down with a tilting motion from a state extending in the horizontal direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

61 to 63 are schematic rear views of the first operation unit A3400 according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 61, the first effect standby state of the first operation unit A3400 is schematically shown, in FIG. 62, the overhang state of the first operation unit A3400 is schematically shown, and in FIG. 63, the first operation is shown. The second effect standby state of the unit A3400 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, in order to facilitate grasping the arrangement relationship, the external position of the rear case A210 (see FIG. 7) (partially omitted in the lower portion) and the third symbol are shown. The external position of the display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The first operation unit A3400 is a rotation that is rotatably supported around a support member A3400a that is fastened and fixed to the rear case A210 inside the rear case A210 and a rotary shaft rod AJ3 that is fixedly arranged on the support member A3400a. It includes an operation unit A3400b.

The support member A3400a includes a guide slot A3414 for guiding the displacement of the rotary operation unit A3400b. The guide slot A3414 extends linearly from the arcuate portion A3414a formed in an arc shape centered on the rotary shaft rod AJ3 and the lower end portion of the arcuate portion A3414a, and the extension tip side is the rotary shaft rod AJ3. A straight portion A3414b close to the above, and a recessed portion A3414c recessed downward from the lower end portion of the straight portion A3414b.

In order to prevent the support member A3400a and the rotary operation unit A3400b from overlapping each other and making the figure difficult to see, the outer shape of the support member A3400a is shown by an imaginary line, and the guide slot A3414 is excluded from the inside of the outer shape. Illustration is omitted.

The rotary operation unit A3400b is arranged on the rotational tip side of the base end side member A3430 rotatably supported by the rotary shaft rod AJ3 and the base end side member A3430, and the rotary shaft rod AJ1 is arranged with respect to the base end side member A3430. The tip side member A3440, which is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction of a circle centered on the above, is provided.

The tip side member A3440 includes a moving main body A3441 and a guided protrusion A3442 projecting in the front-rear direction from the side of the moving main body A3441 close to the rotating shaft rod AJ3 and being inserted into the guide elongated hole A3414.

The transmission of the driving force in the third embodiment is performed by the columnar projecting portion A448 (FIGS. 15 and 15) as the guide slot A427e of the connecting member A427a guided by the belt A423a moves in the left-right direction in the first embodiment. 16) is applied in the left-right direction to displace the rotary operation unit A400b.

That is, the first operation unit A3400 in the third embodiment is configured to change the postures of the belt A423a, the connecting member A427a, and the guide slot A427e (not shown) by 90 degrees and move them in the vertical direction. As these move in the vertical direction, a driving force is applied in the vertical direction to the guided protrusion A3442 inserted through the guide slot A427e, so that the rotary operation unit A3400b is displaced.

The rotation operation of the first operation unit A3400 from the first effect standby state will be described. When a driving force is generated so as to move the guided protrusion A3442 downward from the first effect standby state (see FIG. 61), the rotation operation unit A3400b starts a rotation operation centered on the rotation shaft rod AJ3.

Here, while the guided protrusion A3442 is guided by the arc portion A3414a of the guide slot A3414, the relative movement of the tip side member A3440 with respect to the proximal end side member A3430 (displacement of the rotational operation unit A3400b in the longitudinal direction) is It does not occur (see FIG. 62).

When a driving force is generated so as to further move the guided protrusion A3442 downward from the state shown in FIG. 62, the guided protrusion A3442 enters the straight portion A3414b of the guide elongated hole A3414, and thus rotates. As the speed advances, the guided protrusion A3442 approaches the rotary shaft rod AJ3.

Therefore, in addition to the rotation operation centered on the rotation shaft rod AJ3, the rotation operation unit A3400b starts the relative movement of the tip end side member A3440 in the direction approaching the proximal end side member A3430, so that the drive resistance increases.

When the rotation operation unit A3400b is tilted to the end, as shown in FIG. 63, the guided protrusion A3442 is arranged on the lower end side of the straight portion A3414b by the amount of the guided protrusion A3442 entering the recessed portion A3414c of the guide elongated hole A3414. The tip end side member A3440 moves relative to the base end side member A3430 in the direction in which the distance between the guided protrusion A3442 and the rotary shaft rod AJ3 becomes longer than in the case where the guide end portion A3442 is used.

That is, when the rotation operation unit A3400b tilts from the first effect standby state, the tip end side member A3440 of the rotation operation unit A3400b does not move relative to the proximal end side member A3430 to the proximal end side member A3430. Then, the state shifts to the state of relative movement in the direction of approaching, and then shifts from the state of relative movement in the direction of approaching the proximal end side member A3430 to the state of relative movement in the direction of moving away from the proximal end side member A3430. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the relative movement of the front end side member A3440 with respect to the base end side member A3430 when the rotation operation unit A3400b tilts.

In the state shown in FIG. 63, the recessed portion A3414c prevents the guided protrusion A3442 from moving in the rotation direction around the rotating shaft rod AJ3. Therefore, even when the rotational operation unit A3400b is tilted at a high speed, the guided protrusion A3442 indicates that the return operation in the rotational direction (rotational operation in the reverse direction due to the reaction) occurs in the recessed portion A3414c. It can be prevented by being stopped by.

By generating an upward driving force from the state shown in FIG. 63, the rotary operation unit A3400b can be rotated (raised) in a manner in which the guided protrusion A3442 is guided in the opposite direction. ..

As described above, in the third embodiment, the direction of the tilting operation of the rotary operation unit A3400b is set to the direction in which the rotational operation is performed by its own weight, so that the driving force required at the start of the tilting operation can be reduced. ..

Further, it is possible to cause a change in appearance in which the rotary operation unit A3400b contracts in the longitudinal direction during the tilting operation. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of deforming the rotary operation unit A3400b toward the compact side during the tilting operation, and by reducing the centrifugal force generated during the effect, the position where the rotation operation unit A3400b is stopped in the middle or at the end The stop can be stabilized.

Further, since the guide slot A3414 for defining the displacement of the tip side member A3440 is arranged in the vicinity of the rotary shaft rod AJ3, the support member A3400a for forming the guide slot A3414 can be miniaturized. In addition, it is not necessary to arrange the configuration of the first operation unit A3400 up to the area on the rotation tip side of the rotation operation unit A3400b in the rear case A210 (the area on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 in FIG. 61). Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the operating unit in the rear case A210 can be improved.

A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 64. In the first embodiment, the case where the visibility of the ball flowing down the game area is changed by the fixed downstream guide member A803 has been described, but in the ball guide unit A4900 of the fourth embodiment, the visibility of the ball is changed. The part to be moved is configured to be displaceable. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

64 (a) and 64 (b) are cross-sectional views of the ball guide unit A4900 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 (a) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a is closed, and FIG. 64 (b) shows a state in which the electric accessory 640a is open.

In FIG. 64, a cross-sectional view in a plane passing through the intermediate portion of the electric accessory 640a and orthogonal to the left-right direction is shown, and in order to facilitate understanding, the base plate A60 and the glass unit 16 are illustrated by imaginary lines, and the electric accessory is illustrated. For the object 640a, only the opening / closing plate is shown, and the other drive mechanisms are not shown.

As shown in FIG. 64, the ball guide unit A4900 is a unit that forms a flow path of a ball between the glass unit 16 and the base plate A60, and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and fastened to the base plate A60. The flow path forming member A4910 to be fixed, the light guide displacement member A4920 configured to be able to move up and down along the front surface of the flow path forming member and formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and the light guide displacement member A4920. A covering member A4930 which is arranged so as to be sandwiched from the side opposite to the flow path forming member A4910 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material and fastened and fixed to the base plate A60, and a solenoid for driving the light guide displacement member A4920. A4940 and.

The flow path forming member A4910 is arranged in parallel with the back side plate portion A4911 formed along the surface of the base plate A60 and the front side of the back side plate portion A4911 at intervals slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. A portion A4912 and a thick main body portion A4913 connecting the lower end portions of the back side plate portion A4911 and the front side plate portion A4912 are provided.

A through hole A4911a for penetrating the electric accessory 640a is formed in the back side plate portion A4911, and the electric accessory 640a is arranged close to the front side plate portion A4912 by the through hole A4911a (FIG. 64 (a)). (See) and an open state (see FIG. 64 (b)) that is retracted to the rear so that it can be translated back and forth.

The light guide displacement member A4920 is arranged to face the front side surface of the front side plate portion A4912 of the flow path forming member A4910 and is guided to the front side surface of the guided plate portion A4921, and the guided plate portion A4921 is rearward from the lower end portion of the guided plate portion A4921. It is provided with an extension portion A4922 extending to.

The guided plate portion A4921 includes a plurality of line-shaped groove portions A4921a that are cut in a groove shape from the back surface side of the upper portion. The line-shaped groove portion A4921a functions to refract the light incident from the end portion of the guided plate portion A4921 and emit it toward the front side (the line-shaped groove portion A732 (see FIG. 48) described above in the first embodiment). Has a similar function).

The lining member A4930 is arranged to face the front side surface of the guided plate portion A4921, and is configured to guide the displacement of the guided plate portion A4921 together with the front side plate portion A4912 of the flow path forming member A4910. And the extension part A4932 which extends rearward from the lower end part of the front side guide plate part A4931 and the rear end part is fastened and fixed to the base plate A60, and the extension part A4932 which is fixedly arranged on the upper surface side of the front end part of the extension part A4932. It is provided with a light emitting substrate A4933 having a light emitting means A4933a such as an LED that irradiates light upward.

The light emitting means A4933a is arranged and designed so that the optical axis is arranged and designed so that the optical axis is along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the guided plate portion A4921 of the light guide displacement member A4920, and the light is guided from the lower end portion of the guided plate portion A4921. The inside of the portion A4921 is configured to be guided upward. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A4933a is configured to reach the line-shaped groove portion A4921a.

In the present embodiment, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A4933a, the light refracted by the line-shaped groove portion A4921a travels to the front side, so that the line-shaped groove portion A4921a emits bright light and the line-shaped groove portion A4921a emits light. Visibility through is reduced.

Therefore, when the line-shaped groove portion A4921a is visually recognized in a directional view, the visibility of the ball flowing down behind the line-shaped groove portion A4921a is reduced. Rather than visually recognizing the line-shaped groove A4921a in the front-rear direction, it is better to visually recognize the line-shaped groove A4921a in the direction ADL1 looking down diagonally downward to visually recognize the ball rolling on the electric accessory 640a. It becomes easier to do.

On the other hand, in FIG. 64 (a), the lower side of the electric accessory 640a is viewed without changing the position of the eyes from the position in the directional view of the direction ADL1 in which the ball rolling on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is visually recognized from diagonally above. When the rolling sphere (corresponding to the sphere at the position shown in FIG. 64B) is to be visually recognized from diagonally above in the directional view of the direction ADL2, the line-shaped groove portion A4921a is formed on the line of sight. It will get in and the visibility of the ball will deteriorate.

Therefore, the player who wants to see the ball with good visibility needs to change the position of the eyes each time the electric accessory 640a is opened and closed. Although the game burden can be reduced, the game burden increases due to frequent changes in the eye position.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a and the drive timing of the solenoid A4940 are controlled to be synchronized. That is, the solenoid A4940 is driven and the light guide displacement member A4920 is displaced downward as the electric accessory 640a is opened, so that the ball rolls below the electric accessory 640a. The state in which the line-shaped groove portion A4921a blocks the line of sight is eliminated.

As a result, the player can visually recognize the ball even if the direction of the line of sight is changed between the directions ADL1 and the direction ADL2 without changing the position of the eyes, or the rolling position of the ball changes according to the opening and closing of the electric accessory 640a. Since the sexuality is not impaired, the player's playing burden can be reduced.

When the ball guide unit A4900 is viewed in the front-rear direction in the state shown in FIG. 64 (a), if there is a ball that rolls below the electric accessory 640a, the line of sight to the ball is linear. It is not blocked by the groove A4921a. Therefore, when there is a ball flowing directly under the electric accessory 640a immediately after the electric accessory 640a is switched from the open state to the closed state (for example, when there is an over winning ball), the ball is front and back. By making the player visually recognize the ball in a directional view, the ball can be visually recognized without any problem.

Compared with the state shown in FIG. 64 (a), the distance between the light emitting means A4933a and the guided plate portion A4921 is shorter in the state shown in FIG. 64 (b). Therefore, when the light from the light emitting means A4933a is irradiated toward the guided plate portion A4921, the light leakage occurs in the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) as compared with the state shown in FIG. 64 (a). Since the amount of light emitted from the light emitting means A4933a is the same, the line-shaped groove portion A4921a can be illuminated brighter in the state shown in FIG. 64 (b) than in the state shown in FIG. 64 (a).

On the other hand, as compared with the state shown in FIG. 64 (b), in the state shown in FIG. 64 (a), the position of the line-shaped groove portion A4921a can be moved closer to the player side (upper side), so that the line-shaped groove portion The range of the covering member A4930 illuminated by the light refracted by the A4921a can be brought closer to the player side (upper side).

The front side surface of the front guide plate portion A4931 of the lining member A4930 is decorated with figures, illustrations, etc., and the illuminated range of this decoration can be brought closer to the player side (upper side). , The effect of the front guide plate portion A4931 can be improved.

A fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. In the first embodiment, the case where the columnar projecting portion A448 of the first operating unit A400 is formed so as to project from the back surface side of the moving member A440 and cannot move relative to the plate-shaped main body A442 has been described. In the first operation unit A5400 of the fifth embodiment, a columnar projecting member A5448 is configured so as to be movable relative to the moving member A5440. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

65 (a) and 65 (b) are rear views of the rotary operation unit A5400b according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 65 (a) illustrates the state of the rotary operation unit A5400b in a state corresponding to the effect standby state (see FIG. 7), and FIG. 65 (b) shows a state corresponding to the overhanging state (see FIG. 7). The state of the rotary operation unit A5400b is illustrated.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the rotary operation unit A5400b will be described with a focus on the difference from the rotary operation unit A400b described in the first embodiment. In the rotary operation unit A5400b of the present embodiment, the columnar projecting member A5448 is arranged so as to be movable relative to the moving member A5440 as a member corresponding to the columnar projecting portion A448 of the first embodiment.

That is, while the columnar projecting member A5448 has a projecting tip portion (back side end portion) inserted rearward into the guide elongated hole A5442a formed in the plate-shaped main body A5442 of the moving member A5440, the columnar projecting member A5448 projects. As a result of the projecting base end portion (front side portion) being formed from a shape larger than the guide elongated hole A5442a and functioning as a retaining member, the columnar projecting member A5448 becomes a guide elongated hole A5442a with respect to the plate-shaped main body A5442. It is configured to be relatively movable along.

In the columnar projecting member A5448, the columnar projecting member A5448 is arranged at the right end of the guide slot A5442a (in FIG. 65 (b)) by an urging member (not shown) such as a spring that generates an urging force in one direction. It is urged toward the end).

The guide elongated hole A5442a is formed as a curved elongated hole extending along an arc centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 in the effect standby state. As a result, even if the arrangement of the columnar projecting member A5448 changes inside the guide slot A5442a, the columnar projecting member A5448 is disengaged from the arc portion A414a (see FIG. 24) of the guide slot A414 due to the change. Can be avoided.

As a result, when the rotary operation unit A5400b tilts from the effect standby state, it is possible to easily avoid an increase in the operation resistance generated between the columnar projecting member A5448 and the arc portion A414a.

In the rotary operation unit A5400b, the base plate member A5430 has an extension guide portion A5438 extending from one side in the lateral direction (left side in FIG. 65 (a)) of the tip portion in the longitudinal direction (upper end in FIG. 65 (a)). Be prepared.

The extension guide portion A5438 is extended to a position where it can come into contact with the columnar projecting member A5448 regardless of where in the guide slot A5442a the columnar projecting member A5448 is arranged, and occurs at the time of contact. The columnar projecting member A5448 can be moved along the guide slot A5442a by a load.

That is, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the moving member A5440 is a base plate from the state where the columnar projecting member A5448 is arranged at one end of the guide slot A5442a (the left end of the paper surface in FIG. 65 (b)). When moving to the rotary shaft rod AJ1 side with respect to the member A5430, the columnar projecting member A5448 comes into contact with the upper side surface of the extension guide portion A5438 during the movement, and receives a load to receive the load and the other end of the guide elongated hole A5442a. It is moved toward (FIG. 65 (a) right edge of the paper). Finally, the columnar projecting member A5448 is arranged on a straight line passing through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 as the moving direction of the moving member A5440.

It will be described that the above-described configuration can improve the transmission of the driving force to the rotary operation unit A5400b when the first operation unit A5400 is tilted from the effect standby state.

Here, in the driving force transmission from the overhanging state, as described above in the first embodiment, the relative moving direction (rotation) of the moving member A440 with respect to the base plate member A430 among the loads applied to the columnar projecting portion A448. A component parallel to the shaft rod AJ1 in the linear direction) does not pass through the rotating shaft rod AJ1 and generates a force in the rotating direction centered on the rotating shaft rod AJ1. Can be good.

In the first embodiment, in order to bring about this effect, the arrangement of the columnar projecting portion A448 is intentionally shifted from the center of the moving member A440 in the lateral direction. On the other hand, when the rotary operation unit A400b is erected with the columnar projecting portion A448 misaligned and the standing state is supported and maintained by the columnar projecting portion A448, the longitudinal direction of the rotary operation unit A400b is the vertical direction. There is a problem that it is difficult to balance in the posture facing the vertical direction, and the posture tends to be slightly inclined (see FIG. 24).

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the columnar projecting member A5448 is configured to be movable relative to the moving member A5440, when the rotary operation unit A5400b is erected (see FIG. 65A). , The rotational operation unit A400b can be easily balanced in a posture in which the longitudinal direction faces the vertical direction.

In the present embodiment, depending on the design of the length of the guide slot A5442a, the posture of the rotation operation unit A5400b in a state where the rotation operation unit A5400b is erected can be arbitrarily designed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the posture in the effect standby state while maintaining the effect of improving the driving force transmission from the overhanging state.

A sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 66. In the first embodiment, the case where the appearance of the ball flow path (game area) changes when the directional view changes in the left-right direction is described by the visual mode change sheet A806, but the flow path of the sixth embodiment has been described. The front component A6900 is configured so that the appearance of the ball flow path (game area) changes when the directional view changes in the vertical direction. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 66 is a cross-sectional view of the flow path front side component A6900 in the sixth embodiment. In FIG. 66, the flow path front side component A6900 is cross-sectionally viewed on a plane formed by the vertical side and the front-back side at a place where the sphere can pass. The front and rear side surfaces of the base plate A60 arranged to face the flow path front side component A6900 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

The flow path front side component A6900 is attached (or fastened and fixed) to the blindfold member A6910 which is arranged to face the front side of the base plate A60 and is formed of a non-transparent resin material and the front side of the blindfold member A6910. It is a plate-shaped member formed of a light-transparent resin material, and includes a decorative plate A6920 whose front side is decorated, and a fastening fixing portion A6930 for fastening and fixing the blindfold member A6910 to the base plate A60. ..

The blindfold member A6910 extends in the left-right direction between a pair of plate-shaped main bodies A6911 (one side thereof is shown in FIG. 66) extending in a vertical direction and a pair of plate-shaped main bodies A6911. A plurality of louver portions A6913 forming a rectangular elongated hole A6912 extending in the left-right direction with the plate-shaped main body A6911 are provided.

The length of the rectangular elongated hole A6912 and the louver portion A6913 in the left-right direction is longer than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed with a length corresponding to the left-right width of the game area at the arrangement location. Further, the vertical spacing of the louver portion A6913 is designed to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

Various aspects are exemplified as a method for manufacturing the blindfold member A6910. For example, a plurality of louver portions A6913 may be fixed to the plate-shaped main body A6911, or a rectangular elongated hole A6912 is formed by drilling or the like in a plate having a thickness corresponding to the front-rear length of the plate-shaped main body A6911. There may be a mode in which a plurality of louver portions A6913 are formed as the remaining portion in which the louver portion A6913 is formed.

The louver portion A6913 is formed slightly wider in the front-rear direction, and decorative illustrations are provided on the upper and lower side surfaces thereof. When the flow path front side component A6900 is visually recognized by the direction of the arrow AEL61, the line of sight is blocked by the louver portion A6913, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the ball AB61 flowing down the back side thereof. In this case, the player is made to visually recognize the illustration applied to the upper side surface of the louver portion A6913 to avoid a decrease in the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, when the flow path front side component A6900 is visually recognized by the directional view of the arrow AEL62 (direction view along the front-rear direction), the upper and lower side surfaces of the louver portion A6913 and the line of sight do not overlap and are hidden by the vertical thickness of the louver portion A6913. The sphere AB61 can be visually recognized through a portion other than the above, that is, the rectangular elongated hole A6912.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66, the louver portion A6913 has a shape in which the vertical thickness is shorter than the front-rear width. , The visibility of the sphere AB61 flowing down behind the flow path front component A6900 can be improved as compared with the case where the flow path front component A6900 is visually recognized in the direction of the arrow AEL61.

Next, the substrate box W100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 77. First, a schematic configuration of the substrate box W100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 71. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

67 is a rear view of the pachinko machine W10 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the substrate box W100, FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the substrate box W100, and FIG. 70 is a rear perspective view of the substrate box W100. It is a front view of the substrate box W100, FIG. 71 (a) is a rear view of the substrate box W100, and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the substrate box W100 in the direction of arrow LXXIb of FIG. 71 (a). The state in which the protective cover W500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 is shown. 72 (a) is a partial front perspective view of the substrate box W100, FIG. 72 (b) is a partial rear perspective view of the substrate box W100, and FIGS. 72 (a) and 72 (b) are boxes. The state in which the protective cover W500 and the sealing seal WSL are removed from the cover W200 and the box base W300 is shown.

The arrows FB, LR, and UD in FIGS. 67 to 71 indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the substrate box B100, respectively. Since the same applies to the following figures, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine W10 in the seventh embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the substrate box W100. Therefore, other description will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 67 to 71, the substrate box W100 connects the box cover W200, the box base W300 whose opening is covered by the box cover W200, and the box cover W200 and the box base W300 so as not to be opened (caulking structure). The sealing unit W400 connected by the sealing unit W400, the box cover W200 connected by the sealing unit W400, and the protective cover W500 and the sealing seal WSL arranged at the end opposite to the sealing unit W400 of the box base W300 are provided. , The main control board (not shown) is stored. The board box W100 may contain a sub-control board, a board associated with a light emitting effect or a sound emitting effect, various switches, connectors, a game board, and a drive motor for driving an accessory or an accessory.

A rotation shaft W410 is formed on the sealing unit W400. The rotation shaft W410 is a shaft for rotatably supporting the board box W100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1), and is a vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the board box W100 (box cover W200). ), And is formed as an axis orthogonal to the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the substrate box W100 (box cover W200).

Further, the rotation shaft W410 is arranged on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the substrate box W100 (box cover W200) in the rear view (arrow F direction view). The rotating shaft W410 may be arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the board box W100 (box cover W200), and the rotating shaft W410 may be arranged on the upper side (arrow U) of the board box W100 (box cover W200). It may be arranged on the direction side), the lower side (arrow D direction side), the front side (arrow F direction side), or the back side (arrow B direction side).

The box cover W200 is erected from the four sides of the back wall portion W201 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate shape in the front view and the back wall portion W201 toward the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side) and has a plate shape. (Upper wall part, lower wall part, left wall part W202 and right wall part connecting the upper wall part and lower wall part) and a cover protruding to the left from the left wall part W202. Mainly includes a side engaged portion W210. The box cover W200 is formed in a box shape in which the box base W300 side is opened by each wall portion. The box cover W200 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

A protective cover W500 is attached to the cover-side engaged portion W210 together with the base-side engaged portion W310 described later. The cover-side engaged portion W210 has a base portion W211 protruding from the left wall portion W202 toward the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of arrow L) and a side wall formed at the protruding tip portion of the base portion W211. A box base W300 from the back surface of the portion W212, the flat surface portion W220 protruding from the side wall portion W212 to the opposite side of the sealing unit W400, the upper overhanging portion W213a and the lower overhanging portion W213b, and the base portion W211 and the flat surface portion W220. Mainly includes a cover portion W214 that protrudes toward the opposite side (the side in the direction of arrow B).

The base portion W211 is a portion for connecting the left wall portion W202 and the side wall portion W212, and is formed in a plate shape. The side wall portion W212 is a portion for restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 toward the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side), and is formed in a plate shape.

The side wall portion W212 is provided with an upper overhanging portion W213a, a lower overhanging portion W213b, and a flat surface portion W220. The upper overhanging portion W213a is arranged at a position on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the flat surface portion W220, and the lower overhanging portion W213b is on the opposite side of the flat surface portion W220 to the upper overhanging portion W213a. It is arranged at a position (on the side in the direction of arrow D).

The back surface of the lower overhanging portion W213b is arranged on the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the back surface of the side wall portion W212 and the standing portion W540 of the protective cover W500 described later.

The flat surface portion W220 is a portion to which the sealing seal WSL is attached, and is formed in a plate shape. The flat surface portion W220 includes a protrusion W221 and a pair of standing portions W222 protruding toward the opposite side (arrow B direction side) from the box base W300, and both ends of the flat surface portion W220 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The pair of both end wall portions W223 arranged in the above, the recesses W224a and W224b recessed in the back surface of the flat surface portion W220, and the flat surface portion W220 are bored through the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction). A pair of fastening holes W225 and a notch portion W226 (see FIG. 76) cut out at an end portion of the flat surface portion W220 on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (side in the direction of arrow L) are mainly provided.

The protrusion W221 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of arrow L). The protrusion W221 is formed with an inclined portion W221a that inclines from the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 toward the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side) and toward the side opposite to the box base W300 (arrow B direction side).

In the standing portion W222 and both end wall portions W223, the wire illegally inserted through the gap formed between the side wall portion W212 and the protective cover W500 releases the sticking between the flat surface portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL. It is a part for suppressing.

The pair of standing portions W222 are formed so as to extend in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) with a predetermined distance from the side wall portion W212. Both ends of the pair of standing portions W222 in the vertical direction are joined to the pair of both end wall portions W223, and no gap is formed between the pair of standing portions W222 and the pair of both end wall portions W223.

The pair of both end wall portions W223 are formed in a plate shape, and are arranged at both ends of the flat surface portion W220 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in a posture in which the plate thickness directions of the pair of both end wall portions W223 are opposed to each other. NS. The end of the pair of wall portions W223 on the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side) and the end on the side opposite to the box base W300 (arrow B direction side) are box bases rather than the front and back surfaces of the flat surface portion W220. It is formed so as to project to the W300 side and the side opposite to the box base W300, respectively. Further, the end portion of the pair of both end wall portions W223 on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of arrow L) is on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 rather than the end portion on the flat surface portion W220 opposite to the sealing unit W400. It is formed so as to project to. The front surfaces of the pair of both end wall portions W223 are arranged on substantially the same surface as the protruding surface of the standing portion W222.

The recesses W224a and W224b are portions for forming a space between the sticking surface of the sealing seal WSL and the flat surface portion W220. By forming the recesses W224a and W224b separately, the area where the flat surface portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL are attached can be increased.

The recesses W224a and W224b may be formed by connecting them, respectively. As a result, the moldability of the box cover W200 can be easily ensured, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, the recesses W224a and W224b may be formed so as to penetrate the flat surface portion W220 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction). This makes it easier to ensure the moldability of the box cover W200.

The dimension of the recess W224a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the dimension in the left-right direction of the connecting piece W531a of the protective cover W500 described later, and the recess in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The size of W224a is formed to be approximately three times as large as the size of the connecting piece W531a in the vertical direction. The dimensions of the recess W224b in the vertical direction are formed to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the dimensions of the connecting piece W531b of the protective cover W500 in the vertical direction, and the dimensions of the recess W224b in the left-right direction are approximately the same as the dimensions of the connecting piece W531b in the left-right direction. It is formed to be twice as large.

The pair of fastening holes W225 are holes into which screws (not shown) for fastening the box cover W200 and the box base W300 are inserted. The box cover W200 and the box base W300 are fastened by fastening the screws through which the pair of fastening holes W225 are inserted to the box base W300.

The notch portion W226 is a portion for forming a space on the sticking surface side (arrow R direction side) of the sealing seal WSL together with the notch portion W325 of the box base W300 described later. The cutout portion W226 is continuously formed from the upper end to the lower end of the flat surface portion W220. Further, the notch portion W226 moves from the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side) to the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side) to the side opposite to the notch portion W325 (arrow B direction side). It is formed at an angle.

The cover portion W214 is erected from the base portion W211 and the flat surface portion W220 toward the side opposite to the box base W300 (the side in the direction of arrow B) and is formed in a plate shape (upper wall portion, lower wall portion, and the like). Mainly a right wall portion that connects the right end portions of the upper wall portion and the lower wall portion) and a back wall portion W214a that connects the upright tip portions of the upper wall portion, the lower wall portion, and the right wall portion. Be prepared. The cover portion W214 and the flat surface portion W220 form a box shape in which the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of arrow L) is opened.

The upper wall portion and the lower wall portion are formed so as to extend in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and are arranged between the protrusion W221 and the pair of standing portions W222 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), respectively. Will be done. The back wall portion W214a is formed in a plate shape. The end of the back wall portion W214a on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side) is arranged on the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side) with respect to the protrusion W221, and is viewed from the back (arrow F direction). In, the protrusion W221 is made visible. As a result, the engagement between the protrusion W221 and the engagement hole W533 of the protective cover W500, which will be described later, can be visually recognized, and the engagement state between the box cover W200 and the protective cover W500 can be confirmed.

In addition, in the rear view, the back wall portion W214a may be formed so as to protrude to a position where the end portion of the back wall portion W214a opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of the arrow L) overlaps the protrusion W221. This makes it difficult to disengage the protrusion W221 from the engagement hole W533.

The box base W300 has a front wall portion W301 formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangular plate shape in front view, and is erected from four sides of the front wall portion W301 toward the box cover W200 side (arrow B direction side) and has a plate shape. The wall portions (upper wall portion, lower wall portion, left wall portion W302 and right wall portion connecting the upper wall portion and lower wall portion) and the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 from the left wall portion W302 ( Mainly includes a base-side engaged portion W310 protruding in the direction of the arrow L). The box base W300 is formed in a box shape in which the back side is opened by each wall portion. The box base W300 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

A protective cover W500 is attached to the base-side engaged portion W310 together with the cover-side engaged portion W210. The base-side engaged portion W310 mainly includes an upper overhanging portion W311, a cover portion W312, and a flat surface portion W320 protruding from the left wall portion W302 to the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of arrow L).

The upper overhanging portion W311 is arranged at a position corresponding to the upper overhanging portion W213a of the cover-side engaged portion W210 in the front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B). Further, the front surface of the upper overhanging portion W311 is arranged on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the front wall portion W301.

The cover portion W312 is formed from three sides of the front wall portion W312a formed in a plate shape and the front wall portion W312a excluding the side of the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side) to the box cover W200 side (arrow B direction side). Connect the ends of the wall parts (upper wall part, lower wall part, those upper wall part and lower wall part) opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side) that are erected toward the wall and formed in a plate shape. Mainly provided with a left wall portion W312b). The upper wall portion, the lower wall portion, and the left wall portion W312b are formed in a plate shape, and the erected tip portions of the upper wall portion, the lower wall portion, and the left wall portion W312b are joined to the flat surface portion W320.

On the back surface of the front wall portion W312a, a pair of protrusions W312c are projected toward the box cover W200 side (arrow B direction side) at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The pair of protrusions W312c are protrusions for restricting the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of arrow L). The pair of protrusions W312c has an inclined portion W312d that inclines toward the box cover W200 side (arrow B direction side) from the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side) toward the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side). Is formed.

A pair of insertion holes W312e are formed in the left wall portion W312b at positions corresponding to the pair of protrusions W312c in the side view (arrow R direction view) through the plate thickness direction (arrow LR direction). .. The inner shape of the pair of insertion holes W312e is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the pair of protrusions W312c, so that the pair of protrusions W312c can be visually recognized from the side view.

The flat surface portion W320 is a portion to which the sealing seal WSL is attached, and is formed in a plate shape. The flat surface portion W320 has a pair of both end wall portions W321 arranged at both ends of the flat surface portion W320 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and the flat surface portion W320 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction). A pair of fastening holes W322 that are formed through the flat portion W320, a pair of restraining portions W323 that project from the flat surface portion W320 toward the opposite side of the box cover W200 (the side in the direction of arrow F), and a box from the flat surface portion W320. It mainly includes a protruding portion W324 that protrudes toward the cover W200 side (the side in the direction of arrow B).

The pair of both end wall portions W321 are formed in a plate shape, and are arranged on the flat surface portion W320 in a posture in which the plate thickness direction of the pair of both end wall portions W321 is along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). The ends of the pair of both end wall portions W321 on the opposite side (arrow F direction side) from the box cover W200 are formed so as to project from the front surface of the flat surface portion W320. Further, the end portion of the pair of both end wall portions W321 on the opposite side (arrow L direction side) of the sealing unit W321 is formed so as to protrude from the end portion of the flat surface portion W320 on the opposite side of the sealing unit W400.

The pair of fastening holes W322 are holes through which a pair of fastening holes W225 inserted in the box cover W200 are inserted (not shown), and a female screw is provided on the inner circumference of the pair of fastening holes W322. Be done. As a result, the box cover W200 and the box base W300 are fastened.

The pair of restraining portions W323 are portions for restraining the protective cover W500 and the sealing seal WSL from coming into contact with each other. The protruding length of the pair of restraining portions W323 is formed longer than the sealing seal WSL thickness dimension. In the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the pair of restraining portions W323 are arranged at positions corresponding to the pair of insertion holes W312e.

The protruding portion W324 is arranged at the end of the flat surface portion W320 on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of arrow L), and the notched portion W325 is formed at the protruding tip portion of the protruding portion W324. (See FIG. 76). The projecting length of the projecting portion W324 toward the box cover W200 side (arrow B direction side) is formed to be the same as the projecting length of the pair of both end wall portions W223 with respect to the front surface of the flat surface portion W220. As a result, it is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the pair of both end wall portions W321 and the pair of both end wall portions W223 in a state where the protruding portion W324 and the flat surface portion W220 are in contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wire from being illegally inserted into the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

The notch portion W325 is a portion for forming a space on the sticking surface side (arrow R direction side) of the sealing seal WSL together with the notch portion W226 of the box cover W200. The notch portion W325 is continuously formed from the upper end to the lower end of the flat surface portion W320 (protruding portion W324), and is arranged so as to face the notch portion W226 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Further, the notch portion W325 is opposite to the notch portion W226 (arrow F direction side) as it goes from the left wall portion W302 side (arrow R direction side) to the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (arrow L direction side). It is formed with an inclination to.

The protective cover W500 is for shielding the sealing seal WSL attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and has a back wall portion W510 formed in a substantially vertically long rectangular plate shape in the front view and its back wall. The front wall portion W520, which is opposed to the front side (arrow F direction side) from the portion W510 at a predetermined interval and is formed in a substantially vertically long rectangular plate shape in front view, and the back surface excluding the right side (arrow R direction side). The wall portion (upper wall portion, lower wall portion W501 and left wall portion W502) connecting the three sides of the wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520, and the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 are connected to form a plate. Mainly includes engaging portions W530a and W530b, and standing portions W540 that are erected from the lower wall portion W501 toward the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D) and are formed in a rectangular shape.

The protective cover W500 is formed in a box shape in which the right side (the side in the direction of arrow R) is opened by each wall portion. The protective cover W500 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is molded using a resin molding die.

The lengths of the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) are formed to be longer than the lengths of the flat portion W220 and the flat portion W320. Further, the distance between the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 facing each other is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance from the back surface of both end wall portions W223 of the box cover W200 to the front surface of both end wall portions W321 of the box base W300. NS. Further, the distance between the upper wall portion and the lower wall portion W501 of the protective cover W500 facing each other is formed to be larger than the distance between the surfaces of the pair of both end wall portions W223 (both end wall portions W321) opposite to the facing surfaces. NS.

As a result, the cover-side engaged portion W210 and the base-side engaged portion W310 can be arranged inside the protective cover W500, and the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300. The displacement of the protective cover W500 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is regulated.

The back wall portion W510 is formed intermittently along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and is not formed at one place in the present embodiment. The back wall portion W510 is a side that is not formed in the vertical direction, and is erected from the edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) toward the front wall portion W520 side (arrow F direction side). A rib portion W511 and a connecting portion W512 connecting the tips of the rib portions W511 are mainly provided.

The back surface of the back wall portion W510 is arranged slightly on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the back surface portion W212 of the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200. As a result, the back surface of the back wall portion W510 is arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the side wall portion W212, and the back wall portion W510 projects toward the back side of the side wall portion W212. It is possible to suppress the formation of a step between W510 and the side wall portion W212. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover W500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 by utilizing such a step.

The rib portion W511 and the connecting portion W512 are portions for supporting the engaging portion W530a. Since the rib portion W511 is erected from the edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the back wall portion W510, the wire illegally inserted from the gap between the back wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530b can be inserted. It is possible to suppress the release of the sticking between the flat surface portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL.

The vertical length of the rib portion W511 is formed to be shorter than the protruding length of the box cover W200 with respect to the flat portion W220 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of both end wall portions W223. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rib portion W511 from coming into contact with the sealing seal WSL and damaging the sealing seal WSL when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

The connecting portion W512 is arranged by connecting the rib portions W511 on the left side (arrow L direction side), and the length of the connecting portion W512 in the left and right direction (arrow LR direction) is the back wall portion W510. It is formed shorter than the length.

The front wall portion W520 is formed intermittently along the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and is not formed at two locations in the present embodiment. The position where the non-formed portion is formed on the back wall portion W510 in the vertical direction is different from the position where the non-formed portion is formed on the front wall portion W520. The front wall portion W520 is a side that is not formed in the vertical direction, and is erected from the edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) toward the back wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side). The rib portion W521 and the connecting portion W522 that connects the tips of the rib portions W521 are mainly provided.

The front surface of the front wall portion W520 is arranged on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the upper overhanging portion W311 of the box base W300 or slightly on the back surface side (arrow B direction side). As a result, the front surface of the front wall portion W520 is arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the front surface of the upper overhanging portion W311, and the front wall portion W520 projects toward the front side of the upper overhanging portion W311. It is possible to prevent the formation of a step between the front wall portion W520 and the upper overhanging portion W311. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover W500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 by utilizing such a step.

The rib portion W521 and the connecting portion W522 are portions for supporting the engaging portion W530b. Since the rib portion W521 is erected from the edge portion extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) of the front wall portion W520, the wire illegally inserted through the gap between the front wall portion W520 and the engaging portion W530a can be inserted. It is possible to suppress the release of the sticking between the flat surface portion W320 and the sealing seal WSL.

The vertical length of the rib portion W521 is formed to be shorter than the protrusion length toward the front side (arrow F direction side) of both end wall portions W321 with respect to the flat portion W320 of the box base W300. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rib portion W521 from coming into contact with the sealing seal WSL and damaging the sealing seal WSL when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

The connecting portion W522 is arranged by connecting the rib portions W521 on the left side (arrow L direction side), and the length of the connecting portion W522 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is the length of the front wall portion W520. It is formed shorter than the length.

The engaging portions W530a and W530b are portions for engaging the protective cover W500 with the box cover W200 and the box base W300. In the present embodiment, one engaging portion W530a is arranged on the back wall portion W510 side of the protective cover W500, and one engaging portion W530a is arranged on the front wall portion W520 side at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). A pair (two) engaging portions W530b are arranged.

The engaging portion W530a is arranged between the pair of engaging portions W530b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the engagement positions of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 and the protective cover W500 can be dispersed in the vertical direction, and it is difficult to illegally remove the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

A plurality of (three in this embodiment) connecting pieces W531 formed at the left end (arrow L direction side) of the engaging portions W530a and W530b, and connecting pieces W531 in the engaging portions W530a and W530b. Mainly includes an inclined portion W532 formed at an end on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) and an engaging hole W533 formed between the inclined portion W532 and the connecting piece W531.

The engaging portions W530a and W530b are connected to the back wall portion W510 (rib portion W511) or the front wall portion W520 (rib portion W521) via the connecting piece W531. As a result, the engaging portions W530a and W530b are arranged on the opposite side of the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 with respect to the back wall portion W510 or the front wall portion W520. As a result, the protective cover W500 is the box cover W200 and the box base as compared with the case where the engaging portion W530a (engaging portion W530b) is arranged on substantially the same surface as the back wall portion W510 (front wall portion W520). In the state of being attached (engaged) to the W300, the distance between the engaging portion W530a (engaging portion W530b) and the sealing seal WSL facing each other can be reduced.

The right-side (arrow R-direction side) ends of the engaging portions W530a and W530b are formed so as to project to the right of the right-side ends of the front wall portion W520 and the back wall portion W510. Although the inclined portion W532 and the engaging hole W533 formed in the engaging portion W530a have different shapes from the inclined portion W532 and the engaging hole W533 formed in the engaging portion W530b, they have the same reference numerals in the present embodiment. I will explain.

Of the connecting pieces W531, the connecting piece W531 protruding from the left end (arrow L direction side) of the engaging portions W530a and W530b toward the left side is attached to the connecting piece W531a and the engaging portions W530a and W530b. A pair of connecting pieces W531 protruding in the vertical direction from both ends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) on the left side are defined as connecting pieces W531b, respectively. The connecting piece W531a is supported by the connecting portion W512 and W522 of the back wall portion W510 or the front wall portion W520, and the pair of connecting pieces W531b are joined to the rib portions W511 and W521 of the back wall portion W510 or the front wall portion W520. ..

The connecting pieces W531a and W531b are formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape when viewed from the rear. The thickness dimensions of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) are formed to be substantially the same as those of the engaging portions W530a and W530b, and the front and back surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are the engaging portions W530a. , W530b are arranged on substantially the same surface as the front surface and the back surface, respectively. That is, no step is formed between the connecting pieces W531a and W531b and the engaging portions W530a and W530b. As a result, stress concentration occurs between the connecting pieces W531a and W531b and the engaging portions W530a and W530b as compared with the case where a step is formed between the connecting pieces W531a and W531b and the engaging portions W530a and W530b. This can be suppressed, and the strength of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b can be secured.

A pair of surfaces (hereinafter, defined as "side surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b") connecting the surface of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b facing the seal seal WSL and the surface opposite to the surface facing the sealing seal WSL are The connecting pieces W531a and W531b are formed orthogonal to the surface facing the sealing seal WSL and the surface opposite to the surface facing the sealing seal WSL. The front and back surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are surfaces formed parallel to the sealing seal WSL when the protective cover W500 is attached (engaged) to the box cover W200 and the box base W300. Yes, the pair of side surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are surfaces formed orthogonal to the sealing seal WSL.

Here, the distance between the connecting piece W531b and the tip of the engaging portion W530b is formed to be larger than the distance between the connecting piece W531b and the tip of the engaging portion W530a. Further, as described above, the thickness dimension of the engaging portion W530b in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction) is formed to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the engaging portion W530a. As a result, the engaging portion W530b is formed so as to be more easily elastically deformed than the engaging portion W530a.

The inclined portion W532 is a portion for facilitating elastic deformation of the engaging portions W530a and W530b, and is a front side (arrow F) as it goes from the right side (arrow R direction side) to the left side (arrow L direction side). It is formed so as to be inclined in the direction side).

The engagement hole W533 is a portion for surrounding the protrusion W221 of the box cover W200 or the protrusion W312c of the box base W300. Displacement of the protective cover W500 to the left side (arrow L direction side) is restricted by contact between the inner peripheral surface of the engagement hole W533 and the right side (arrow R direction side) surface of the protrusions W221 and W312c. Will be done.

In the standing portion W540, the front wall portion W520 and the back wall portion W510 are opposed to each other (the posture in which the back wall portion W510 faces the front side of the front wall portion W520), and the protective cover W500 is the box cover W200 and the box base. It is a part for suppressing attachment to W300.

The erection portion W540 protrudes from the lower wall portion W501 toward the side opposite to the upper wall portion (arrow D direction side), and the protrusion length of the erection portion W540 is arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side). It is formed to be larger than the distance between both end wall portions W223 and W321 to be provided and the upper overhanging portion W213a.

Further, the upright portion W540 is arranged on the back side (the side in the direction of arrow B) with respect to the lower overhanging portion W213b. As a result, when the protective cover W500 is displaced toward the right side (arrow R direction side), it is possible to prevent the standing portion W540 from coming into contact with the lower overhanging portion W213b, and the protective cover W500 becomes a box. It is attached to the cover W200 and the box base W300.

On the other hand, the protective cover W500 is placed on the right side (arrow R direction side) in a posture in which the front wall portion W520 and the back wall portion W510 are opposite to each other (the posture in which the back wall portion W510 faces the front side of the front wall portion W520). When displaced toward, the upright portion W540 and the upper overhanging portion W311 come into contact with each other, and the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the right side is restricted. As a result, the protective cover W500 is displaced toward the right side, and the engaging portion W530a and the left wall portion W312b of the box base W300 come into contact with each other, or the engaging portion W530b and the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200 come into contact with each other. It is possible to suppress contact. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging portions W530a and W530b from being damaged. The standing portion W540 may be non-formed.

The sealing seal WSL is for suppressing the opening of the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and is formed in a sheet shape. The sealing seal WSL is bent in a substantially U shape when viewed from above, and is attached to the flat surface portion W220, the flat surface portion W320, and the protruding portion W324. The sealing sticker WSL mainly includes an adhesive sheet to which an adhesive is applied on the back surface side and a display sheet on which identification information is printed on the front surface side, and the front surface of the adhesive sheet and the back surface of the display sheet are attached to each other. It is formed.

The dimension of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is formed to be slightly smaller than the distance between the pair of both end wall portions W223 and W321 facing each other. By attaching the sealing seal WSL to the flat surface portion W220, the flat surface portion W320, and the protruding portion W324, the notch portions W226 and W325 are shielded by the sealing seal WSL except for the pair of both end wall portions W223 and W321 sides. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the notch portions W226 and W325 to be visually recognized, and it is possible to make it difficult for a person who commits fraud to easily cut the seal seal WSL using the notch portions W226 and W325.

The back surface of the adhesive sheet is a portion to be attached to the flat surface portion W220 of the box cover W200 and the flat surface portion W320 of the box base W300. Strong adhesive force with W320 is formed. As a result, when the seal seal WSL is to be peeled off from the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320, the adhesive sheet and the display sheet are released from the adhesive sheet, the display sheet is separated from the adhesive sheet, and the adhesive sheet and the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion are separated. Adhesion with the portion W320 is maintained. As a result, opening of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily suppressed.

On the surface of the display sheet, a plurality of numbers, the name (model name) of the pachinko machine W10, the manufacturer name, the board information, and the like are described as identification information (not shown). The identification information is described at a position where it is attached to the flat surface portion W220. As a result, the identification information can be visually recognized by opening the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). As a result, it is not necessary to rotate the substrate box W100 with respect to the inner frame 12 in order to visually recognize the identification information, as compared with the case where the identification information is described at the position where the identification information is attached to the flat surface portion W320.

Further, the surface of the display sheet is coated with a special ink that becomes visible by irradiating light having a specific wavelength such as ultraviolet rays in a pattern.

The outer peripheral edge of the sealing seal WSL is formed in a saw blade shape. As a result, when the seal seal WSL is peeled off from the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320, stress concentration can be easily generated in the saw blade-shaped recess, and the seal seal WSL can be easily divided. As a result, at least a part of the sealing seal WSL can be easily maintained in a state of being attached to the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320, and the opening of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily suppressed.

The sealing seal WSL may include an IC chip. By receiving the ID information stored in the IC chip with the scanner, it is possible to confirm whether or not the board box W100 has been illegally replaced. In addition, it can be made more difficult for a person who attempts fraud to illegally obtain the seal WSL or forge the seal WSL.

Next, attachment of the protective cover W500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. 73 (a) and 73 (b) are partial front views of the substrate box W100, and FIGS. 73 (c) and 73 (d) are partial rear views of the substrate box W100. 74 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W100 in the line LXXIVa-LXXIVa of FIG. 73 (b), and FIG. 74 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W100 in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 73 (b). It is a partial cross-sectional view.

73 (a) and 73 (c) show the state before the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and FIGS. 73 (b) and 73 (d) show the box. The state after the protective cover W500 is attached to the cover W200 and the box base W300 is shown. Further, in FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), the protrusion W312c is shown by a broken line, and in FIGS. 73 (c) and 73 (d), the recesses W224a and W224b are shown by a broken line. Further, since the mode of engagement between the pair of engaging portions W530b and the pair of protrusions Ws328 is the same on one side (upper side) and the other side (lower side), a cross-sectional view of one side is illustrated and described, and the other side. The description is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 73A and 73C, the positions of the engaging holes W533 of the engaging portions W530a and W530b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) are positioned at the protrusions W221 and the box base of the box cover W200. From the state of being aligned with the position of the protrusion W312c of W300 (see FIG. 72), the protective cover W500 is displaced toward the right side (arrow R direction side).

By displacing the protective cover W500 toward the right side (the side in the direction of arrow R), the inclined portion W532 of the engaging portion W530a and the inclined portion W221a of the protrusion W221 come into contact with each other and come into contact with the inclined portion W532 of the engaging portion W530b. The inclined portion W312d of the protrusion W312c comes into contact with the inclined portion W312d (see FIG. 72). Displace the protective cover W500 toward the right side (arrow R direction side) from the state where the inclined portion W532 of the engaging portions W530a and W530b, the inclined portion W221a of the protrusion W221, and the inclined portion W312d of the protrusion W312c are in contact with each other. As a result, the engaging portions W530a and W530b are elastically deformed toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side).

Since the engaging portions W530a and W530b are elastically deformed toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), the protective cover W500 can be easily rotated toward the back surface side. As a result, the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed toward the back surface side (front side), and the engaging portion W530b is elastically deformed toward the front side (rear surface side). The amount of elastic deformation of W530b can be reduced. As a result, damage to the engaging portions W530a and W530b can be easily suppressed.

FIG. 73 (FIG. 73) is obtained by continuously shifting the protective cover W500 toward the right side (arrow R direction side) from the state in which the engaging portions W530a and W530b are elastically deformed toward the back side (arrow B direction side). b), as shown in FIGS. 73 (d) and 74, a protrusion W221 is provided inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530a (the engagement portion W530a and the protrusion W221 are engaged), and a pair. A pair of protrusions W312c are arranged inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530b (the pair of engagement portions W530b and the pair of protrusions W312c are engaged with each other). As a result, the elastic deformation of the engaging portions W530a and W530b is released.

Hereinafter, a state in which the protrusion W312c is arranged inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530a and the protrusion W221 is arranged inside the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion W530b is defined as a regulated state. Since the mode of engagement between the pair of engaging portions W530b and the pair of protrusions W312c is the same on one side (upper side) and the other side (lower side), only the cross section on one side is shown. The cross-sectional view on the other side will be omitted.

The distance between the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 facing each other is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the distance from the back surface of both end wall portions W223 of the box cover W200 to the front surface of both end wall portions W321 of the box base W300. In the regulated state, the displacement of the protective cover W500 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engagement portion W530a (engagement portion W530b) from being disengaged from the protrusion W221 (projection W312c).

Further, in the regulated state, the surface of the protrusion W221 opposite to the inclined portion W221a (the side in the direction of the arrow R) and the inner surface of the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion W530a are in contact with each other, and the protrusion W312c is in contact with the inclined portion W312d. The surface on the opposite side (arrow R direction side) and the inner peripheral surface of the engagement hole W533 of the engaging portion W530b come into contact with each other, so that the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the left side (arrow L direction side) is restricted. NS. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 from being exposed.

Further, in the regulated state, the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are arranged at positions where they overlap the recesses W224a and W224b in the rear view. Specifically, the connecting piece W531a is arranged at a position substantially central to the recess W224a in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the connecting piece W531b is recessed in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). It is arranged at a position substantially at the center of W224b.

Further, in the regulated state, the right end of the back wall portion W510 (in the direction of arrow R) and the right end of the front wall portion W520 are the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200 and the left wall of the box base W300. It comes into contact with the portion W302. Further, the right end of the engaging portion W530a is brought into contact with the side wall portion W212. As a result, the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the right side is restricted. At least one of the right end of the back wall portion W510, the right end of the engaging portion W530a, or the right end of the front wall portion W520 is the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200. Alternatively, it may be in contact with the left wall portion W302 of the box base W300.

Here, due to factors such as the processing accuracy (dimensional tolerance) of the protective cover W500, a gap is formed between the right end of the back wall portion W510 and the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200. There is a risk that the wire will be illegally inserted into the protective cover W500 using the gap. As a result, the sticking between the flat surface portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL may be illegally released.

On the other hand, by disposing the pair of standing portions W222 on the flat surface portion W220, even if the wire is illegally inserted inside the protective cover W500, the pair of illegally inserted wires can be inserted. Can be brought into contact with the standing portion W222 of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flat surface portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL from being illegally released from each other.

Further, since the front surface of the pair of both end wall portions W223 is arranged on substantially the same surface as the projecting surface of the standing portion W222, the front surface (protruding surface of the standing portion W222) and the back surface of the pair of both end wall portions W223. In a state where the inner surface of the wall portion W510 is in contact with the inner surface, it is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the protruding surface of the standing portion W222 (front of the pair of both end wall portions W223) and the inner surface of the back wall portion W510. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the wire from being illegally inserted by utilizing such a gap and the sticking of the flat surface portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL from being released.

Next, the removal of the protective cover W500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. 75 (a) is a partial front view of the substrate box W100, and FIG. 75 (b) is a partial rear view of the substrate box W100. FIG. 76 is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W100 in the LXXVI-LXXVI line of FIG. 75 (b). 77 (a) is a partial front view of the substrate box W100, and FIG. 77 (b) is a partial rear view of the substrate box W100.

In addition, in FIG. 75A and FIG. 75B, the state in which the engaging portions W530a and W530b are cut from the protective cover W500 is shown. Further, in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), a state in which the protective cover W500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 is shown, and the engaging portions W530a and W530b cut from the protective cover W500 are two. Illustrated by dotted line.

Further, in FIG. 76, one of the pair of connecting pieces W531b of the engaging portion W530a is shown, and cutting in one of the pair of connecting pieces W531b will be described. Since the aspect is the same as one of the pair of connecting pieces W531b, the description of cutting the other of the pair of connecting pieces W531b and the connecting piece W531a will be omitted. Further, since the cutting of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engaging portion W530b is the same as that of the engaging portion W530a, the description of cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engaging portion W530b will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engaging portions W530a and W530b are cut by a cutting tool (not shown) to engage with the protective cover W500 (back wall portion W510 and front wall portion W520). The joints W530a and W530b are separated. Examples of the cutting tool include nippers, scissors, a cutter knife, and a knife.

For example, when the cutting tool is composed of nippers or scissors and the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are sandwiched between the pair of blades to cut the connecting pieces W531a and W531b, a pair of connecting pieces W531a and W531b are paired on the side surfaces. The blades are brought into contact with each other, and the pair of blades are displaced toward the opposite sides of the pair of side surfaces to cut the connecting pieces W531a and W531b.

Further, for example, when the cutting tool is composed of a cutter knife or a knife and the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut by using a single blade, the blades are brought into contact with one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting pieces W531a and W531b. , The connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut by the displacement of the blade toward the other of the pair of side surfaces.

As described above, in the rear view, the connecting piece W531b of the protective cover W500 is arranged at a position overlapping the recess W224b (see FIG. 73). That is, as shown in FIG. 76, the recess W224b is recessed via the sealing seal WSL toward the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL (the side in the direction of arrow F) facing the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530b. NS. As a result, a space can be formed between the sealing seal WSL and the recess W224b, and the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) is inserted between the back wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530a in order to cut the connecting piece W531b. In this case, the tip of the cutting tool can be accepted in the recess W224b. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.

That is, when the connecting piece W531b is cut, a trace (damage) can be formed on the sealing seal WSL. Thereby, it is possible to confirm the state of the seal seal WSL (whether the seal seal WSL is new or reused) based on the presence or absence of traces of the seal seal WSL. Further, by forming a trace on the seal seal WSL, it is possible to prevent the seal seal WSL from being reused.

Further, the connecting piece W531b is arranged at a position substantially at the center of the recess W224b in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Further, the connecting piece W531b is arranged at a position overlapping the recess W224b in the rear view (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in a state where the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) is arranged on the side surface side of the connecting piece W531b for cutting the connecting piece W531b, the tip of the cutting tool can be easily received in the recess W224b. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the cutting operation of the connecting piece W531b, and the operator (clerk) can easily recognize the trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL.

Further, since the engaging portion W530a (connecting piece W531b) is connected to the rib portion W511, the connecting piece W531b and the sealing seal WSL (the connecting piece W531b) and the sealing seal WSL ( The space facing the flat surface portion W220) is formed to be small. As a result, the tip of the cutting tool can be brought close to the sealing seal WSL, and the recess W224b can be easily received. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged.

As described above, the connecting piece W531a of the protective cover W500 is arranged at a position overlapping the recess W224a in the rear view (see FIG. 73). As a result, when the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) is inserted between the back wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530a in order to cut the connecting piece W531a in the same manner as cutting the connecting piece W531b, the cutting is performed. The tip of the tool can easily damage the sealing seal WSL.

The connecting piece W531a protrudes from the engaging portions W530a and W530b toward the left side (arrow L direction side), and the connecting piece W531b protrudes from the engaging portions W530a and W530b in the vertical direction. As a result, it becomes necessary to change the orientation of the cutting tool (not shown) depending on whether the connecting piece W531a is cut or the connecting piece W531b is cut. As a result, the time required for the fraudster to disconnect the connecting pieces W531a and W531b can be extended, and the fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 77, by disconnecting the engaging portions W530a and W530b from the protective cover W500, the restricted state is released, and the protective cover W500 can be displaced toward the left side (arrow L direction side). NS.

In this way, when the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut, the sealing seal WSL is easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool (not shown), so that, for example, the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are illegally cut (engaged). After the protective cover W500 is removed, the seal WSL trace (damaged) even when the protective cover W500 to which the engaging portions W530a and W530b are joined by an adhesive is attached. ), That is, the operator (clerk) can easily recognize that the connecting piece W531b has been disconnected, that is, there is a possibility that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by the illicit person.

It should be noted that the fraudster possesses the protective cover W500 in which the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are not cut, and the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut instead of the protective cover W500 in which the connecting pieces W531a and W531b are cut. Even when the protective cover W500 is not attached, it is possible to make it easier for the operator (clerk) to recognize that there is a possibility that an unauthorized operation has been performed due to the trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL.

Further, after an illegal person illegally peels off the seal seal WSL from the flat surface portion W220 (flat surface portion W320) and performs an illegal operation on the main control board (not shown), the peeled seal seal WSL is removed from the flat surface portion W220 (flat surface portion W220). Even if it is difficult for the operator (clerk) to recognize the release of the seal seal WSL by reattaching it to the flat surface portion W320), there is a risk of unauthorized operation on the main control board by an unauthorized person. Can be easily recognized by the operator (clerk) by the trace (damage) of the seal seal WSL.

Here, as compared with the protective cover W500, it is difficult for a person who attempts fraud to illegally obtain the seal seal WSL or forge the seal seal WSL. Therefore, when the protective cover W500 is illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 as in the present embodiment, the seal seal WSL is easily damaged (it is easy to give a trace), thereby making the main control board (not shown). It is particularly effective to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize the risk of unauthorized operation on).

Further, the board box W100 is arranged (shaft-supported) on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1), and the recesses W224a and W224b form the box cover W200 forming the back side of the board box W100. Since it is formed, the trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL is visible when the inner frame 12 is opened and the back side of the inner frame 12 is visible. As a result, for example, the recesses W224a and W224b are recessed in the box base W300 (flat surface portion W320) forming the front side (arrow F direction side) of the board box W100, and the board box W100 is rotated with respect to the inner frame 12. This makes it easier for the operator (clerk) to recognize the trace (damage) of the seal seal WSL, as compared with the case where the damage of the seal seal WSL is visible.

If there is no trace (damage) on the seal WSL, it can be determined that there is a high possibility that the seal WSL has not been tampered with. On the other hand, when the seal seal WSL has traces (damage), the protective cover W500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, the seal seal WSL is peeled off, and then the seal seal WSL is reattached. It can be judged that the possibility is high. Alternatively, the protective cover W500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and at that time, a trace (damage) is formed on the seal seal WSL, so that it can be determined that there is a high possibility of attempting fraud.

Next, opening of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 will be described. With the protective cover W500 removed from the box cover W200 and box base W300, the attachment of the box cover W200 and box base W300 to the sealing seal WSL can be released, or the box cover W200 (flat surface portion W220) and box base can be released. At the boundary of W300 (protruding portion W324), the seal seal WSL is cut. As a result, the box cover W200 and the box base W300 are opened.

Here, the cutout portions W226 and W325 are formed in the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320, and the notch portions W226 and W325 are arranged so as to face each other in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), whereby the box cover. In the state where the W200 and the box base W300 are combined, a substantially V-shaped space is formed on the sticking surface side (arrow R direction side) of the sealing seal WSL in the cross-sectional view. As a result, the tip of the cutting tool can be easily arranged in the space formed by the notches W226 and W325, and the seal seal WSL can be easily cut (see FIG. 76). Further, by combining the box cover W200 and the box base W300, a space can be easily formed on the side to which the sealing seal WSL is attached, and the manufacturing cost of the box base W300 is higher than that in the case where the recess is formed in the protruding portion W324. Can be reduced.

Further, the notch portion W226 is inclined from the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side) toward the tip side (arrow L direction side) of the flat surface portion W220 toward the side opposite to the notch portion W325 (arrow B direction side). The cutout portion W325 is formed from the left wall portion W302 side (arrow R direction side) toward the tip side (arrow L direction side) of the flat portion W320, and is opposite to the cutout portion W226 (arrow F direction side). By being formed so as to be inclined to, a non-attached region is formed between the flat surface portion W220 and the protruding portion W324 and the sealing seal WSL at the boundary between the flat surface portion W220 and the protruding portion W324 (FIG. 76). reference). As a result, by cutting the sealing seal WSL, it is possible to easily disengage the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

Next, the substrate box W2100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

78 (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box W2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 78 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W2100 in the line LXXVIIIb-LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a). In addition, in FIG. 78 (a), both end wall portions W223 and both end projecting portions W2223a of the box cover W2200 are illustrated by broken lines, and in FIG. 78 (b), the engaging portions W2530a and W2530b are cut from the protective cover W2500. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 78A and 78B, in the protective cover W2500 of the substrate box W2100 in the eighth embodiment, the connecting piece W2531b is connected to the back wall portion W2510 and the front wall portion W2520.

The connecting piece W2531b is a hanging portion W2531c extending in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) from the edge portion of the back wall portion W2510 and the front wall portion W2520 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the hanging portion W2531c. It is provided with a parallel portion W2531d extending in the vertical direction from the tip, and is formed in a substantially L shape in a cross-sectional view. Further, as compared with the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 in the seventh embodiment, the distance between the back wall portion W2510 and the front wall portion W2520 facing each other is formed larger.

The pair of both end wall portions W223 of the box cover W2200 includes both end protrusions W2223a protruding from both end wall portions W223 toward the back wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side), and the pair of both end wall portions of the box base W2300. W321 includes both end projecting portions W2321a projecting from both end wall portions W321 toward the front wall portion W520 side (arrow F direction side).

The protruding length of the both end protruding portions W2223a is formed to be substantially equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the both end wall portions W223 and the back surface wall portion W510 facing each other. Further, the length of both end protruding portions W2223a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is formed to be approximately 1/3 of both end wall portions W223, and the length of both end protruding portions W2223a on the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side). One end is disposed in contact with the side wall portion W212.

The protruding length of the both end protruding portions W2321a is formed to be substantially equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the both end wall portions W321 and the front wall portion W520 facing each other. Further, the length of the both end protruding portions W2321a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is formed to be approximately 1/3 of the both end wall portions W321, and the length of both end protruding portions W2321a on the cover portion W312 side (arrow R direction side). One end is disposed in contact with the left wall portion W312b (see FIG. 72).

As a result, in the regulated state, the protective cover W2500 is displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) due to the contact between the both end protruding portions W2223a (both end protruding portions W2321a) and the back wall portion W510 (front wall portion W520). Is regulated. As a result, the disengagement between the engaging portion W530a (engaging portion W530b) and the protrusion W221 (protrusion W312c) is suppressed (see FIG. 74).

To remove the protective cover W2500 from the box cover W2200 and the box base W2300, the connecting piece W531a and the hanging portion W2531c of the connecting piece W2531b are cut by a cutting tool (not shown), and the engaging portions W2530a and W2530b are removed from the protective cover W2500. It is done by being separated.

In the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), the protective cover W2500 was displaced from the both ends protruding portion W2223a (both ends protruding portion W2321a) to the side opposite to the side wall portion W212 (left wall portion W312b) (arrow L direction side). In the state, the protruding portions W2223a at both ends (protruding portions W2231a at both ends) and the back wall portion W510 (front wall portion W520) are not in contact with each other, and the restriction on the displacement of the protective cover W2500 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) is lifted. Will be done.

Here, by forming the hanging portion W2531c on the connecting piece W2531b, the hanging portion W2531c is formed on the hanging portion W2531c in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as compared with the case where the hanging portion W2531c is not formed on the connecting piece W2531b. The distance between the cut portion and the sealing seal WSL facing each other can be reduced. As a result, the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) and the cut portion of the connecting piece W2531b can be easily brought into contact with the sealing seal WSL, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged.

Further, the cut portion formed on the hanging portion W2531c can be opposed to the sealing seal WSL, and when the protective cover W2500 is removed from the box cover W2200 and the box base W2300, the sealing portion WSL is formed by the cutting portion formed on the hanging portion W2531c. Can be easily damaged. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

Next, the protective cover W3500 according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (c). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 78 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover W3500 according to the ninth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along the line LXXVIIIb-LXXVIIIb of FIG. 78 (a).

As shown in FIG. 78 (c), in the protective cover W3500 according to the ninth embodiment, the back wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engaging portion W3530a (engaging portion W3530b) are formed on substantially the same surface. The back wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engaging portion W3530a (engaging portion W3530b) are connected via the connecting piece W3531b.

The connecting piece W3531b is directed from the edge portions of the engaging portions W3530a and W3530b, the back wall portion W3510 and the front wall portion W3520 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) toward the opposite sides of the back wall portion W3510 and the front wall portion W3520. It is provided with a pair of hanging portions W3531c extending vertically and a parallel portion W3531d connecting the tips of the pair of hanging portions W3531c, and is formed in a substantially U shape in a cross-sectional view.

To remove the protective cover W3500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 (see FIG. 78 (b)), the parallel portion W3531d of the connecting piece W3531b is cut by a cutting tool (not shown), and the engaging portion from the protective cover W3500. This is done by separating W3530a and W3530b.

The back wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engaging portion W3530a (engaging portion W3530b) are formed on substantially the same surface, so that the back wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the engaging portion W3530a ( It is possible to prevent the formation of a step from the engaging portion W3530b). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a finger to be caught on the protective cover W3500, and it is possible to easily prevent the protective cover W500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300.

By forming the pair of hanging portions W3531c, the facing distance between the connecting piece W3531b and the sealing seal WSL is smaller than the facing distance between the back wall portion W3510 (front wall portion W3520) and the sealing seal WSL ( See FIG. 78 (b)). As a result, the tip of the cutting tool can be brought close to the sealing seal WSL, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

Next, the substrate box W4100 according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 79. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

79 (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box W4100 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 79 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W4100 in the line LXXIXb-LXXIXb of FIG. 79 (a). 79 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W4100 in the LXXIXc-LXXIXc line of FIG. 79 (a), and FIG. 79 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W4100 in the LXXIXd-LXXIXd line of FIG. 79 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 79, the protective cover W4500 of the substrate box W4100 according to the tenth embodiment includes protrusions W4534. The protrusion W4534 is formed at the protruding tip of the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b so as to project from the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b toward the opposite side of the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 in a quadrangular pyramid shape.

By forming the protrusions W4534 on the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b, the flat surface portion W4220 (flat surface portion W4320) is formed on the front side (back side) by the amount of protrusion of the protrusion W4534. As a result, when the protective cover W4500 is attached to the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300, the contact between the protrusion W4534 and the seal seal WSL can be suppressed, and the seal seal WSL can be suppressed from being damaged.

Further, since the protrusion W4534 is arranged at the protruding tip of the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b, the protrusion W4534 is arranged on the side wall portion W212 side (cover portion W312 side) of the sealing seal WSL in the regulated state.

In order to illegally remove the protective cover W4500 from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300, the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b are not cut, and the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b are elastically deformed to elastically deform the engaging portions W4530a (engaging portion W4530b). ) And the protrusion W221 of the flat surface portion W4220 (the protrusion W312c of the flat surface portion W4320) may be disengaged.

In the present embodiment, the protrusions W4534 are formed so as to project from the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b toward the opposite side of the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520, so that the protective cover W4500 from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300 is formed. At the time of removal, the protrusion W4534 and the sealing seal WSL can be easily brought into contact with each other. Further, since the protrusion W4534 is formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape, the protrusion W4534 and the sealing seal WSL can be brought into contact with each other, so that the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged.

Further, since the protrusion W4534 is arranged on the side wall portion W212 side (cover portion W312 side) of the seal seal WSL, the seal seal WSL is attached when the protective cover W4500 is removed from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300. The protrusion W4534 can be brought into contact with the side surface connecting the surface and the surface facing the sticking surface.

As a result, the protrusion W4534 is brought into contact with the surface of the seal seal WSL, and while the protrusion W4534 slides on the surface of the seal seal WSL (without causing the protrusion W4534 to damage the seal seal WSL), the protective cover from the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300. The sealing seal WSL can be more easily damaged than when the W4500 is removed.

Further, a pair of protrusions W4534 are formed at both ends of the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). When the sealing seal WSL is damaged by the pair of protrusions W4534, the damage of the sealing seal WSL can be easily visually recognized from the gap between the engaging portion W4530a (engaging portion W4530b) and the back wall portion W510 (front wall portion W520).

As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

Further, by using the protrusion W4534, the box cover W4200 and the box base W4300 can be easily opened (sealing seal WSL is cut). More specifically, the sealing seal WSL is cut by separating the engaging portion W4530a (engaging portion W4530b) from the protective cover W4500 and arranging the protrusion W4534 in the space formed by the notches W226 and W325. It can be done easily.

This makes it unnecessary to carry a cutting tool (not shown). Further, since the engaging portion W4530a (engaging portion W4530b) is formed smaller than the protective cover W4500, interference with the pair of both end wall portions W223 and the pair of both end wall portions W321 can be suppressed, so that the sealing seal WSL can be used. The cutting work can be easily performed. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be preferably cut.

Next, the substrate box W5100 according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), the engagement hole W533 is illustrated by a broken line. Further, in the description of FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), FIG. 73 (c) will be referred to as appropriate.

80 (a) to 80 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box W5100 according to the eleventh embodiment, and correspond to the cross-sectional views taken along the line LXXXa-LXXXXa of FIG. 73 (b). Note that FIG. 80 (a) shows a state in which the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed in order to attach the protective cover W5500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, and FIG. 80 (b) shows the box cover W200 and the box. The engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed in order to illegally remove the protective cover W5500 from the base W5300, and the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engaging hole W533 is disengaged. FIG. 80 (c) shows FIG. 80. The state in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced toward the left side (the side in the L direction of the arrow) from the state in (b) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (c), the box base W5300 of the substrate box W5100 according to the eleventh embodiment includes a recess W5326, and the protective cover W5500 includes a protrusion W5534.

By forming the protrusion W5534 on the engaging portion W5530b, the flat surface portion W5320 is formed on the back surface side by the amount of protrusion of the protrusion W5534. As a result, when the protective cover W5500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, the contact between the protrusion W5534 and the seal seal WSL can be suppressed, and the seal seal WSL can be suppressed from being damaged.

The recess W5326 is a portion for forming a space between the sticking surface of the sealing seal WSL and the flat surface portion W5220, and is recessed in the front surface of the flat surface portion W5320. The recess W5326 is formed at a position where it overlaps the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the regulated state, and the inner surface of the recess W5326 on the right side (arrow R direction side) is to the right of the protrusion W5534. It is arranged on the side.

The length of the recess W5326 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction) is formed to be larger than the dimension of the protrusion W312c of the box base W5300 in the left-right direction, and the engagement hole W533 is formed to the left side of the protrusion W312c (arrow L direction). Even when the protective cover W5500 is displaced toward the left side to the position (side), the inner surface of the recess W5326 on the left side is arranged on the left side of the protrusion W5534.

The protrusion W5534 is a protrusion for damaging the sealing seal WSL when the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed in order to illegally remove the protective cover W5500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, and is a protrusion on the sealing seal WSL side (arrow). It is formed so as to project toward the B direction side).

That is, since the protrusion W5534 protrudes inward of the protective cover W5500 formed in a box shape, an operator (clerk) comes into contact with the protrusion W5534 in the manufacturing work, transportation work, etc. of the substrate box W5100 and the protective cover W5500. And can prevent injuries.

A pair of protrusions W5534 are formed on both end sides of the engaging portion W5530b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). As a result, the breakage of the sealing seal WSL can be easily visually recognized from the gap between the engaging portion W5530b and the front wall portion W520 (see FIG. 73 (c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 80 (b), a state in which the engaging portion W5530b is illicitly elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow B direction side) will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in order to disengage the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533, the engaging portion W5530b is illegally larger than the protrusion dimension of the protrusion W312c on the sealing seal WSL side (side in the direction of arrow B). In the state of being elastically deformed toward), the tips of the pair of protrusions W5534 are arranged in the space formed by the recesses W5326, and the seal seal WSL is damaged by the pair of protrusions W5534. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

In FIG. 80 (c), the protective cover W5500 is moved to the left while maintaining a state in which the engaging portion W5530b is illicitly elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow B direction side) from the state in FIG. 80 (b). The state in which the engagement hole W533 is located on the left side of the protrusion W312c (the state in which the engagement hole W533 and the protrusion W312c are disengaged) is shown. NS.

As described above, since the length of the recess W5326 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is formed to be larger than the dimension of the protrusion W312c, the engagement hole W533 is on the left side of the protrusion W312c (arrow L direction). Even when the protective cover W5500 is displaced to the left side to the position (side), the tips of the pair of protrusions W5534 can be arranged in the space formed by the recesses W5326. As a result, the area where the seal seal WSL is damaged can be increased, and the operator (clerk) can easily recognize the damage of the seal seal WSL.

In this way, when the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed to release the engagement between the engaging hole W533 and the protrusion W312c without cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engaging portion W5530b, the sealing seal WSL It is possible to easily give a trace (damage) to the surface.

Next, the substrate box W6100 according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (d). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in FIG. 80 (d), the engagement hole W533 is illustrated by a broken line.

FIG. 80 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W6100 according to the twelfth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-sectional view taken along the line LXXXa-LXXXXa of FIG. 73 (b). In FIG. 80 (d), the engaging portion W5530b was elastically deformed in order to illegally remove the protective cover W5500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300, and the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engaging hole W533 was released. The state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 80 (d), the box base W6300 of the substrate box W6100 according to the twelfth embodiment includes a recess W6326. The recess W6326 is formed to have a shorter recessed dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) than the recess W5326 in the eleventh embodiment. In the present embodiment, the concave shape of the recess W6326 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the protrusion W5534 of the protective cover W5500. Further, the recess W6326 is formed at a position where it overlaps the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the regulated state.

As a result, in a state where the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow B direction side), the tip of the protrusion W5534 is arranged in the space formed by the recess W6326, and the protrusion W5534 is formed. By abutting on the inside of the recess W6326, the displacement of the protective cover W5500 toward the left side (arrow L direction side) is restricted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover W5500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300.

Further, in a state where the engaging portion W5530b is elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow B direction side), the tips of the pair of protrusions W5534 are arranged in the space formed by the recesses W6326, and the pair The protrusion W5534 damages the sealing seal WSL. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

Next, the substrate box W7100 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 81. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

81 (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box W7100 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 81 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W7100 in the line LXXXIb-LXXXXLb of FIG. 81 (a). In FIG. 81A, a pair of fastening holes W7225 are shown by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the flat surface portion W7220 and the flat surface portion W7320 of the substrate box W7100 in the thirteenth embodiment, a pair of fastening holes W7225 and a pair of fastening holes W7322 are vertically connected to the connecting piece W531b of the protective cover W500 (arrows). It is formed at a position overlapping in the UD direction). That is, the pair of fastening holes W7322 are formed via the sealing seal WSL so as to face the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530b and face the opposite side (arrow F direction side) from the sealing seal WSL.

The fastening hole W7322 is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the diameter of the fastening hole W7322 is formed larger than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction).

As a result, a space can be formed between the screw for fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 and the sealing seal WSL, and the cutting tool can be used between the back wall portion W510 and the engaging portion W530a in order to cut the connecting piece W531b. When the tip (not shown) is inserted, the tip of the cutting tool can be accepted into the fastening hole W7322. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool, and the operator (clerk) is made aware that there is a possibility that the main control board (not shown) has been tampered with by the illicit person. It can be made easy.

Using the fastening hole W7322 (assuming that the tip of the cutting tool can be accepted into the fastening hole W7322), a trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL is formed at a position corresponding to the screw for fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300. Therefore, even when the screw for fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 is shielded by the sealing seal WSL, the position of the screw can be grasped based on the trace (damage) of the sealing seal WSL. This makes it possible to improve the workability of the work of releasing the screws.

Further, a pair of fastening functions for inserting a screw for fastening the box cover W7200 and the box base W7300 and a function for forming a space for arranging the tip (not shown) of the cutting tool are fastened. It can also be used as the hole W7225. As a result, it is possible to suppress the formation of the recess W224b (see FIG. 72) in the flat surface portion W7220, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, the protective cover W8500 according to the 14th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (a). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 82 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W8100 according to the 14th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section of the LXXXXIIa portion of FIG. 76 (a).

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), the connecting piece W8531b of the protective cover W8500 according to the 14th embodiment is formed in a parallelogram shape in a cross-sectional view. In the present embodiment, the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220).

Specifically, it is formed so as to be inclined to the right side (arrow R direction side) from the side opposite to the seal seal WSL (arrow B direction side) toward the seal seal WSL side (arrow F direction side). It should be noted that the seal may be formed so as to be inclined to the left side (arrow L direction side) from the side opposite to the seal seal WSL toward the seal seal WSL side.

As a result, when cutting the connecting piece W8531b using a cutting tool (not shown), the direction from the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL (arrow B direction side) to the sealing seal WSL side (arrow F direction side) The tip of the cutting tool can be easily rotated toward the right side (the side in the direction of arrow R). As a result, the tip of the cutting tool can be accepted in the recess W224b, and the tip of the cutting tool can easily damage the seal WSL. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

Next, the protective cover W9500 according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

82 (b) is a partial rear view of the substrate box W9100 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 82 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box W9100 in the LXXXIIc-LXXXXIIc line of FIG. 82 (b).

As shown in FIGS. 82 (b) and 82 (c), the connecting piece W9351b of the protective cover W9500 according to the fifteenth embodiment extends in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) in a cross-sectional view and is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is arranged at the end of the first part W9351b1 and the engaging part W530a and the rib part W511 (connecting part W512) side of the first part W9351b1 and extends along the extending direction of the rib part W511 (connecting part W512). The second part W9531b2, which is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a horizontally long shape in a cross-sectional view, is provided.

The first part W9351b1 is arranged substantially at the center in the extending direction of the second part W9351b2. The surfaces of the first part W9351b1 and the second part W9351b2 formed on the opposite sides of the sealing seal WSL are arranged on substantially the same surface, and are larger than the facing distance between the first part W9351b1 and the sealing seal WSL. The facing distance between the second part W9351b2 and the sealing seal WSL is reduced.

As a result, when cutting the first part W9351b1 with a cutting tool (not shown), the tip of the cutting tool can be easily accepted into the space formed by the recess W224b, and the sealing seal WSL is easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

Further, in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), the first portion W9351b1 is formed smaller than the second portion W9351b2. As a result, the first part W9531b1 can be cut more easily than the second part W9531b2.

In the cross-sectional view, the cross-sectional areas of the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9351b2 are formed to be substantially the same. As a result, when the protective cover W9500 is molded by the resin mold, the difference in cross-sectional area between the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9351b2 can be suppressed, and the moldability of the protective cover W9500 (connecting piece W9351b) can be ensured.

Next, the substrate box Wa100 according to the 16th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 83. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

83 (a) and 83 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box Wa100 in the 16th embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 83 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wa100 in the line LXXXIIIc-LXXXIIIc of FIG. 83 (a). Note that FIG. 83C shows a state in which the protective cover Wa500 is displaced toward the left side (arrow L direction side) from the state shown in FIG. 83A. Further, in the description of FIG. 83, FIG. 73 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 83A and 83B, the protective cover Wa500 of the substrate box Wa100 in the 16th embodiment has a cut portion Wa550 protruding from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502 of the protective cover Wa500. Be prepared. The cutting portion Wa550 is a portion for cutting the sealing seal WSL.

By projecting the cut portion Wa550 from the inner surface of the left wall portion W502, the strength of the protective cover Wa500 (left wall portion W502) can be improved. This makes it difficult for the protective cover Wa500 to be damaged.

The amount of protrusion of the cut portion Wa550 is formed to be smaller than the distance between the left wall portion W502 and the sealing seal WSL facing each other in the regulated state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cutting portion Wa550 from cutting the seal WSL in the regulated state.

The cut portion Wa550 is arranged in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) so as to face the cutout portions W226 and W325 formed in the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320. The dimension of the cut portion Wa550 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is formed to be slightly smaller than the distance between the pair of both end wall portions W223 and W321 facing each other, and is larger than the distance between both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction. Is also formed large.

Further, the cut portion Wa550 is arranged at a position biased from substantially the center of the left wall portion W502 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) toward the back wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side). As a result, for example, the protective cover Wa500 has the box cover W200 and the box base W300 in the opposite postures of the front wall portion W520 and the back wall portion W510 (the posture in which the back wall portion W510 faces the front side of the front wall portion W520). When attached to, it is possible to prevent the cut portion Wa550 from being disposed so as to face the notch portions W226 and W325. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the function of the cutting portion Wa550.

The cut portion Wa550 is formed to have a smaller dimension in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) from the inner side surface of the protective cover Wa500 toward the protruding tip side (arrow R direction side) of the cut portion Wa550. Further, the protruding tip side (arrow R direction side) of the cut portion Wa550 is formed in a saw blade shape in the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 83 (b), and is repeatedly bent in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Will be done. As a result, the cut portion Wa550 is displaced toward the space formed in the cutout portions W226 and W325, so that the seal seal WSL can be easily cut.

As shown in FIG. 83A, the back wall portion Wa510 and the front wall portion Wa520 of the protective cover Wa500 are in the left-right direction as compared with the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 of the protective cover W500 in the seventh embodiment. The dimension in (arrow LR direction) is formed to be small. As a result, in the regulated state, the right end of the back wall Wa510 (in the direction of arrow R), the right end of the front wall Wa520, the side wall W212 of the box cover W200, and the left of the box base W300. A gap is formed between the wall portion W302 and the wall portion W302 (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 73 (d)). Such a gap is formed in the saw blade shape formed in the cut portion Wa550, which is larger than the distance between the recess formed on the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL and the sealing seal WSL.

On the other hand, the right end (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion W530a comes into contact with the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200. As a result, the displacement of the protective cover Wa500 to the right side is regulated, and the regulated state is maintained. The right end (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion W530b is brought into contact with the left wall portion W302 of the box base W300 (see FIG. 74), so that the protective cover Wa500 is moved to the right side. Displacement may be regulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 83 (c), cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the cutting portion Wa550 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83 (c), when the engaging portions W530a and W530b are cut (see FIG. 75), the protective cover Wa500 is directed toward the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side, see FIG. 68). It can be displaced. By displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the sealing unit W400, the cut portion Wa550 is made acceptable in the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325, and the sealing portion Wa550 cuts the sealing seal WSL.

Here, the protective cover Wa500 is prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) by abutting the pair of both end wall portions W223 and W321 with the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520. can. Therefore, the cutting portion Wa550 can be maintained in a state of facing the notch portions W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut by the cutting portion Wa550.

In the present embodiment, the work of cutting the engaging portions W530a and W530b to remove the protective cover Wa500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 and the protective cover Wa500 to the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side, see FIG. 68). It is not necessary to separately perform the work of making the work oriented and displaceable, and the work can be efficiently performed as a series of work.

As described above, in the regulated state, the right end of the back wall Wa510 (the R direction side of the arrow), the right end of the front wall Wa520, the side wall W212 of the box cover W200, and the box base W300. The gap formed between the left wall portion W302 and the left wall portion W302 is larger than the distance between the recess formed on the opposite side of the sealing seal WSL and the sealing seal WSL in the saw blade shape formed on the cutting portion Wa550. Since it is formed to be large, the entire saw blade shape formed in the cut portion Wa550 can be accepted in the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325. As a result, the seal seal WSL is cut between both ends of the seal seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the seal seal WSL is separated into the flat portion W220 side and the flat portion W320 side.

Further, by displace the protective cover Wa500 toward the right side (arrow R direction side), the right end portion of the back wall portion Wa510 (arrow R direction side) and the right side of the front wall portion Wa520 The end portion and the side wall portion W212 of the box cover W200 and the left wall portion W302 of the box base W300 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 74). As a result, the displacement of the protective cover Wa500 toward the right side is regulated.

The displacement of the protective cover Wa500 toward the right side may be restricted by contacting the cut portion Wa550 with the cutout portions W226 and W325. In this case, the sealing seal WSL can be attached to the notches W226 and W325 by the cutting portion Wa550. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to peel off the seal WSL from the notches W226 and W325. As a result, when the seal seal WSL is peeled off from the notch portions W226 and W325, the seal seal WSL can be easily damaged, and the trace (damage) of the seal seal WSL can be easily recognized by the operator (clerk).

In the present embodiment, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut by displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side). Thereby, for example, even when the worker (clerk) does not have the cutting tool, the opening work of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily performed.

Since the cut portion Wa550 is arranged to face the notches W226 and W325 formed in the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), the cut portion Wa550 is disposed by the sealing seal WSL. Even when W226 and W325 are shielded, the cut portion Wa550 can be easily arranged in the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325.

Since the cut portion Wa550 protrudes from the inner side surface of the left wall portion W502, it is possible to prevent the cut portion Wa550 from being exposed from the protective cover Wa500 formed in a box shape. As a result, it is possible to prevent an operator (clerk) from coming into contact with the cut portion Wa550 and being injured in the cutting work of the seal seal WSL, the manufacturing work of the substrate box Wa100 and the protective cover Wa500, the transportation work, and the like.

Further, since the cut portion Wa550 protrudes from the inner side surface of the left wall portion W502, the cut portion Wa550 is formed smaller than the protective cover Wa500. In other words, the protective cover Wa500 is formed larger than the cut portion Wa550. Therefore, the worker (clerk) can cut the seal seal WSL using the cutting portion Wa550 by grasping the protective cover Wa500, and the cutting work can be easily performed.

Since the protective cover Wa500 (cut portion Wa550) is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin molding die, for example, the sealing seal WSL is cut as compared with a cutting tool formed sharply using a metal material. The sex is low. On the other hand, since the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325 is formed on the sticking surface side of the seal seal WSL, the seal seal WSL can be easily cut even when the cuttability of the cut portion Wa550 is low.

Next, the substrate box Wb100 according to the 17th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 84 (a) is a front view of the protective cover Wb500 of the substrate box Wb100 according to the 17th embodiment, and FIG. 84 (b) is a side view of the protective cover Wb500 in the direction of the arrow LXXXIVb of FIG. 84 (a). FIG. 84 (c) is a rear view of the protective cover Wb500 in the direction of arrow LXXXIVc of FIG. 84 (b). 85 (a) is a rear view of the substrate box Wb100, FIG. 85 (b) is a side view of the substrate box Wb100 in the direction of arrow LXXXVb of FIG. 85 (a), and FIG. 85 (c) is a side view of the substrate box Wb100. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wb100 in the line LXXXVc-LXXXVc of FIG. 85 (b).

Note that FIGS. 84 and 85 show a state in which the engaging portions Wb530a and Wb530b are cut from the protective cover Wb500. Further, in FIG. 84, the engaging portions Wb530a and Wb530b are illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and in FIG. 85B, the cutting portion Wb550 and the guide portion Wb560 are illustrated by broken lines. Further, the spaces formed in the protective cover Wb500 by cutting the engaging portions Wb530a and Wb530b from the protective cover Wb500 are defined as spaces WS1 and WS2, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 84, the protective cover Wb500 of the substrate box Wb100 according to the 17th embodiment has an engaging portion Wb530a and a cutting portion Wb550 connected to the back wall portion W510, and an engaging portion connected to the front wall portion W520. It is provided with Wb530b and a guide portion Wb560.

The engaging portion Wb530a includes a relief portion Wb534a. The relief portion Wb534a is a portion for suppressing the contact between the engaging portion Wb530a and the cutting portion Wb550, and is located on the lower side (arrow D direction) from the upper surface of the engaging portion Wb530a at a position overlapping the cutting portion Wb550 in the rear view. It is recessed toward the side).

The bottom surface (surface formed on the lower side) of the relief portion Wb534a is formed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the blade portion Wb552 of the cutting portion Wb550 described later, and the relief portion Wb534a is formed in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). The side surfaces of the portion Wb534a are formed on both ends in the left-right direction with respect to the support portion Wb551 and the blade portion Wb552 of the cutting portion Wb550 described later. As a result, the contact between the engaging portion Wb530a and the cutting portion Wb550 is suppressed.

In the state before the engaging portion Wb530a is cut, the relief portion Wb534a is formed so as to surround the cutting portion Wb550. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker (clerk) from coming into contact with the cut portion Wa550 and being injured.

The cutting portion Wb550 is a portion for cutting the sealing seal WSL, and is projected from the rib portion W511 arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) toward the engaging portion Wb530a side (arrow D direction side). The support portion Wb551 and the blade portion Wb552 protruding from the protruding tip portion of the support portion Wb551 toward the tip end side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion Wb530a are provided.

The support portion Wb551 is a portion for supporting the blade portion Wb552 by providing a predetermined distance between the rib portion W511 and the blade portion Wb552. The blade portion Wb552 includes a base portion supported by the support portion Wb551 and formed in a columnar shape, and a tip portion formed in a conical shape at a protruding tip portion of the base portion. Since the tip portion is formed in a conical shape, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

The cut portion Wb550 is projected from the rib portion W511 arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side) toward the engaging portion Wb530a side (arrow U direction side), and the relief portion Wb534a is the engaging portion Wb530a. It may be recessed from the lower surface of the above surface toward the upper side (the side in the direction of arrow U).

The engaging portion Wb530b is connected to a pair of rib portions W521 and a connecting portion W522 arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side), and includes a relief portion Wb534b. The relief portion Wb534b is a portion for suppressing the contact between the engaging portion Wb530b and the guide portion Wb560, and is upward from the lower surface of the engaging portion Wb530b at a position overlapping the guide portion Wb560 in the front view (arrow U direction). It is recessed toward the side).

The bottom surface (surface formed on the upper side) of the relief portion Wb534b is formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the protruding tip portion of the guide portion Wb560, and the relief portion Wb534b in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). The side surfaces of the guide portion Wb560 are formed on both ends in the left-right direction with respect to the side surfaces in the left-right direction of the guide portion Wb560. As a result, the contact between the engaging portion Wb530b and the guide portion Wb560 is suppressed.

Further, in a state where the engaging portion Wb530b is separated from the protective cover Wb500 by forming the relief portion Wb534b, the engaging hole W533 and the protrusion W312c are disengaged from each other (see FIG. 73). The contact between the engaging portion Wb530b and the guide portion Wb560 when the portion Wb530b is displaced can be easily suppressed, and the engaging portion Wb530b can be easily removed from the box base Wb300.

The guide portion Wb560 is a portion for maintaining the posture of the protective cover Wb500 when the seal seal WSL is cut by the cutting portion Wb550, and the pair of rib portions W521 arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side). It protrudes upward from the rib portion W521 arranged on the lower side (the side in the direction of arrow D). The guide portion Wb560 is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the cutting portion Wb550 from the tip end portion of the blade portion Wb552 in the left-right direction (arrow L-R direction).

The guide portion Wb560 is directed downward from the rib portion W521 arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the pair of rib portions W521 arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side). The engaging portion Wb530b is projected, and the relief portion Wb534b is recessed downward from the upper surface of the pair of rib portions W521 arranged on the lower side and the engaging portion Wb530b connected to the connecting portion W522. Is also good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85, cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wb500 (cutting portion Wb550) will be described. In the present embodiment, the protruding length of the protruding portion Wb324 of the box base Wb300 is formed to be smaller than the protruding length of the protruding portion W324 in the seventh embodiment, and the surface of the flat portion W220 and the flat portion W320 are opposed to each other. Is formed so that the distance between the opposite surfaces is small. Further, a pair of both end wall portions W223 and W321 (see FIG. 72) are not formed on the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320.

In FIG. 85, the protective cover Wb500 in which the engaging portions Wb530a and Wb530b are cut to form the spaces WS1 and WS2 is rotated counterclockwise in the direction of the arrow LXXXVb, and the flat portions W220 and the flat portions are formed in the spaces WS1 and WS2. The state in which W320 is arranged and the blade portion Wb552 is arranged in the space formed by the notches W226 and W325 is shown.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the protective cover Wb500 includes the cutting portion Wb550, the opening operation of the box cover Wb200 and the box base Wb300 is performed even when the worker (clerk) does not have the cutting tool. Can be easily performed.

The cut portion Wb550 is made visible by being arranged in the space WS1. As a result, the cut portion Wb550 can be easily arranged in the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325, and the seal seal WSL can be easily cut.

Further, by disposing the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320 in the space WS2, the guide portion Wb560 and the protruding portion W324 can be brought into contact with each other. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the protective cover Wb500 with the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) as the rotation axis, and it is possible to easily arrange the cut portion Wb550 in the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325.

Since the cut portion Wb550 protrudes from the rib portion W511 of the protective cover Wb500, the cut portion Wb550 is formed smaller than the protective cover Wb500. In other words, the protective cover Wb500 is formed larger than the cut portion Wb550. Therefore, the worker (clerk) can cut the seal seal WSL using the cutting portion Wb550 by grasping the protective cover Wb500, and the cutting work can be easily performed.

Next, the substrate box Wc100 according to the 18th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 86 (a) is a side view of the protective cover Wc500 of the substrate box Wc100 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 86 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wc100 in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 73 (b). Is. Note that FIG. 86B shows a state in which the sealing seal WSL is cut using the protective cover Wc500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wb300.

As shown in FIG. 86 (a), the protective cover Wc500 of the substrate box Wc100 according to the eighteenth embodiment includes a cutting portion Wc550. The cut portion Wc550 is a portion for cutting the seal seal WSL, and is a front wall portion W520 from the back wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side) at the lower end side (arrow D direction side) of the standing portion Wc540. It is formed so as to project toward the side (arrow F direction side).

The vertical length of the protective cover Wc500 with respect to the lower wall portion W501 on the side opposite to the lower wall portion W501 of the vertical portion Wc540 (arrow D direction side) is the length of the box cover W200 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It is formed to be substantially the same as the distance between the back surface of the flat surface portion W220 and the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (b), cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wc500 (cutting portion Wc550) will be described. In FIG. 86B, the postures of the protective cover Wc500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 are changed. Specifically, the posture is such that the cutting portion Wc550 (standing portion Wc540) is oriented from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side).

Since the protective cover Wc500 includes the cutting portion Wc550, the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be easily opened even when the worker (clerk) does not have the cutting tool.

As described above, the standing length of the standing portion Wc540 with respect to the lower wall portion W501 on the side opposite to the lower wall portion W501 (arrow D direction side) is the box cover W200 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Since it is formed to be substantially the same as the distance between the back surface of the flat surface portion W220 and the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325, the lower wall portion W501 is brought into contact with the flat surface portion W220 via the sealing seal WSL. Thereby, the cut portion Wc550 can be made to face the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325. In other words, the position of the cut portion Wc550 and the position of the space formed by the cut portions W226 and W325 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction.

As a result, even when the cutout portions W226 and W325 are shielded by the sealing seal WSL, the cut portion Wc550 can be easily arranged in the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325. By sliding and displacementing the protective cover Wc500 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) while maintaining the contact between the lower wall portion W501 and the flat surface portion W220, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

Since the cut portion Wc550 protrudes from the upright portion Wc540 of the protective cover Wc500, the cut portion Wc550 is formed smaller than the protective cover Wc500. In other words, the protective cover Wc500 is formed larger than the cut portion Wc550. Therefore, the worker (clerk) can cut the seal seal WSL using the cutting portion Wc550 by grasping the protective cover Wc500, and the cutting work can be easily performed.

Next, the substrate box Wd100 according to the 19th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the protective cover Wd500 of the substrate box Wd100 according to the 19th embodiment, and FIG. 87 (b) is a side view of the protective cover Wd500 in the direction of arrow LXXXVIIb of FIG. 87 (a). FIG. 87 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wd100 in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 73 (b). Note that FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which the cut engaging portion Wd530a is attached to the upright portion Wd540, and FIG. 87 (c) shows a protective cover removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wb300. The state of cutting the sealing seal WSL using Wd500 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b), the protective cover Wd500 of the substrate box Wd100 according to the 19th embodiment includes a guide portion Wd560. The upright portion Wd540 is arranged at a position substantially at the center of the lower wall portion W501 in the plate thickness direction (arrow LR direction) of the left wall portion W502.

The dimensions of the upright portion Wd540 in the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502 (arrow LR direction) are the engagement holes W533 of the engagement portion Wd530a in the plate thickness direction of the lower wall portion W501 (arrow UD direction). It is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than the dimensions. Further, the dimensions of the standing portion Wd540 in the opposite direction (arrow FB direction) between the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 are the dimensions of the inner surfaces of the engaging holes W533 in the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502. It is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly smaller than. As a result, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the upright portion Wd540 can be fitted (engaged) with the engaging hole W533, and the engaging portion Wd530a cut from the protective cover Wd500 is attached (held) to the protective cover Wd500. can do.

The dimension of the upright portion Wd540 in the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502 (arrow LR direction) is the engagement hole W533 of the engagement portion Wd530a in the plate thickness direction of the lower wall portion W501 (arrow UD direction). The size of the upright portion Wd540 in the opposite direction (arrow FB direction) between the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 is the engagement hole W533 in the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502. It may be formed to be slightly larger than the dimensions of the inner surfaces of the above. By engaging the standing portion Wd540 with the engaging hole W533 while elastically deforming the standing portion Wd540, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion Wd530a from being disengaged from the protective cover Wd500. Further, it is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the engaging portion Wd530a with respect to the protective cover Wd500 in the state where the engaging portion Wd530a is attached to the protective cover Wd500. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut by using the engaging portion Wd530a.

The protective cover W500 is the box cover Wb200 and the box base Wb300 in the posture in which the front wall portion W520 and the back wall portion W510 are opposite to the standing portion Wd540 (the posture in which the back wall portion W510 faces the front side of the front wall portion W520). It is possible to combine the function of suppressing the attachment to the engaging portion Wd530a and the function of attaching (holding) the engaging portion Wd530a, as compared with the case where the parts having these functions are respectively arranged on the protective cover Wd500. The manufacturing cost of the protective cover Wd500 can be reduced. Further, the mounting portion (holding portion) of the engaging portion Wd530a can be simplified. Further, the portion disposed on the outer surface of the protective cover Wd500 can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in disposing the protective cover Wd500 can be improved.

The connecting portion W512 is not formed on the back wall portion W510 (see FIG. 72), and the connecting piece W531a of the engaging portion Wd530a is connected to the left wall portion W502. Further, since the connecting portion W512 is not formed, the dimension of the engaging portion Wd530a in the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502 is larger than that of the engaging portion W530a in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 73). It is formed. In the present embodiment, the distance between the inner surface of the engaging hole W533 on the connecting piece W531a side (arrow L direction side) and the connecting piece W531a is the distance between the standing portion Wd540 on the front wall portion W520 side (arrow F direction side). It is formed larger than the distance between the front surface and the front surface of the front wall portion W520 formed on the side opposite to the back wall portion W510.

Thereby, in the state where the engaging portion Wd530a is attached to the protective cover Wd500, the cut surface of the connecting piece W531a can be arranged on the side opposite to the back wall portion W510 as opposed to the front wall portion W520.

When the seal seal WSL is cut using the protective cover Wd500 (engagement portion Wd530a), the guide portion Wd560 engages with the space formed by the notch portion W226 of the flat surface portion W220 and the notch portion W325 of the flat surface portion W320. This is a portion for facilitating the arrangement of the connecting piece W531a of the portion Wd530a. The guide portion Wd560 is formed in a plate shape, and is arranged in a posture in which the plate thickness direction of the guide portion Wd560 is along the plate thickness direction of the left wall portion W502 (arrow LR direction).

The distance between the guide surface Wd561 formed on the lower wall portion W501 side (arrow D direction side) of the guide portion Wd560 and the outer surface of the lower wall portion W501 is the box cover W200 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It is formed to be substantially the same as the distance between the back surface of the flat surface portion W220 and the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325 (see FIG. 87 (c)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 87 (c), cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wd500 (engaging portion Wd530a) will be described. In FIG. 87 (c), the postures of the protective cover Wd500 removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wb300 are changed. Specifically, the front wall portion W520 is in a posture facing the protruding portion W324 of the box base W300 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction).

As described above, the distance between the guide surface Wd561 formed on the lower wall portion W501 side (arrow D direction side) of the guide portion Wd560 and the outer surface of the lower wall portion W501 is in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). ) Is formed to be substantially the same as the distance between the back surface of the flat surface portion W220 of the box cover W200 and the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325. Can be brought into contact with the front surface of the flat surface portion W320 so that the connecting piece W531a of the cut engaging portion Wd530a faces the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325. In other words, the position of the connecting piece W531a and the position of the space formed by the notches W226 and W325 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction.

As a result, even when the notch portions W226 and W325 are shielded by the sealing seal WSL, the connecting piece W531a can be easily arranged in the space formed by the notch portions W226 and W325. By sliding and displacementing the protective cover Wd500 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) while maintaining the contact between the guide surface Wd561 and the front surface of the flat surface portion W320, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

Since the protective cover Wd500 is formed larger than the engaging portion Wd530a, the operator (clerk) can cut the sealing seal WSL using the engaging portion Wd530a (connecting piece W531a) by grasping the protective cover Wd500. , Cutting work can be done easily.

Next, the substrate box We100 according to the twentieth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 88 (a) is a partial rear view of the protective cover We500 of the substrate box We100 according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 88 (b) is a partial cross section of the substrate box We100 in the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 73 (b). It is a figure. Note that FIG. 88B shows a state in which the sealing seal WSL is cut using the cut engaging portion Wd530a.

As shown in FIG. 88A, in the protective cover We500 of the substrate box We100 in the 20th embodiment, the connecting piece W531b is not formed (see FIG. 72), and the engaging portion We530a and the connecting portion W512 are connected to each other. The connecting piece We531a of the above is provided.

The distance between the engaging portion We530a and the connecting portion W512, that is, the extending length of the pair of connecting pieces We531a is formed shorter than the recessed depth of the space formed by the cutout portions We226 and We325.

The cutouts We226 and We325 are formed by being recessed toward the opposite sides of the flat surface portion e220 and the protruding portion We324, respectively, and the space formed by the cutout portions We226 and We325 is formed in a cross-sectional view. It is formed in a substantially U-shape. The distance between the notches We226 and We325 facing each other is formed to be substantially equal to or slightly larger than the width dimension of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). Thereby, the pair of connecting pieces We531a cut in the space formed by the notch portions We226 and We325 can be accepted.

Further, the notch dimensions of the notch portions We226 and We325 toward the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side) are slightly larger than the extension dimensions of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). It is formed large.

The distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a facing each other is approximately the distance between the front surface of the flat surface portion We320 of the box base We300 and the space formed by the notch portions We226 and We325 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). They are formed identically (see FIG. 88 (b)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 88 (b), cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the engaging portion We530a will be described. In FIG. 88B, the posture of the engaging portion We530a separated from the protective cover We500 is changed. Specifically, the pair of connecting pieces We531a of the engaging portion We530a are in a posture facing the protruding portion We324 of the box base We300 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction).

As described above, the distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a facing each other is the distance between the front surface of the flat surface portion We320 of the box base We300 and the space formed by the cutout portions We226 and We325 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Since it is formed to be substantially the same as the distance between the two, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a is cut by bringing one facing surface of the pair of connecting pieces We531a into contact with the front surface of the flat surface portion We320 via the sealing seal WSL. It can face the space formed by the notches We226 and We325. In other words, the other position of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the position of the space formed by the cutouts We226 and We325 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction.

As a result, even when the notch portions We226 and We325 are shielded by the sealing seal WSL, the facing surfaces of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in one of the pair of connecting pieces We531a are brought into contact with the front surface of the flat surface portion We320. Therefore, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a can be accepted (arranged) in the space formed by the notch portions We226 and We325. The sealing seal WSL is formed by sliding displacement of the engaging portion We530a in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) while maintaining the contact between one facing surface of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the front surface of the flat surface portion We320. It can be easily cut.

Further, the notch dimensions of the notch portions We226 and We325 toward the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side) are slightly larger than the extension dimensions of the pair of connecting pieces We531a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). By being formed large, it is possible to prevent the end portion of the cut pair of connecting pieces We531a on the cutting side from coming into contact with the bottom surface of the notch portions We226 and We325 on the side wall portion W212 side, and the notch portions We226 and We325 can be formed large. Damage can be suppressed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the sealing seal WSL can be cut by using the engaging portion We530a formed smaller than the protective cover We500, a pair of both end walls of the engaging portion We530a, the flat portion W220, and the flat portion W320. Interference with the parts W223 and W321 (see FIG. 72) can be suppressed, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

Further, in the state where the pair of connecting pieces We531a are connected to the protective cover We500 (the state before the pair of connecting pieces We531a are cut), the cut portion is not formed on the pair of connecting pieces We531a. It is possible to prevent a person (clerk) from coming into contact with the cut portion of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and being injured.

Next, the protective cover Wf500 according to the 21st embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (c) and 88 (d). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 88 (c) is a partial rear view of the protective cover Wf500 according to the 21st embodiment, and FIG. 88 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover Wf500 in the line LXXXViid-LXXXXVIIId of FIG. 88 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 88 (c) and 88 (d), the engaging portion Wf530a of the protective cover Wf500 in the 21st embodiment includes a cutting portion Wf550.

In the engaging portion Wf530a, as compared with the engaging portion W530a in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 73), the connecting piece W531b is displaced toward the opposite side (arrow R direction side) of the connecting portion W512 by a predetermined distance. The cut portion Wf550 is formed at the end of the engaging portion Wf530a on the connecting portion W512 side (arrow L direction side). The cut portions Wf550 are formed in pairs facing the pair of rib portions W511.

The cut portion Wf550 is formed to have a smaller dimension in the plate thickness direction from the center side to both end sides of the engaging portion Wf530a in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). That is, the tip of the cut portion Wf550 is formed sharply. This makes it easier to cut the seal WSL.

On the other hand, since the cutting portion Wf550 is arranged on the connecting portion W512 side (the side in the direction of arrow L, the side opposite to the engaging hole W533) with respect to the pair of connecting pieces W531b, the engaging hole W533 and the box cover W200 It does not affect the engagement with the protrusion W221 (see FIG. 74). In other words, the formation of the cut portion Wf550 can prevent the elasticity of the engaging portion Wf530a from being reduced.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the engaging force for attaching the protective cover Wf500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 (see FIG. 73) from being lowered by the formation of the cut portion Wf550.

Further, the cutting portion Wf550 is arranged so as to face the rib portion W511 and the connecting portion W512. Thereby, in the state before the engaging portion Wf530a is separated from the protective cover Wf500, it is possible to prevent the worker (clerk) from coming into contact with the cutting portion Wf550 and being injured.

Next, the protective cover Wg500 according to the 22nd embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89 (a) is a partial rear view of the protective cover Wg500 according to the 22nd embodiment, and FIG. 89 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the protective cover Wg500 in the line LXXXXXb-LXXXXIXb of FIG. 89 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 89A and 89B, in the protective cover Wg500 according to the 22nd embodiment, the connecting piece W531b is not formed (see FIG. 72), and the engaging portion Wg530a and the connecting portion W512 are connected. A pair of connecting pieces Wg531a are provided.

The pair of connecting pieces Wg531a are formed to have a smaller cross-sectional area in the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. .. In other words, the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a is formed in a shape in which a pair of quadrangular frustums are connected from the connecting portion W512 side and the engaging portion Wg530a side toward the facing portion of the connecting portion W512 and the engaging portion Wg530a. ..

As a result, when the engaging portion Wg530a is separated from the protective cover Wg500, the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a can be easily cut. Further, the cut surface of the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a is formed smaller than the case where the cross-sectional area shown in FIG. 89B is formed to be constant between the connecting portion W512 and the engaging portion Wg530a facing each other. A cut portion of the pair of connecting pieces Wg531a is sharply formed. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily cut.

Next, the substrate box Wh100 according to the 23rd embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (c). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 89C is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wh100 according to the 23rd embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 89 (c), the protective cover Wh500 of the substrate box Wh100 in the 23rd embodiment includes a regulation unit Wh570.

The regulating portion Wh570 is a portion for restricting the illegally elastically deforming the engaging portion W530a. The restricting portion Wh570 is arranged on the tip side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion W530a with respect to the pair of connecting pieces W531b, and is opposite to the front wall portion W520 (see FIG. 72) with respect to the engaging portion W530a (see FIG. 72). (Arrow B direction side).

As a result, even if the engaging portion W530a is illicitly elastically deformed in order to disengage the protrusion W221 of the flat surface portion W220 from the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion W530a, it is restricted to the engaging portion W530a. The elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530a can be regulated by the contact with the portion Wh570. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the protective cover Wh500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300 (see FIG. 72).

Next, the substrate box Wi100 according to the 24th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 90. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

90 (a) is a side view of the protective cover Wi500 of the substrate box Wi100 according to the 24th embodiment, FIG. 90 (b) is a side view of the substrate box Wi100, and FIG. 90 (c) is FIG. 90. It is sectional drawing of the substrate box Wi100 in the XCc-XCc line of (b). Note that FIG. 90 shows a state in which the engaging portion W530a is separated from the protective cover Wi500.

As shown in FIG. 90A, in the protective cover Wi500 of the substrate box Wi100 in the 24th embodiment, a back wall portion W510 is arranged instead of the front wall portion W520 of the protective cover W500 in the 7th embodiment. .. More specifically, a pair of back wall portions W510 are arranged at both ends of the left wall portion W502 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The pair of back wall portions W510 are arranged in a symmetrical posture in the side view shown in FIG. 90 (a). Further, the pair of back wall portions W510 includes an engaging portion We530 and a pair of connecting pieces We531a according to the twentieth embodiment (see FIGS. 88 (c) and 88 (d)).

Next, cutting of the sealing seal WSL by the protective cover Wi500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 (b) and 90 (c). In addition, in FIG. 90 (b) and FIG. 90 (c), the posture of the protective cover Wi500 is changed. Specifically, the pair of connecting pieces We531a of the protective cover Wi500 are in a posture facing the protruding portion We324 of the box base We300 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). In this embodiment, a state in which the pair of connecting pieces We531a is cut on the engaging portion We530a side rather than the connecting portion W512 side is shown.

The distance between the pair of connecting pieces We531a facing each other is approximately the distance between the front surface of the flat surface portion We320 of the box base We300 and the space formed by the notch portions We226 and We325 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Since they are formed to be the same, one of the facing surfaces of the pair of connecting pieces We531a is brought into contact with the front surface of the flat surface portion We320 via the sealing seal WSL, so that the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a is notched and We325. Can be opposed to the space formed by. In other words, the other position of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the position of the space formed by the cutouts We226 and We325 are substantially the same in the front-rear direction.

As a result, even when the notch portions We226 and We325 are shielded by the sealing seal WSL, the other of the pair of connecting pieces We531a can be easily arranged in the space formed by the notch portions We226 and We325. The sealing seal WSL is formed by sliding displacement of the engaging portion We530a in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) while maintaining the contact between one facing surface of the pair of connecting pieces We531a and the front surface of the flat surface portion We320. It can be easily cut.

In the present embodiment, the sealing seal WSL is cut by using the pair of connecting pieces We531a formed on the protective cover Wi500, and the pair of connecting pieces We531a formed on the engaging portion We530a in the 20th embodiment is used. Compared with the case of cutting the seal seal WSL, the worker (clerk) can easily grasp the protective cover Wi500 and can easily perform the cutting work.

Next, the substrate box Wj100 according to the 25th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 93. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

91 (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wj100 in the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 91 (b) is a partial side view of the substrate box Wj100 in the direction of arrow XCIb of FIG. 91 (a). FIG. 91 (c) is a rear view of the protective cover Wj500. 92 (a) and 92 (c) are rear views of the substrate box Wj100 in the XCIIa section of FIG. 91 (a), and FIG. 92 (b) is the substrate in the XCIIb-XCIIb line of FIG. 92 (a). FIG. 92 (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the box Wj100, which is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wj100 in the XCIId-XCIId line of FIG. 92 (c). 93 (a) is a rear view of the substrate box Wj100 in the XCIIa portion of FIG. 91 (a), and FIG. 93 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wj100 in the line XCIIIb-XCIIIb of FIG. 93 (a). Is.

Note that FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b) show a state in which the protective cover Wj500 is removed from the box cover Wj200 and the box base W300. Further, in FIGS. 92 (a), 92 (c), and 93 (a), the illustration of the back wall portion Wj214a is partially omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b), the box cover Wj200 of the substrate box Wj100 in the 25th embodiment replaces the protrusion W221 in the 7th embodiment (see FIG. 72), and the elastic deformation regulating means. It is equipped with Wj230.

The back wall portion Wj214a of the cover portion Wj214 is formed so as to project toward the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) from the back wall portion W214a in the seventh embodiment, and is positioned so as to overlap the elastic deformation regulating means Wj230 in rear view. Is arranged in. In front of the back wall portion Wj214a, there is a regulation wall portion Wj214b projecting toward the second regulation portion Wj250 side (arrow F direction side) at a position facing the second regulation portion Wj250 in the second regulation state described later. It is formed. The regulation wall portion Wj214b is a portion for restricting elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500.

A notch Wj227 is formed in the flat surface portion Wj220 at a position corresponding to the elastic deformation regulating means Wj230, and a second regulating portion Wj250 of the elastic deformation regulating means Wj230 described later is arranged in the space formed by the notch Wj227. NS.

The dimensions of the flat surface portion Wj220 and the flat surface portion Wj320 in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows UD) are formed to be smaller than the dimensions of the flat surface portion W220 and the flat surface portion W320 (see FIG. 72) in the seventh embodiment, and the protective cover Wj500. In a state where the flat surface portion Wj220 and the flat surface portion Wj320 are arranged inside, the protective cover Wj500 can be displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300.

The elastic deformation regulating means Wj230 is for suppressing the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500 from being illegally elastically deformed in the regulated state, and includes a first regulating portion Wj240 and a second regulating portion Wj250. In the description of the elastic deformation regulating means Wj230, FIGS. 92 and 93 will be referred to as appropriate.

The first regulating portion Wj240 is a portion for regulating the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 toward the left side (arrow L direction side) in the regulated state, and is a portion from the back surface portion Wj220 to the back wall portion Wj214a side (the flat surface portion Wj220). It is projected toward the arrow B direction side). The first regulating portion Wj240 is formed with an inclined portion Wj241 that inclines toward the back wall portion Wj214a side from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side).

The second regulation unit Wj250 is a part for restricting the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 toward the lower side (arrow D direction side) in the regulated state, and the first regulation in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). It is arranged so as to face the portion Wj240. The second regulating portion Wj250 is a plate-shaped support portion Wj251 protruding from the side wall of the flat portion Wj220 formed by the notch Wj227 toward the first regulating portion Wj240 side (arrow D direction side), and the support portion Wj251. It is provided with an engaging portion Wj252 protruding from the protruding tip portion of the above toward the regulation wall portion Wj214b side (arrow B direction side).

The support portion Wj251 is arranged in a posture in which the plate thickness direction of the support portion Wj251 is along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the plate thickness of the support portion Wj251 is smaller than the plate thickness of the flat surface portion Wj220. It is formed. As a result, when an external force in the front-rear direction is applied to the second regulating portion Wj250, the support portion Wj251 can be elastically deformed with respect to the flat surface portion Wj220.

The engaging portion Wj252 is directed toward the regulation wall portion Wj214b side (arrow B direction side) as it goes from the first regulation portion Wj240 side (arrow D direction side) to the side opposite to the first regulation portion Wj240 (arrow U direction side). Is formed at an angle. The upper surface of the engaging portion Wj252 formed on the side opposite to the first regulating portion Wj240 (the side in the arrow U direction) is formed orthogonal to the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction).

As shown in FIG. 91 (c), the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500 is formed to have a smaller dimension in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) than the engaging portion W530a in the seventh embodiment. As a result, even when the protective cover Wj500 is displaced in the vertical direction from the state where the flat surface portion Wj220 and the flat surface portion Wj320 are arranged inside the protective cover Wj500, the engaging portion Wj530a and the cover portion Wj214 are in contact with each other. Contact can be suppressed.

Next, attachment of the protective cover Wj500 to the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93. First, in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the engaging portion Wj530a of the protective cover Wj500 is opposed to a position where the regulation wall portion Wj214b of the cover portion Wj214 is not formed, and the protective cover Wj500 is placed on the box cover Wj200 and the box base. It is displaced toward the Wj300 side (arrow R direction side).

When the tip of the engaging portion Wj530a and the inclined portion Wj241 of the first regulating portion Wj240 come into contact with each other, the engaging portion Wj530a is elastically deformed toward the protruding tip side (arrow B direction side) of the first regulating portion Wj240. Will be done.

As shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b), when the back wall portion Wj510 and the side wall portion W212 come into contact with each other, they are directed to the right side (arrow R direction side) with respect to the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300. The displacement of the protective cover Wj500 is regulated (hereinafter referred to as "first regulated state").

In the first regulated state, the first regulated portion Wj240 is arranged inside the engaging hole W533 of the protective cover Wj500, and the elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wj530a is released. Further, in the first regulation state, the inner wall of the engagement hole W533 and the surface formed on the right side (arrow R direction side) of the first regulation portion Wj240 come into contact with each other, so that the left side of the protective cover Wj500 Displacement toward (arrow L direction side) is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 92 (c) and 92 (d), the protective cover Wj500 is displaced upward (arrow U direction side) from the first regulated state, so that the upper end portion of the engaging portion Wj530a is formed. And the engaging portion Wj252 of the second regulating portion Wj250 come into contact with each other, and the second regulating portion Wj250 is elastically deformed toward the opposite side (arrow F direction side) of the back wall portion Wj214a of the cover portion Wj214.

Here, since the plate thickness of the support portion Wj251 is formed to be smaller than the plate thickness of the flat surface portion Wj220, the support portion Wj251 is elastically deformed by the upper end portion of the engaging portion Wj530a, and the upper side of the protective cover Wj500 (arrow U direction). Displacement towards (side) is allowed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (b), the inner wall of the engaging hole W533 and the surface formed on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the first regulating portion Wj240 come into contact with each other. , The displacement of the protective cover Wj500 toward the upper side (arrow U direction side) is regulated (hereinafter referred to as "second regulated state").

In the second regulated state, the inner wall of the engaging hole W533 and the surface formed on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the engaging portion Wj252 come into contact with each other, so that the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the protective cover Wj500 comes into contact with each other. ) Is regulated. As a result, the displacement of the protective cover Wj500 from the second regulated state to the first regulated state is regulated.

Further, in the second regulation state, at least a part of the engaging portion Wj530a is arranged at a position overlapping the regulation wall portion Wj214b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Therefore, the elastic deformation toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the engaging portion Wj530a is regulated by abutting on the regulating wall portion Wj214b. In other words, in order to illegally remove the protective cover Wj500 from the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300, the first regulating portion Wj240 and the second regulating portion Wj250 and the engaging portion Wj530a (engagement hole W533) are disengaged. This is regulated by the regulation wall portion Wj214b.

As described above, since the back wall portion Wj214a is arranged at a position overlapping the elastic deformation regulating means Wj230 in the rear view, the second regulating portion Wj250 can be shielded. As a result, the second regulating portion Wj250 can be elastically deformed illegally, and the engagement between the first regulating portion Wj240 and the second regulating portion Wj250 and the engaging portion Wj530a (engagement hole W533) can be made difficult to be disengaged.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover Wj500 from being illegally removed from the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300.

Next, the substrate box Wk100 according to the 26th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

94 (a) is a partial front view of the substrate box Wk100 according to the 26th embodiment, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wk100 in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a). FIG. 94 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wk100 in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of FIG. 94 (a). 95 (a) and 95 (c) are partial cross-sectional views of the substrate box Wk100 in the XCIVb-XCIVb line of FIG. 94 (a), and FIGS. 95 (b) and 95 (d) are shown in FIG. 94 (d). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wk100 in the XCIVc-XCIVc line of a).

Note that FIG. 94 shows a state in which the protective cover W500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300. Further, in the present embodiment, in the protective cover W500, the engaging portion W530b arranged on the upper side (arrow U direction side) is arranged on the engaging portion W530b1 and the lower side (arrow D direction side). A part W530b will be described with a different reference numeral from the engaging part W530b2 (see FIG. 72).

As shown in FIG. 94, the box base Wk300 of the substrate box Wk100 in the 26th embodiment replaces the protrusions W312c arranged on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the pair of protrusions W312c in the seventh embodiment. (See FIG. 73), the protrusion Wk312c is provided. Further, the cover portion Wk312 of the box base Wk300 includes a locking portion Wk312f.

The protrusion Wk312c includes an inclined portion Wk312d that inclines toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) as it goes from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow L direction side). The protrusion Wk312c is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the protrusion W312c in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Specifically, the boundary between the inclined portion Wk312d and the front wall portion W312a is formed on the left side of the boundary between the inclined portion W312d and the front wall portion W312a of the protrusion W312c, and the protrusion Wk312c formed on the right side. The side surface is formed on the left side of the side surface of the protrusion W312c formed on the right side. Further, the dimension of the protrusion Wk312 in the left-right direction is formed to be approximately ½ of the dimension of the protrusion W312 in the left-right direction.

As a result, when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, the engagement portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c can be brought into contact with each other faster than the engagement portion W530b1 with the protrusion W312c (see FIG. 95). .. Further, the engagement between the engaging portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c is faster than the engagement between the engaging portion W530b1 and the protrusion W312c (the protrusion W312c is arranged inside the engagement hole W533 of the engaging portion W530b1). You can. Further, the protective cover W500 can be displaced in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) in a state where the engaging portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged.

The locking portion Wk312f is a portion for regulating the displacement of the engaging portion W530b toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and is projected from the left wall portion W302 toward the left side (arrow L direction side). NS. The locking portion Wk312f includes an inclined portion Wk312g that inclines toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow L direction side).

The distance between the locking portion Wk312f and the protrusion Wk312c in the left-right direction is set to be larger than the distance between the engaging portion W530b and the inner surface of the engaging hole W533. Further, the inclined portion Wk312g is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion Wk312 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). As a result, the protective cover W500 is displaced toward the right side (arrow R direction side) from the state where the engaging portion W530b is engaged with the protrusion Wk312c, so that the tip portion of the engaging portion W530b becomes the inclined portion Wk312g. Can be brought into contact.

Next, attachment of the protective cover W500 to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300 will be described with reference to FIG. 95. Note that FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) show a state in which the protective cover W500 is being attached to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, and the engaging portion W530b1 is elastically deformed. c) and FIG. 95 (d) show the substrate box Wk100 in the regulated state.

In the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), from the state where the positions of the engaging holes W533 of the engaging portions W530a, W530b1, W530b2 are aligned with the positions of the protrusions W221 of the box cover W200 and the protrusions W312c and Wk312c of the box base Wk300 ( (See FIGS. 72 and 73), by displacing the protective cover W500 toward the right side (arrow R direction side), the tip end portion of the engaging portion W530b2 comes into contact with the inclined portion Wk312d of the protrusion Wk312c. The engaging portion W530b2 is elastically deformed toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), so that the protective cover W500 is allowed to be displaced toward the right side.

Next, by disposing the protrusion Wk312c inside the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion W530b2, the elastic deformation toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the engaging portion W530b2 is released, and FIG. As shown in b), the engaging portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged with each other.

As described above, since the protrusion Wk312c is arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the protrusion W312c in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), the engaging portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged with each other. In this state, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), the tip end portion of the engaging portion W530b1 abuts on the inclined portion W312d of the protrusion W312c, and the engaging portion W530b1 is directed toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). It is said to be in an elastically deformed state.

Further, since the dimension of the protrusion Wk312 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is formed to be approximately ½ of the dimension of the protrusion W312 in the left-right direction, the engaging portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged with each other. The protective cover W500 is allowed to be displaced toward the right side (arrow R direction side).

Next, the protective cover W500 is displaced toward the right side (arrow R direction side) from the state in which the engaging portion W530b2 and the protrusion Wk312c are engaged, so that the protective cover W500 is engaged as shown in FIG. 95 (c). The portion W530b1 and the protrusion W312c are engaged with each other, the elastic deformation toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the engaging portion W530b1 is released, and the substrate box Wk100 is in a regulated state.

As described above, since the inclined portion Wk312g is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion Wk312 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), the protective cover W500 is displaced toward the right side (arrow R direction side). As a result, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), the tip end portion of the engaging portion W530b2 abuts on the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f, and the engaging portion W530b2 is elastically deformed toward the front side (arrow F direction side). Will be done. As a result, elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b2 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) is restricted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b2 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) is restricted, so that the engaging portion W530b2 is illicitly elastically deformed toward the back surface side. , It is possible to prevent the protective cover W500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300.

Further, by displacing the protective cover W500 toward the right side (arrow R direction side), elastic deformation toward the back side (arrow B direction side) of the engaging portion W530b2 is restricted, so that the protective cover is protected. The operation of attaching the W500 to the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300 (displacement of the protective cover W500 toward the right side) and the operation of restricting the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530b2 toward the back side can be made the same. The operation of the board box Wk100 to the regulated state can be facilitated.

By engaging the engagement between the engaging portion W530b1 and the protrusion W312c, the displacement of the protective cover W500 toward the left side (arrow L direction side) is restricted, and the front surface of the engaging portion W530b2 is restricted. It is possible to suppress the release of elastic deformation toward the side (the side in the direction of arrow F).

Further, by contacting the tip end portion of the engaging portion W530b2 with the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f, the protective cover W500 can be displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction side), and the back wall portion. It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between W510 and the upright portion W222. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the wire illegally inserted from the gap formed between the back wall portion W510 and the upright portion W222 from releasing the sticking between the flat surface portion W220 and the sealing seal WSL.

Next, the substrate box Wl100 according to the 27th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 96 (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wl100 according to the 27th embodiment, and FIG. 96 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wl100 in the XCVIb-XCVIb line of FIG. 96 (a). 96 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wl100 in the XCVIc-XCVIc line of FIG. 96 (a), FIG. 96 (d) is a rear view of the protective cover Wl500, and FIG. 96 (e) is a rear view. , FIG. 96 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the protective cover Wl500 in the XCVIe-XCVIe line. 97 (a) is a rear view of the substrate box Wl100 in the XCVIIa section of FIG. 96 (a), and FIG. 97 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wl100 in the XCVIb-XCVIb line of FIG. 96 (a). 97 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wl100 in the XCVIc-XCVIc line of FIG. 96 (a).

Note that FIGS. 96 (a) to 96 (c) show a state in which the protective cover Wl500 is removed from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300. Further, in FIG. 97 (a), the tip portion Wl436 is illustrated by a broken line.

As shown in FIGS. 96A to 96C, the box cover Wl200 of the substrate box Wl100 in the 27th embodiment replaces the protrusion W221 in the 7th embodiment (see FIG. 72), and the elastic deformation regulating means. It is equipped with Wl230.

The elastic deformation regulating means Wl230 is for suppressing the protective cover Wl500 from being illegally removed from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300, and is projected from the flat surface portion W220 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). A first regulation unit Wl240 and a second regulation unit Wl250 are provided.

The first regulation unit Wl240 and the second regulation unit Wl250 are arranged in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) by the vertical dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 of the protective cover Wl500, which will be described later. As a result, the connecting portion Wl535 can be arranged between the first regulating portion Wl240 and the second regulating portion Wl250 facing each other.

The first regulating portion Wl240 is formed with an inclined portion Wl241 that inclines toward the back side (arrow B direction side) from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side). The locking surface Wl242, which is a surface formed on the side opposite to the inclined portion Wl241 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), is formed along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The second regulating portion Wl250 has a first inclined portion Wl251 and a first inclined portion that incline toward the back side (arrow B direction side) from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side). A second inclined portion Wl252 that inclines toward the front side (arrow F direction side) from the right end portion of the portion Wl251 toward the right side is formed. In the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the second inclined portion Wl252 is arranged at a position overlapping the locking surface Wl242 of the first regulating portion Wl240.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (d) and 96 (e), the engaging portion Wl530a of the protective cover Wl500 includes a connecting portion Wl535 and a tip portion Wl536 disposed at the tip of the connecting portion Wl535.

The connecting portion Wl535 projects from substantially the center of the engaging portion Wl530a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) toward the right side (arrow R direction side). The protruding dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed to be larger than the dimension of the first regulating portion Wl240 in the left-right direction and smaller than the dimension of the second regulating portion Wl250 in the left-right direction.

The inclined portion Wl535a formed on the lower surface of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side (arrow B direction side) from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side). NS. That is, the connecting portion Wl535 is formed so that the connecting portion with the engaging portion Wl530a is smaller than the connecting portion with the tip portion Wl536. As a result, the connecting portion Wl535 (tip portion Wl536) can be easily deformed with respect to the engaging portion Wl530a.

The tip portion Wl536 is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). In the present embodiment, the tip portion Wl536 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) of the connecting portion Wl535 is the upper tip portion Wl536a, and the tip portion Wl536 on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the connecting portion Wl535 is the lower tip portion. It will be described with reference numerals to Wl536b.

Next, the substrate box Wl100 in the regulated state will be described with reference to FIG. 97. As described above, since the protruding dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed to be larger than the dimension of the first regulating portion Wl240 in the left-right direction, the first regulating portion Wl240 is located between the engaging portion Wl530a and the upper tip portion Wl536a. It is arranged in the space formed in.

On the other hand, since the protruding dimension of the connecting portion Wl535 is formed smaller than the dimension of the second regulating portion Wl250 in the left-right direction, the second inclined portion Wl252 of the second regulating portion Wl250 and the lower tip portion Wl536b come into contact with each other. .. As a result, the connecting portion Wl535 (tip portion Wl536) is rotated (twisted) with the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as the rotation axis, and the lower tip portion Wl536b is directed toward the back side (arrow B direction side). And the upper tip portion Wl536a is displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

As described above, the inclined portion Wl535a is formed so as to be inclined toward the back side (arrow B direction side) from the left side (arrow L direction side) to the right side (arrow R direction side). The connecting portion Wl535 (tip portion Wl536) can be easily rotated with respect to the joint portion Wl530a.

By displacing the upper tip portion Wl536a toward the front side (arrow F direction side), the amount of engagement between the upper tip portion Wl536a and the first regulating portion Wl240 can be increased (the upper tip portion Wl536a and the first in the left-right direction). 1 The overlap with the regulation unit Wl240 can be increased). This makes it difficult to illegally remove the protective cover Wl500 from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300.

Further, when the lower tip portion Wl536b is displaced toward the back side (arrow B direction side) in order to illegally disengage the lower tip portion Wl536b and the second regulating portion Wl250, the lower tip portion Wl536b is displaced in the left-right direction (arrow L). Since the upper tip portion Wl536a is rotated (twisted) around the −R direction) and displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction side), the upper tip portion Wl536a and the first regulation portion Wl240 are engaged with each other. The amount can be increased. This makes it difficult to illegally remove the protective cover Wl500 from the box cover Wl200 and the box base W300.

Next, the substrate box Wm100 according to the 28th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 98. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 98 (a) is a partial front view of the substrate box Wm100 according to the 28th embodiment, and FIG. 98 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wm100 in the line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb of FIG. 98 (a). Since the sealing seal WSL in the present embodiment is formed in the same shape as the sealing seal WSL in the seventh embodiment except that the dimensions in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) are small, the same reference numerals are given. explain. Further, in FIG. 98A, a state in which the protective cover Wm500 is removed from the box cover Wm200 and the box base Wm300 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 98, the box base Wm300 of the substrate box Wl100 according to the 28th embodiment includes a pair of elastic deformation regulating means Wm330. A notch Wm327 is formed in the flat surface portion Wm320 at a position corresponding to the elastic deformation regulating means Wm330, and the elastic deformation regulating means Wm330 is arranged in the space formed by the notch Wm327. Further, the flat surface portion Wm220 of the box cover Wm200 includes a regulation protrusion Wm228, and the engaging portion Wm530b of the protective cover Wm500 includes a protrusion Wm534.

The elastic deformation regulating means Wm330 is for suppressing illegal elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wm530b of the protective cover Wm500 in the regulated state, and is a connecting portion Wm331 protruding from the notch Wm327 and the connecting portion thereof. The extension portion Wm332 extending in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) from the protruding tip portion of Wm331 and the extension portion Wm332 protruding from both ends of the extension portion Wm332 toward the front side (arrow F direction side). It is provided with a contact portion Wm333 and a regulation portion Wm334.

The connecting portion Wm331 has a plate shape, and projects from the side wall of the flat portion Wm320 formed by the notch Wm327 toward the sealing seal WSL side. The inclined portion Wm331a formed on the front surface of the connecting portion Wm331 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side (arrow F direction side) from the upper side (arrow U direction side) to the lower side (arrow D direction side). That is, the connecting portion Wm331 is formed so that the connecting portion with the side wall of the flat surface portion Wj220 is smaller than the connecting portion with the extending portion Wm332. As a result, the extension portion Wm332 (contact portion Wm333 and regulation portion Wm334) can be easily deformed with respect to the side wall of the flat surface portion Wj220.

The contact portion Wm333 is a portion to which the protrusion Wm534 of the protective cover Wm500, which will be described later, is abutted, and is one side of the extension portion Wm332 (arrow L direction) in the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the extension portion Wm332. It protrudes from the end of the side) toward the front side (the side in the direction of arrow F).

The restricting portion Wm334 is directed from the end on the side opposite to the contact portion Wm333 (arrow R direction side) in the extension direction (arrow LR direction) of the extension portion Wm332 toward the front side (arrow F direction side). It is projected and formed at a position on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the engaging portion Wm530b of the protective cover Wm500 in the regulated state.

The regulation protrusion Wm228 of the flat surface portion Wm220 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the elastic deformation regulating means Wm330 toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side), and is from the flat surface portion Wm220 to the flat surface portion Wm320 side of the box base Wm300. It is projected toward (arrow F direction side). In the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the regulation protrusion Wm228 is arranged at a position overlapping substantially the center of the odor extension portion Wm332 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). The regulating protrusion Wm228 may be arranged at a position overlapping the connecting portion Wm331 or the regulating portion Wm334 in the front-rear direction.

The protrusion Wm534 of the protective cover Wm500 is a protrusion for deforming (rotating) the elastic deformation regulating means Wm330, and protrudes from the back surface of the engaging portion Wm530b toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side). The protrusion Wm534 is arranged at a distance substantially equal to the extension dimension of the extension portion Wm332 of the elastic deformation regulating means Wm330 from the tip end portion of the engagement portion Wm530b. Thereby, in the regulated state, the tip portion of the engaging portion Wm530b and the protrusion Wm534 can be arranged on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the contact portion Wm333 and the restricting portion Wm334.

As shown in FIG. 98 (b), in the regulated state, the protrusion Wm534 of the engaging portion Wm530b and the contact portion Wm333 of the elastic deformation regulating means Wm330 come into contact with each other. As a result, the connecting portion Wm331 (extended portion Wm332) is rotated (twisted) about the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) as the rotation axis, and the contact portion Wm333 is directed toward the back side (arrow B direction side). Wm334 is displaced toward the front side (arrow F direction side).

As described above, the inclined portion Wm331a is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side (arrow F direction side) from the upper side (arrow U direction side) to the lower side (arrow D direction side), so that the flat portion Wj220 is formed. The connecting portion Wm331 (extended portion Wm332) can be easily rotated with respect to the side wall of the.

By displace the regulating portion Wm334 toward the front side (arrow F direction side), the distance between the regulating portion Wm334 and the tip end portion of the engaging portion Wm530b can be reduced. As a result, the engaging portion Wm530b can be made difficult to be elastically deformed illegally. In the regulated state, the regulating portion Wm334 may be brought into contact with the back surface of the engaging portion Wm530b.

As described above, in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the regulation protrusion Wm228 is arranged at a position overlapping substantially the center of the extension portion Wm332 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), so that the regulation protrusion Wm228 It is possible to regulate that the extension portion Wm332 (contact portion Wm333 and the regulation portion Wm334) is displaced toward the back surface side (arrow B direction side) by the contact between the extension portion Wm332 and the extension portion Wm332. As a result, the engaging portion Wm530b can be made difficult to be elastically deformed illegally.

Next, the substrate box Wn100 according to the 29th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 99. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

99 (a) is a partial front view of the substrate box Wn100 according to the 29th embodiment, and FIG. 99 (b) is a side view of the protective cover Wn500 in the direction of arrow XCIXb of FIG. 99 (a). 99 (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wn100 in the XCIXc-XCIXc line of FIG. 99 (a). In FIG. 99A, the state in which the protective cover Wn500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300 is shown, and the protrusion Wn534 and the pair of wall portions Wn538 of the protective cover Wn500 are shown by broken lines.

As shown in FIG. 99, the box base Wm300 of the substrate box Wn100 according to the 29th embodiment includes a pair of claw portions Wm340, and the engaging portion Wn530b of the protective cover Wn500 includes a protrusion Wn534 and a pair of wall portions Wn538.

A notch is formed in the front wall portion Wn312a of the box base Wm300 at a position corresponding to the pair of claw portions Wm340, and the pair of claw portions Wm340 are arranged in the space formed by the notch. The pair of claw portions Wm340 are formed so as to project from the back surface of the front wall portion Wn312a toward the left side (arrow L direction side), and are arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion Wn312a. ..

The pair of claw portions Wm340 is a portion for engaging the protective cover Wn500 with the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300, and in the regulated state, the engaging portion of the protective cover Wn500 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). It is arranged at a position overlapping Wn530b. Engagement holes Wm341 are formed in the pair of claw portions Wm340 at positions on the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) of the claw portions Wm340.

The engagement hole Wm341 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the protrusion Wn534 of the protective cover Wn500 described later, and the protrusion Wn534 is arranged inside the engagement hole Wm341 (the protrusion Wn534 is engaged with the engagement hole Wm341). The protective cover Wn500 is engaged with the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300.

The engaging portion Wn530b includes a pair of connecting pieces W531b at both ends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the engaging portion Wn530b at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). .. As a result, elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wn530b is suppressed.

Further, the engaging portion Wn530b is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) as compared with the engaging portion W530b in the seventh embodiment, and in the present embodiment, the engaging portion Wn530b is arranged on substantially the same surface as the front wall portion W520. Will be done.

The protrusion Wn534 projects from the engaging portion Wn530b toward the back wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side). In the regulated state, the protrusion Wn534 is arranged at a position overlapping the engaging hole Wm341 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Thereby, the protective cover Wn500 can be engaged with the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300.

The pair of wall portions Wn538 suppresses the wire illegally inserted from the gap formed between the front wall portion W520 and the engaging portion Wn530b from disengaging the engagement between the engaging hole Wm341 and the protrusion Wn534. It is a part for. The pair of wall portions Wn538 are formed at the end portions of the engaging portion Wn530b on the side facing the front wall portion W520. As a result, the protrusion Wn534 is arranged between the pair of wall portions Wn538 facing each other. Further, the pair of wall portions Wn538 are projected from the engaging portion Wn530b toward the back wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side).

As shown in FIG. 99 (c), in the regulated state, the protrusion Wn534 is arranged inside the engagement hole Wm341, and the inner side wall of the engagement hole Wm341 and the protrusion Wn534 come into contact with each other to the left of the protective cover Wn500. Displacement to the direction side (arrow L direction side) is regulated.

Further, since the engaging portion Wn530b is arranged on substantially the same surface as the front wall portion W520, and the pair of claw portions Wm340 are arranged on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion Wn312a. In the regulated state, a pair of claw portions Wm340 are arranged on the back wall portion W510 side (arrow B direction side) with respect to the engaging portion Wn530b. Therefore, the protective cover Wn500 shields the pair of claws Wm340. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of claw portions Wm340 from being illegally elastically deformed, and it is possible to prevent the protective cover Wn500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wn300.

Next, the substrate box Wo100 according to the thirtieth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 100. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 100 (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wo100 according to the thirtieth embodiment, and FIG. 100 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wo100 on the Cb-Cb line of FIG. 100 (a). In FIG. 100A, the retaining pin Wo580 is not shown.

As shown in FIG. 100, the protective cover Wo500 of the substrate box Wo100 according to the thirtieth embodiment includes a retaining pin Wo580, and the flat surface portion Wq220 includes a recess Wo229.

Since the protective cover Wo500 is provided with the retaining pin Wo580, the flat surface portion Wo220 is formed on the front side by the amount of protrusion of the retaining pin Wo580 toward the front side (arrow F direction side) with respect to the engaging portion Wo530a. NS. As a result, the contact between the retaining pin Wo580 and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed, and the damage of the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed.

The back wall portion Wo214a of the cover portion Wo214 is formed so as to project toward the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) from the back wall portion W214a in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 73). A protrusion Wo214b is projected from the back wall portion Wo214a toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) at a position overlapping the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion Wo530a in the rear view in the regulated state. The protrusion Wo214b is a portion for engaging the box cover Wo200 and the protective cover Wo500 (engaging portion Wo530a) (to regulate the displacement of the protective cover Wo500 to the side opposite to the side wall portion W212).

A recess Wo229 is recessed in the flat surface portion Wo220 at a position overlapping the retaining pin Wo580 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The recess Wo229 is recessed from the back surface of the flat surface portion Wo220 toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) of the box base W300. As a result, a space is formed between the recess Wo229 and the sealing seal WSL.

The concave portion Wo229 is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the inner diameter of the concave portion Wo229 is formed to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the head Wo581 described later. As a result, when the engaging portion Wo530a is displaced (elastically deformed), a part of the retaining pin Wo580 can be accepted inside the recess Wo229.

The engaging portion Wo530a of the protective cover Wo500 is provided with an insertion hole Wo538 between the connecting piece W531a and the engaging hole W533 facing each other. The insertion hole Wo538 is a hole for inserting the pin portion Wo582 of the retaining pin Wo580, which will be described later, and is formed in a circular shape in the rear view.

The retaining pin Wo580 is made of a resin material and includes a head portion Wo581 formed in a plate shape and a pair of pin portions Wo582 erected from the head portion Wo581 in the plate thickness direction and formed in a plate shape.

The head Wo581 is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the outer diameter of the head Wo581 is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole Wo538.

The vertical length of the pair of pin portions Wo582 is formed to be smaller than the dimension between the back surface of the engaging portion Wo530a on the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL and the sealing seal WSL. The pair of pin portions Wo582 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the plate thickness direction. Further, the pair of pin portions Wo582 are formed to have a plate thickness that allows them to be flexed and deformed, and the pair of pin portions Wo582 are made deformable in directions close to each other.

A locking portion Wo583 is formed at the erected tip of the pin portion Wo582 so as to project toward the side opposite to the facing surface side. An inclined portion o584 formed by inclining toward the facing surface side of the locking portion Wo583 is formed at a portion of the locking portion Wo583 opposite to the facing surface side, and is formed on the standing tip side. The outer shape of the locking portion Wo583 is formed to have a size that allows the insertion hole Wo538 to be inserted.

The outer shape of the locking portion Wo583 on the head Wo581 side (the side opposite to the standing tip side) is formed to a size that does not allow the insertion hole Wo538 to be inserted. Further, the outer shape of the locking portion Wo583 on the head Wo581 side is formed to have a size that allows the insertion hole Wo538 to be inserted when the pair of pin portions Wo582 are flexed and deformed in the directions close to each other. Further, the outer shape of the locking portion Wo583 on the erection tip side is formed to have a size that allows the insertion hole Wo538 to be inserted.

As a result, the retaining pin Wo580 is bent and deformed in the direction in which the pair of pin portions Wo582 are close to each other, so that the locking portion Wo583 is inserted through the insertion hole Wo538. On the other hand, when the bending deformation of the pair of pin portions Wo582 is released, the locking portion Wo583 is brought into contact with the engaging portion Wo530a and is in the direction opposite to the insertion direction (arrow F direction) (arrow B direction). Displacement is regulated.

Since the inclined portion o584 is formed so as to be inclined toward the facing surface side of the locking portion Wo583 as it is directed toward the erection tip side, the inclined portion o584 and the inner circumference of the insertion hole Wo538 come into contact with each other, so that the pair of pin portions Wo582 Are flexed and deformed in the direction closer to each other.

Since the outer diameter of the head Wo581 is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the insertion hole Wo538, the head Wo581 comes into contact with the engaging portion Wo530a, and the retaining pin Wo580 is displaced in the insertion direction (arrow F direction). Be regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL from being damaged due to the contact between the vertical tip portion of the pair of pin portions Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL.

On the other hand, when the engaging portion Wo530a is illegally elastically deformed toward the front side (arrow F direction side) in order to illegally remove the protective cover Wo500 from the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300, a pair of pin portions. The vertical tip of Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL come into contact with each other. As a result, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wo530a toward the front side (arrow F direction side) is restricted, and the removal of the protective cover Wo500 from the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300 is suppressed.

Further, the sealing seal WSL is damaged by the contact between the vertical tip portion of the pair of pin portions Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL. This makes it easier for the operator (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

In the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the flat surface portion Wo220 at a position overlapping the retaining pin Wo580 (pair of pin portions Wo582) is directed toward the side opposite to the sealing seal WSL (arrow F direction side). The recess may be recessed. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the contact between the standing tip of the pair of pin portions Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL.

Next, attachment of the protective cover Wo500 to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300 will be described. When attaching the protective cover Wo500 to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300, the retaining pin Wo580 is not engaged with the protective cover Wo500, and the protective cover Wo500 is protected when the protective cover Wo500 is attached to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300. The retaining pin Wo580 is engaged with the cover Wo500.

As a result, damage to the sealing seal WSL due to the retaining pin Wo580 (locking portion Wo583) is suppressed as compared with the case where the protective cover Wo500 with the retaining pin Wo580 engaged is attached to the box cover Wo200 and the box base W300. can.

Next, the protective cover Wp500 according to the 31st embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 101. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 101 is a rear view of the protective cover Wp500 according to the 31st embodiment. In the present embodiment, the box cover and the box base to which the protective cover Wp500 is attached are not shown, and the concept of removing the protective cover Wp500 from the box cover and the box base will be described. Further, in the description of FIG. 101, FIG. 100 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 101, the protective cover Wp500 according to the 33rd embodiment includes a second engaging portion Wp590. The protective cover Wp500 is formed in pairs symmetrically (FIG. 101 vertically symmetrically) with respect to a plane parallel to the upper wall portion (lower wall portion W501) at substantially the center of the upper wall portion and the lower wall portion W501 of the protective cover Wp500. Further, the engaging portion W530b is not formed on the front wall portion Wp520 of the protective cover Wp500 (see FIG. 72).

The engaging portion Wp530a includes a pair of connecting pieces W531b at both ends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the engaging portion Wp530a at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). .. The connecting piece W531b arranged on the left side (arrow L direction side) of the pair of connecting pieces W531b is connected to the back wall portion Wp510 and is connected to the right side (arrow R direction) of the pair of connecting pieces W531b. The connecting piece W531b arranged on the side) is connected to the second engaging portion Wp590.

The second engaging portion Wp590 is a portion where the retaining pin Wo580 is engaged. The second engaging portion Wp590 includes an insertion hole Wo538, a connecting piece W531a, and a pair of connecting pieces W531b. The connecting piece W531a is connected to the left end (arrow L direction side) end of the second engaging portion Wp590 and the back wall portion Wp510, and the connecting piece W531b is connected to the second engaging portion Wp590 in the vertical direction (arrow). Both ends in the UD direction) are connected to the upper end (lower end) and the upper wall (lower wall W501) of the engaging portion Wp530a.

The box cover and the box base are provided with protrusions that are engaged with the engaging holes W533 at positions corresponding to the engaging holes W533 of the pair of engaging portions Wp530a in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). Be prepared. These protrusions are arranged symmetrically with respect to a plane parallel to the back wall portion Wp510 (front wall portion Wp520) at substantially the center of the back wall portion Wp510 and the front wall portion Wp520.

As a result, in a state where the protrusion formed on the box cover and one (the other) engaging hole W533 of the pair of engaging portions Wp530a can be engaged, the protrusion formed on the box base and the pair of engaging portions are engaged. The other (one) engaging hole W533 of Wp530a is disengaged.

In a state where the protrusion formed on the box cover and the engaging hole W533 of one (the other) of the pair of engaging portions Wp530a can be engaged, the second engagement is connected to the engaging portion Wp530a of one (the other). The retaining pin Wo580 is inserted into the insertion hole Wo538 of the joint portion Wp590, and the second engaging portion Wp590 and the retaining pin Wo580 are engaged with each other.

In order to illegally remove the protective cover Wp500 from the box cover and box base, if one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a is elastically deformed toward the front side (arrow F direction side), a pair of pin portions The vertical tip of Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL come into contact with each other. As a result, the elastic deformation of one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a toward the front side (arrow F direction side) is restricted, and the removal of the protective cover Wp500 from the box cover and the box base is suppressed.

Further, the sealing seal WSL is damaged by the contact between the vertical tip portion of the pair of pin portions Wo582 and the sealing seal WSL. This makes it easier for the operator (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

To remove the protective cover Wp500 from the box cover and the box base, the connecting pieces W531a and W531b connected to one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a and the second engaging portion Wp590 are cut by a cutting tool (not shown). , One (other) engaging portion Wp530a and the second engaging portion Wp590 are separated from the protective cover Wp500.

Here, the protective cover Wp500 from which one (other) engaging portion Wp530a and the second engaging portion Wp590 are separated is rotated (reversed) by 180 degrees with the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as the rotation axis. , The protrusion formed on the box base and the other (one) engaging hole W533 of the pair of engaging portions Wp530a can be engaged with each other.

Thereby, the protective cover Wp500 can be used (reused) twice in order to suppress the opening of the box cover and the box base. As a result, the maintenance cost of the pachinko machine W10 can be reduced as compared with the case where the protective cover Wp500 is discarded every time the box cover and the box base are opened.

Further, depending on whether one (the other) engaging portion Wp530a and the second engaging portion Wp590 are separated from the protective cover Wp500, whether the protective cover Wp500 is reused and attached to the box cover and the box base. It is possible to distinguish whether the new protective cover Wp500 is attached to the box cover and the box base. Therefore, by collating with the maintenance record of the pachinko machine W10, for example, the maintenance record describes the state in which the protective cover Wp500 is reused, whereas the new protective cover Wp500 is attached to the box cover and the box base. If this is the case, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

Next, the substrate box Wq100 according to the 32nd embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 102. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

102 (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wq100 according to the 32nd embodiment, and FIG. 102 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wq100 in the CIIb-CIIb line of FIG. 102 (a).

As shown in FIG. 102, the protective cover Wq500 of the substrate box Wq100 according to the 32nd embodiment includes a second engaging portion Wq590 and a pair of protrusions Wq534. Since the protective cover Wq500 includes the second engaging portion Wq590, the size of the back wall portion Wq510 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is formed to be shorter than the dimension of the back wall portion W510 in the seventh embodiment. NS.

Further, by forming the pair of protrusions Wq534 on the engaging portion Wq530a, the flat surface portion Wq220 is formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) by the amount of protrusion of the pair of protrusions Wq534. As a result, when the protective cover Wq500 is attached to the box cover Wq200 and the box base W300, the contact between the pair of protrusions Wq534 and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed, and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed from being damaged.

A recess Wq229 is recessed in the flat surface portion Wq220 at a position overlapping the pair of protrusions Wq534 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The recess Wq229 is recessed from the back surface of the flat surface portion Wq220 toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) of the box base W300. As a result, a space is formed between the recess Wq229 and the sealing seal WSL.

The back wall portion Wq214a of the cover portion Wq214 is formed so as to project toward the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) from the back wall portion W214a in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 73). A protrusion Wq214b is projected from the back wall portion Wq214a toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) at a position overlapping the engagement hole W533 (see FIG. 73) of the engagement portion Wq530a in the rear view in the regulated state. NS. The protrusion Wq214b is a portion for engaging the box cover Wq200 and the protective cover Wq500 (engaging portion Wq530a) (to regulate the displacement of the protective cover Wq500 to the side opposite to the side wall portion W212). Further, the cover portion Wq214 is not formed with a side wall on the lower side (side in the direction of arrow D).

The second engaging portion Wq590 is arranged at the end on the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the engaging portion Wq530a, and the pair of protrusions Wq534 are on the opposite side of the engaging portion Wq530a from the second engaging portion Wq590. It is arranged at the end (on the side in the direction of arrow U). Further, the pair of protrusions Wq534 are arranged at a predetermined distance in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction).

An insertion hole Wo538 is formed in the second engaging portion Wq590 (see FIG. 100). The retaining pin Wo580 is engaged with the second engaging portion Wq590 in a state where the pin portion Wo582 of the retaining pin Wo580 is inserted through the insertion hole Wo538.

Next, the removal of the protective cover Wq500 from the box cover Wq200 and the box base W300 will be described. When the engaging portion Wq530a is removed from the box cover Wq200 in a state where the engaging portion Wq530a is separated from the protective cover Wq500, the side wall on the lower side (arrow D direction side) is not formed on the cover portion Wq214. By dislocating the engaging portion Wq530a downward, the engaging portion Wq530a can be easily removed from the box cover Wq200.

Here, in order to disengage the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion Wq530a from the protrusion Wq214b of the back wall portion Wq214a, the engaging portion Wq530a is displaced toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side). There is a need.

On the other hand, the retaining pin Wo580 is engaged with the second engaging portion Wq590, and the protruding tip portion of the pin portion Wo582 is arranged on the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) of the second engaging portion Wq590. Therefore, the protruding tip of the pin portion Wo582 is likely to come into contact with the back wall portion Wq510.

Therefore, in order to suppress the contact between the protruding tip of the pin portion Wo582 and the back wall portion Wq510, the retaining pin Wo580 is on the opposite side of the flat surface portion W320 with the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as the rotation axis. It is rotated toward the arrow B direction side). As a result, the pair of protrusions Wq534 are rotated toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side), and the seal seal WSL is damaged by the pair of protrusions Wq534.

Further, the pair of protrusions Wq534 can be easily accepted by the space formed between the sealing seal WSL and the recess Wq229, and the pair of protrusions Wq534 can easily damage the sealing seal WSL. Further, in the sealing seal WSL, the area damaged by the pair of protrusions Wq534 can be enlarged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the engaging portion Wq530a is removed from the box cover Wq200, the sealing seal WSL is easily damaged, so that there is a risk of unauthorized operation on the main control board (not shown). It can be easily recognized by the clerk).

Next, the substrate box Wr100 according to the 33rd embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (a). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 103 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wr100 according to the 33rd embodiment, and corresponds to the line LXXIVb-LXXIVb of FIG. 73 (b). In the description of FIG. 103 (a), FIG. 74 (a) will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the box cover Wr200 of the substrate box Wr100 in the 33rd embodiment includes the protrusion Wr214b instead of the protrusion W221 in the 7th embodiment (see FIG. 72).

The protrusion W221 is not formed on the flat surface portion Wr220, and in the rear view, the position overlapping the engaging portion W530a is on the side opposite to the side wall portion W212 (on the side in the arrow L direction) from the engaging hole W533. Notches are formed up to. As a result, even when the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed toward the flat surface portion Wr220 side (arrow F direction side), the engaging portion W530a abuts on the flat surface portion Wr220, and the elastic deformation of the engaging portion W530a is restricted. It can be suppressed.

The back wall portion Wr214a of the cover portion Wr214 is formed so as to project toward the protruding tip side (arrow L direction side) from the back wall portion W214a in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 73). On the back wall portion Wr214a, a protrusion Wr214b is projected toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) at a position overlapping the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion W530a in the rear view. The protrusion Wr214b is a portion for engaging the box cover Wr200 and the protective cover Wr500 (engaging portion W530a) (to regulate the displacement of the protective cover Wr500 to the side opposite to the side wall portion W212).

By projecting the protrusion Wr214b from the back wall portion Wr214a toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side), the engaging portion W530a is engaged with the front wall portion W520 in order to engage the box cover Wr200 and the protective cover Wr500. It can be elastically deformed toward the side (flat surface portion Wr220 side).

On the other hand, the pair of engaging portions W530b are elastically deformed toward the back wall portion W510 side (planar portion W320 side, arrow B direction side) in order to engage the box base W300 and the protective cover Wr500 (FIG. 74 (a)). Therefore, in order to illegally disengage the box cover Wr200 and the box base W300 from the protective cover W500, the direction in which the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed (displaced) (arrow F direction) and the pair of engaging portions W530b are elastic. The direction of deformation (displacement) (arrow B direction) can be opposite.

As a result, the engaging portion W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b) is elastically deformed (displaced) in order to disengage the engaging portion W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b) and the protrusion Wr214b (pair of protrusions W312c). ), The pair of engaging portions W530b (engaging portion W530a) are engaged with the pair of protrusions W312c (protrusions Wr214b) due to the elastic deformation (displacement) of the engaging portions W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b). Can be displaced in the direction of maintaining. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover Wr500 from being illegally removed from the box cover Wr200 and the box base W300.

Further, since the protrusion Wr214b protrudes from the back wall portion Wr214a toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side), the engagement between the protrusion Wr214b and the engagement hole W533 is shielded by the back wall portion Wr214a. As a result, the engagement between the protrusion Wr214b and the engagement hole W533 can be prevented from being illegally released.

Next, the substrate box Ws100 according to the 34th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 103 (b). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 103 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Ws100 according to the 34th embodiment, and corresponds to the line LXXIVa-LXXIVa of FIG. 73 (b). In the description of FIG. 103 (b), FIG. 74 (b) will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the box base Ws300 of the substrate box Ws100 in the 34th embodiment includes a pair of protrusions Ws328 instead of the pair of protrusions W312c in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 73). Since the mode of engagement between the pair of engaging portions W530b and the pair of protrusions Ws328 is the same on one side (upper side) and the other side (lower side) (see FIG. 73), a cross-sectional view of one side is shown. The explanation will be given, and the explanation on the other side will be omitted.

The protrusion W312c is not formed on the front wall portion W312a of the box base Ws300, and the flat portion Ws320 is formed so as to extend to a position overlapping the engaging holes W533 of the pair of engaging portions W530b in the front view. A pair of protrusions Ws328 project toward the flat surface portion W220 side (arrow B direction side) at a position overlapping the engaging holes W533 of the pair of engaging portions W530b on the extending tip portion of the flat surface portion Ws320. Will be done. The pair of protrusions Ws328 is a portion for engaging the box base Ws300 and the protective cover W500 (a pair of engaging portions W530b) (to regulate the displacement of the protective cover W500 to the side opposite to the left wall portion W302). Is.

A pair of protrusions Ws328 are projected from the flat surface portion Ws320 toward the side opposite to the front wall portion W312a (the side in the direction of arrow F), so that the pair of protrusions Ws300 and the protective cover W500 are engaged with each other. The portion W530b can be elastically deformed toward the front wall portion W312a side (the side opposite to the flat surface portion W220).

On the other hand, the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed toward the side opposite to the front wall portion W520 (the side opposite to the flat surface portion W220, the side in the direction of arrow B) in order to engage the box cover W200 and the protective cover W500. (See FIG. 74 (b)). Therefore, in order to illegally disengage the box cover W200 and the box base Ws300 from the protective cover W500, the direction in which the engaging portion W530a is elastically deformed (displaced) (direction of arrow B) and the pair of engaging portions W530b are elastic. The direction of deformation (displacement) (direction of arrow F) can be opposite.

As a result, the engaging portion W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b) is elastically deformed (displaced) in order to disengage the engaging portions W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b) and the protrusions W221 (pair of protrusions Ws328). ), The pair of engaging portions W530b (engaging portion W530a) are engaged with the pair of protrusions Ws328 (projections W221) due to the elastic deformation (displacement) of the engaging portions W530a (pair of engaging portions W530b). Can be displaced in the direction of maintaining. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover W500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Ws300.

Next, the substrate box Wt100 according to the 35th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 104. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 104 (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wt100 according to the 35th embodiment, and FIG. 104 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wt100 in the CIVb-CIVb line of FIG. 104 (a). Note that FIG. 104 shows a state in which the protective cover W500 is removed from the substrate box Wt100.

As shown in FIG. 104, the box cover Wt200 (planar portion Wt220) of the substrate box Wt100 in the 35th embodiment includes a protrusion Wt224b instead of the recess W224b in the 7th embodiment (see FIG. 73).

The protrusion Wt224b projects from the back surface of the flat surface portion Wt220 toward the side opposite to the flat surface portion W320 (the side in the direction of arrow B), and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a cross-sectional view. The protrusion Wt224b can ensure the strength of the flat surface Wt220.

A pair of notches Wt224b1 are formed in the protrusion Wt224b. The space formed between the facing surfaces of the protrusions Wt224b formed by the notch Wt224b1 is defined as the cutting space WS3. In the restricted state, the cutting space WS3 is arranged at a position overlapping the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530a in the rear view.

The distance between the facing surfaces of the protrusions Wt224b formed by the notch Wt224b1 is formed to be substantially equal to or slightly larger than the extension dimension of the connecting piece W531b (see FIG. 73) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction). NS. As a result, when cutting the connecting piece W531b, the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) can be accepted by the cutting space WS3.

The protrusion Wt224b extends in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and is formed by connecting a pair of both end wall portions W223. As a result, the seal seal WSL can be attached to the protrusion Wt224b between both ends of the seal seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) except for the cutting space WS3. Therefore, wrinkles can be suppressed in the seal seal WSL as compared with the case where both ends of the seal seal WSL in the vertical direction are not attached to the protrusion Wt224b, and a space is created between the back surface of the flat surface portion Wt220 and the seal seal WSL. It can be suppressed from occurring. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL from being easily peeled off from the back surface of the flat surface portion Wt220.

Further, by connecting the protrusion Wt224b and the pair of both end wall portions W223, the strength of the pair of both end wall portions W223 can be secured.

If the protrusion Wt224b is formed so as to extend toward the pair of both end wall portions W223 from both ends of the sealing seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the protrusion Wt224b is not connected to the pair of both end wall portions W223. May be said.

In the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the distance between the protruding tip of the protruding portion Wt224b and the protruding tip of the pair of both end wall portions W223 is the front surface of the engaging portion W530a (facing the front wall portion W520). It is formed to be larger than the distance between the surface to be formed) and the front surface of the back wall portion W510 (the surface facing the front wall portion W520) (see FIG. 72). As a result, when the protective cover W500 is attached to the box cover Wt200 and the box base W300, it is possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL attached to the protrusion Wt224b from coming into contact with the engaging portion W530a and damaging the sealing seal WSL.

In the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), the distance between the protruding tip of the protruding portion Wt224b and the protruding tip of the pair of both end wall portions W223 is the distance in front of the engaging portion W530a (front wall portion W520). The distance between the surface facing the front wall portion W510 and the front surface of the back wall portion W510 (the surface facing the front wall portion W520) may be formed to be substantially the same.

In the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b is formed to be substantially the same as the dimension of the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530a.

Next, attachment of the sealing seal WSL to the protrusion Wt224b will be described. The sealing seal WSL is attached along the protruding shape of the protruding portion Wt224b, and is attached to a pair of side surfaces and a protruding tip surface connecting the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion Wt224b and the flat surface portion Wt220.

On the other hand, the sealing seal WSL is not attached to the facing surface of the protrusion Wt224b formed by the notch Wt224b1 or the flat surface portion Wt220 in the cutting space WS3. Therefore, the sealing seal WSL is attached to the protrusion Wt224b in a manner surrounding the cutting space WS3.

Thereby, when cutting the connecting piece W531b (see FIG. 73), the tip of the cutting tool (not shown) can be easily arranged in the cutting space WS3. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.

Further, in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b is formed to be substantially the same as the dimension of the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530a. The tip (not shown) can be arranged. As a result, the trace (damage) formed on the sealing seal WSL can be increased.

Next, the substrate box Wu100 according to the 36th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 105. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 105 is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wu100 according to the 36th embodiment, and corresponds to a cross-sectional view taken along the line LXXXXa-LXXXXa of FIG. 73 (b).

As shown in FIG. 105, the protective cover Wu500 of the substrate box Wu100 according to the 36th embodiment includes a protrusion Wu534. The protrusion W534 is formed on an arc on which the side surface Wu534c of the protrusion W534 formed on the protrusion tip side (arrow R direction side) of the engaging portion W530b is convex toward the protrusion tip side with respect to the protrusion W5534 in the eleventh embodiment. It is formed in a curved shape. The side surface Wu534d of the protrusion Wu534 formed on the side opposite to the protruding tip of the engaging portion Wu530b (the side in the L direction of the arrow) is formed by linearly connecting the protruding tip of the engaging portion Wu530b and the protrusion W534.

As a result, when the engaging portion Wu530b is elastically deformed toward the sealing seal WSL side (arrow B direction side) in order to attach the protective cover Wu500 to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, the side surface Wu534c of the protrusion Wu534 is sealed. Facing WSL. Therefore, even when the side surface Wu534c of the protrusion W534 and the seal seal WSL come into contact with each other due to factors such as the processing accuracy (dimensional tolerance) of the box base W5300 and the protective cover Wu500, the protective cover Wu500 is covered by the cover portion W312. It is possible to easily prevent the seal seal WSL from being damaged when it is displaced toward the side (the side in the direction of arrow R).

In other words, even when the protective cover Wu500 includes the protrusion W534, damage to the sealing seal WSL is likely to be suppressed when the protective cover Wu500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W5300.

On the other hand, in order to illegally remove the protective cover Wu500 from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, the protective cover Wu500 is directed to the opposite side (arrow L direction side) from the cover portion W312 while elastically deforming the engaging portion Wu530b. When it is displaced, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the connecting portion of the side surfaces Wu534c and Wu534d (the protruding tip portion of the protrusion W534).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the protective cover Wu500 is provided with the protrusion W534 and the protective cover Wu500 is illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W5300, the box cover is easily damaged even if the seal seal WSL is easily damaged. When the protective cover Wu500 is attached to the W200 and the box base W5300, it is possible to easily prevent the sealing seal WSL from being damaged.

The side surface Wu534d may be formed by being concavely curved toward the side surface Wu534c side (the side in the direction of the arrow R). As a result, the connecting portion of the side surface Wu534c and the side surface Wu534d can be formed sharply, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged.

Next, the substrate box Wv100 according to the 37th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 106. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 (a) is a partial rear view of the substrate box Wv100 according to the 37th embodiment, and FIG. 106 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wv100 in the CVIb-CVIb line of FIG. 106 (a). In FIG. 106 (a), the outer shapes of the recess Wv229 and the sealing seal WSL are shown by broken lines. Further, in the description of FIG. 106, FIG. 102 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 106, the box cover Wv200 of the substrate box Wv100 in the 37th embodiment includes a recess Wv229 in addition to the box cover Wq200 in the 32nd embodiment.

The recess Wv229 is recessed at a position overlapping the retaining pin Wo580 in the rear view in the regulated state. The concave portion Wv229 is formed in a circular shape in the rear view, and the inner diameter of the concave portion Wv229 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the head Wo581. The sealing seal WSL is attached to the flat surface portion Wv220 on the side opposite to the side wall portion W212 (the side in the direction of arrow L) with respect to the concave portion Wv229. In other words, the sealing seal WSL is not attached to the recess Wv229.

Further, the amount of protrusion of the pair of protrusions Wv534 formed on the protective cover Wv500 (engagement portion Wv530a) is shorter than that of the pair of protrusions Wq534 in the 32nd embodiment. Specifically, in a state where the retaining pin Wo580 is arranged (engaged) on the protective cover Wv500, the protruding tip of the pair of protrusions Wv534 is a box more than the protruding tip of the locking portion Wo583 of the retaining pin Wo580. It is formed on the side opposite to the base W300 (the side in the direction of arrow B).

Further, of the pair of protrusions Wv534, the protrusion Wv534 arranged on the left wall portion W502 side (arrow L direction side) is arranged at a position overlapping the seal seal WSL in the rear view. As a result, when the pair of protrusions Wv534 is displaced (rotated) toward the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side), the protrusions Wv534 arranged on the left wall portion W502 side are brought into contact with the sealing seal WSL. Can be done.

By forming a pair of protrusions Wv534 on the engaging portion Wv530a, the flat surface portion Wv220 is formed on the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side) by the amount of protrusion of the pair of protrusions Wv534. As a result, when the protective cover Wv500 is attached to the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300, the contact between the pair of protrusions Wv534 and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed, and the sealing seal WSL can be suppressed from being damaged.

On the other hand, in the regulated state, by disposing (engaging) the retaining pin Wo580 on the protective cover Wv500, the protruding tip of the locking portion Wo583 of the retaining pin Wo580 becomes the protruding tip of the pair of protrusions Wv534. It is arranged on the box base W300 side (arrow F direction side). As a result, the protruding tip of the locking portion Wo583 is accepted into the space formed by the recess Wv229.

As a result, when the protective cover Wv500 is attached to the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300, the engaging portion Wv530a in which the retaining pin Wo580 is not arranged (disengaged) is elastically deformed, and the engaging portion Wv530a is deformed. The engagement hole W533 (see FIG. 103A) and the protrusion Wq214b of the box cover Wv200 can be engaged with each other.

In the regulated state, when the retaining pin Wo580 is arranged (engaged) on the protective cover Wv500, the elastic deformation of the engaging portion Wv530a is regulated by the locking portion Wo583 coming into contact with the bottom surface of the recess Wv229. As a result, the disengagement between the engaging portion Wv530a and the box cover Wv200 is suppressed.

Further, in order to disengage the engagement hole W533 (see FIG. 73) of the engagement portion Wv530a with the protrusion Wq214b of the back wall portion Wq214a, the protective cover Wv500 is in a state where the engagement portion Wv530a is illicitly elastically deformed. Is displaced toward the side opposite to the side wall portion W212 (the side in the direction of arrow L), the locking portion Wo583 is brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the recess Wv229, which is opposite to the side wall portion W212 of the protective cover Wv500. Displacement towards the side is regulated. Thereby, the removal of the protective cover Wv500 from the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300 can be suppressed.

Next, the removal of the protective cover Wv500 from the box cover Wv200 and the box base W300 will be described. When the engaging portion Wv530a is removed from the box cover Wv200 in a state where the engaging portion Wv530a is separated from the protective cover Wv500, the engagement between the engaging hole W533 of the engaging portion Wv530a and the protrusion Wq214b of the back wall portion Wq214a is released. At the same time, in order to suppress the contact between the protruding tip of the pin portion Wo582 and the inner peripheral surface of the concave portion Wv229, the retaining pin Wo580 is a flat portion W320 with the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as the rotation axis. It is rotated toward the opposite side (arrow B direction side). As a result, the pair of protrusions Wv534 are rotated toward the flat surface portion W320 side (arrow F direction side). From this state, by displace the engaging portion Wv530a toward the side opposite to the side wall portion W212 (the side in the direction of arrow L), the pair of protrusions Wv534 and the sealing seal WSL are brought into contact with each other, and the sealing seal WSL is damaged. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the engaging portion Wv530a is removed from the box cover Wv200, the sealing seal WSL is easily damaged, so that there is a risk of unauthorized operation on the main control board (not shown). It can be easily recognized by the clerk).

Next, the protective cover Ww500 according to the 38th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 107 (a). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 107 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Ww100 according to the 38th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section of the LXXXXIIa portion of FIG. 76 (a).

As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the connecting piece Ww531b of the protective cover Ww500 according to the 38th embodiment is molded by two-color molding using different resin materials. In other words, the connecting piece Ww531b is formed from a plurality of (two types in this embodiment) sites having different rigidity.

The connecting piece Ww531b is composed of a second connecting piece Ww531b2 formed of a resin material having a rigidity different from that of the first connecting piece Ww531b1 and the first connecting piece Ww531b1. The engaging portions W530a (see FIG. 76) are arranged side by side in the protruding direction (arrow LR direction).

As a result, when cutting the connecting piece Ww531b using a cutting tool (not shown), the tip of the cutting tool can be easily rotated. Specifically, for example, the first connecting piece Ww531b1 is molded using a resin material having a hardness higher than that of the second connecting piece Ww531b2, the cutting tool is composed of nippers and scissors, and the connecting piece Ww531b is between a pair of blades. When the connecting piece Ww531b is cut by sandwiching the first connecting piece Ww531b1, the second connecting piece Ww531b2 is likely to be cut with respect to the first connecting piece Ww531b1.

Therefore, the second connecting piece Ww531b2 can be easily cut with respect to the first connecting piece Ww531b1, and the blade of the cutting tool can be easily rotated. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

Next, the protective cover Wx500 according to the 39th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 107 (b). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 107 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the substrate box Wx100 according to the 39th embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section of the LXXXXIIa portion of FIG. 76 (a).

As shown in FIG. 107 (b), the connecting piece Wx531b of the protective cover Wx500 according to the 39th embodiment is in the direction from the first connecting piece Wx531b1 and the front wall portion W520 toward the back wall portion W510 (arrow FB direction, FIG. It is composed of a second connecting piece Wx531b2 whose dimensions in (see 76) are smaller than those of the first connecting piece Wx531b1.

The first connecting piece Wx531b1 and the second connecting piece Wx531b2 are arranged side by side in the protruding direction (arrow LR direction) of the engaging portion W530a (see FIG. 76), and the connecting piece Wx531b is substantially L-shaped in cross-sectional view. It is formed in a shape.

As a result, when the cutting tool is composed of nippers and scissors and the connecting piece Wx531b is sandwiched between a pair of blades to cut the connecting piece Wx531b, it is easy to cut the second connecting piece Wx531b2 with respect to the first connecting piece Wx531b1. It can easily rotate the blade of the cutting tool. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the worker (clerk) to recognize that the main control board (not shown) may have been tampered with by the illicit person.

Next, the protective cover Wy500 according to the 40th embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 107 (c). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 107 (c) is a partial rear view of the protective cover Wy500 of the substrate box Wy100 according to the 40th embodiment. In the description of FIG. 107 (c), FIG. 88 (b) will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 107 (c), the protective cover Wy500 of the substrate box Wy100 according to the 40th embodiment includes a cutting portion Wy550. Further, the connecting piece We531a is arranged at a predetermined distance from the cutting portion Wy550.

The cutting portion Wy550 is formed to have a smaller width dimension in the direction of connecting the pair of connecting pieces W531b (in the direction of arrow UD) as it goes from the engaging portion Wy530a toward the connecting portion W512 side (arrow L direction side). In other words, the cut portion Wy550 is formed at an acute angle in the rear view. This makes it easier to cut the seal WSL.

In the state where the engaging portion Wy530a is connected to the protective cover Wy500, the cutting portion Wy550 is arranged so as to be surrounded by the back wall portion W510 and the connecting portion W512. As a result, it is possible to prevent the worker (clerk) from coming into contact with the cut portion Wy550 and being injured.

The distance between the connecting piece W531a and the cutting portion Wy550 facing each other is the distance between the front surface of the flat surface portion We320 of the box base We300 and the space formed by the cutout portions We226 and We325 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). (See FIG. 88 (b)).

As a result, the engaging portion Wy530a is separated from the protective cover Wy500, and the side surface of the connecting piece We531a on the cutting portion Wy550 side (arrow D direction side) is brought into contact with the front surface of the flat surface portion We320, thereby cutting out the cutting portion Wy550. It can be accepted (arranged) in the space formed by the parts We226 and We325. As a result, it is possible to reduce the trouble of searching for the notch portions We226 and We325, and it is possible to easily perform the cutting work of the seal seal WSL.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment. The same applies to the following modification (another embodiment), in which a part or all of the configuration in one modification is combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in another modification. It may be a modification of. The embodiment to which the modification shown below is applied is arbitrary, and any modification (combination or replacement of modification) may be applied to any embodiment.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the rotary operation unit A400b is configured in an operation mode in which tilting and expansion are combined has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movement of the base plate member A430 and the movement of the moving member A440 may be used to move the door-shaped door member that slides in the left-right direction.

In this case, an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction formed on the first door member arranged on the front side of the base plate member A430 with a columnar portion projecting forward from the rotational tip portion of the base plate member A430. A columnar portion that is supported by the first support portion of the moving member A440 and is projected forward from the rotational tip portion of the moving member A440 in the vertical direction formed on the second door member arranged on the front side of the moving member A440. By supporting the second support portion having an elongated elongated hole shape, the first door member and the second door member can be slid and moved in the left-right direction in conjunction with the tilting operation of the rotary operation unit A400b.

The first door member is arranged on the outer side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the second door member, and the rotating tip of the base plate member A430 during the sliding movement of the first door member and the second door member. The portion is guided in the vertical direction on the first support portion, and the rotating tip portion of the moving member A440 is guided in the vertical direction on the second support portion.

In this case, the left-right position and the moving speed of the first door member and the second door member correspond to the left-right position and the moving speed of the rotating tip portion of the base plate member A430 and the moving member A440. Therefore, with respect to the first door member that moves based on the lateral component of the rotational displacement centered on the rotary shaft rod AJ1, the moving member A440 is added to the lateral component of the rotational displacement centered on the rotary shaft rod AJ1. Since the amount of movement is increased by the amount of extension in the longitudinal direction, the moving speed of the second door member can be configured to be larger than the moving speed of the first door member.

As the base plate member A430 moves from the effect standby state to the overhanging state, the lateral component of the rotational displacement centered on the rotary shaft rod AJ1 gradually decreases, so that the first door member retracts to the left and right outside. The moving speed of the first door member in the left-right direction is also gradually reduced (when the driving speed of the drive motor MT1 is constant, the moving speed of the first door member in the left-right direction is gradually reduced).

On the other hand, the left-right component of the rotational displacement of the moving member A440 centered on the rotary shaft rod AJ1 basically gradually decreases toward the overhanging state, but the moving member A440 gradually decreases as it approaches the tilting end side, and the longitudinal direction increases. The amount that extends to becomes large. Therefore, the moving speed of the second door member in the left-right direction from the position where the second door member retracts to the left and right outside increases on the tilting end side where the moving member A440 extends (the driving speed of the drive motor MT1 is constant). In this case, the moving speed of the second door member in the left-right direction increases toward the drive motor MT1).

Therefore, especially on the tilting end side of the rotary operation unit A400b, the moving speed of the first door member and the moving speed of the second door member at the same point can be greatly different, and the effect of the effect of using the door member can be obtained. Can be improved.

In the present embodiment, since the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A500 are configured as a pair on the left and right, the door members are configured to be moved by the operation units A400 and A500, respectively, and the third symbol is displayed. An effect device capable of executing an effect of closing the door on the front side of the device 81 (making sure that there is no gap in front view between the edges of the left and right door members on the tip side in the moving direction) may be configured.

Further, a door member that is moved in the left-right direction by the first operation unit A400 may be configured so that most (or the whole) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be hidden. In this case, the door member moved in the left-right direction by the second operation unit A500 may be configured so that most (or the whole) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be hidden.

In the present embodiment, the first operation unit A400 is arranged on the front side of the second operation unit A500. Therefore, for example, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 by the door member moved by the first operation unit A400. It is also possible to configure the arrangement of the second operation unit A500 so that the player does not know (hide) the arrangement of the second operation unit A500 in a state where the entire unit is hidden. As a result, even if the door member moved by the first operation unit A400 moves to retract from the front side of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display is performed by the door member moved by the second operation unit A500. Since the device 81 is hidden, it is possible to configure a state in which the display of the third symbol display device 81 is still not shown. As a result, the player's attention to the door member can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the change in the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b from the effect standby state causes the moving member A440 to be displaced in the longitudinal direction first due to the shape of the functional elongated hole A444, and then the moving member A440. Displacement of the direction switching member A450 in the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the above has occurred, but the displacement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the functional elongated hole A444 is similarly moved by omitting the first parallel portion A444a and moving the forming position of the inclined portion A444b by the length of the first parallel portion A444a to the rotation tip side of the moving member A440. The second parallel portion A444c may also be extended so as to be connected to the end portion of the inclined portion A444b. According to such a shape, the change in the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b from the effect standby state is started from a state in which the displacement of the moving member A440 and the displacement of the direction switching member A450 occur at the same time, and then the moving member A440 is started. It is possible to generate a displacement that shifts to a state in which only the displacement of is generated.

Further, a reverse inclined portion formed by an elongated hole that inclines toward the center side in the lateral direction of the moving member A440 as it approaches the rotating shaft rod AJ1 is formed from the end portion of the inclined portion A444b on the rotating shaft rod AJ1 side. You can do it. According to such a shape, the change in the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b from the effect standby state is caused by the displacement in the direction in which the moving member A440 extends in the longitudinal direction and the displacement in the direction in which the direction switching member A450 spreads in the lateral direction. It starts from the state where it occurs at the same time, and then shifts to the state where the displacement in the direction in which the moving member A440 extends in the longitudinal direction and the displacement in the direction in which the direction switching member A450 approaches (toward the center side) occur at the same time. Can cause various displacements.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the functional elongated hole A444 is composed of a pair of symmetrical shapes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair may be asymmetrically configured. In this case, since the timing and displacement amount at which the left direction switching member A450 starts to be displaced and the timing and displacement amount at which the right direction switching member A450 starts to be displaced can be different from each other, it is possible to configure the surrounding situation. It is possible to configure a displacement mode suitable for the above (a different displacement can be generated on the left and right in consideration of the displacement amount and the displacement timing so as not to hit an obstacle).

In the first embodiment, the case where the moving member A440 moves in the linear direction with respect to the base plate member A430 when the rotating operation unit A400b rotates is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the rotation operation unit A400b rotates, another rotating member arranged in the rotation operation unit A400b may be configured to rotate. In this case, it is possible to cause a change in the visual appearance mode different from the change in the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b.

In the first embodiment, the case where the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b does not change at the start of tilting has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by designing the shape of the guide slot A414 so that the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b is changed from the start of tilting, the operating resistance of the rotary operation unit A400b at the start of tilting can be increased, so that the tilting operation unit A400b can be tilted. It is possible to easily maintain the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b in the starting posture.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the tilting direction operation and the rising direction operation of the rotary operation unit A400b are operated by the driving force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to execute a movement mode that does not depend on the driving force, such as canceling the generation of the driving force from the intermediate position and executing the tilting by its own weight. In this case, the operation mode of the rotary operation unit A400b can be different depending on whether the rotation operation unit A400b is operated by the driving force or not by the driving force, and the variation of the operation can be increased. Further, since the duration of driving can be shortened, the useful life of the driving motor AMT1 can be extended.

In the first embodiment, the case where the moving member A440 is arranged so as to partially overlap the front side of the base plate member A430 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a metal rod extending in the direction of the rotation tip is arranged on the base plate member A430, and a moving member A440 is arranged on the rotation tip side of the metal rod so as to be guided so as to be slidably displaceable in the direction in which the metal rod extends. By providing the base plate member A430 and the moving member A440, the base plate member A430 and the moving member A440 may not overlap each other in the front view. In this case, since the front side of the base plate member A430 is not hidden by the moving member A440, the front side portion of the base plate member A430 can be used for the effect.

In the first embodiment, the case where the change in the outer shape of the rotary operation unit A400b occurs corresponding to the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, another drive device for switching the presence or absence of a change in the outer shape may be prepared. By switching the shape of the guide elongated hole A414 and the shape of the functional elongated hole A444 by this drive device, a plurality of types of outer shapes of the rotary operation unit A400b corresponding to the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b are prepared. be able to.

By configuring the moving member A440 and the direction switching member A450 to be driven and displaced by another drive device, the moving member A440 and the direction switching member A450 can be simultaneously moved when the posture of the rotary operation unit A400b does not change. It may be configured to be displaceable. For example, the rotary operation unit A400b is configured to reach the tilted end without changing the outer shape, and at the tilted end, the moving member A440 and the direction switching member A450 can be simultaneously driven and displaced by another drive device. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the rotary operation unit A400b.

In the first embodiment, the case where the operating speed of the drive motor AMT1 is constant and the rotational operation unit A400b operates in such a manner that the angular velocity of the rotational operation gradually decreases, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by gradually increasing the drive speed of the drive motor AMT1 in consideration of the amount of decrease in the angular velocity, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit A400b can be executed even in the control mode in which the angular velocity of the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit A400b is constant. You can do it.

In the first embodiment, the case where the operating resistance of the rotating plate member A662 changes due to the change of the air resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the frictional resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 (for example, the contact resistance due to the plate member in contact from a direction orthogonal to the moving direction) may be changed, or the viscous resistance applied to the rotating plate member A662 (for example, a damper) may be changed. The resistance due to the member or the like) may be changed.

In the first embodiment, the light irradiation from the light emitting substrate A720 sandwiched between the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the irradiation surface side of the light emitting substrate may be arranged so as to face the end faces of the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740.

In this case, the front side plate member A730 (or the rear side plate member A740) is irradiated with light from the light emitting substrate A720 (irradiation in the direction along the extending direction of the plate), while the rear side plate member A740 (or the front side plate) is irradiated. To the member A730), another light emitting substrate (light emitting substrate A720 whose posture differs from that of the light emitting substrate A720 by 90 degrees) in which the arrangement surface of the light irradiation portion is arranged to face the light incident end surface of the rear side plate member A740 (or the front side plate member A730). It may be configured so that light irradiation from the substrate) is performed. As a result, even when the thickness of the front side plate member A730 or the rear side plate member A740, which is considered difficult to handle depending on the light emitting substrate A720, is large, it is possible to easily inject light at an appropriate position.

In the first embodiment, the case where the projecting portion A751a of the front cover member A750 and the light emitting substrate A720 are arranged at intervals has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion A751a may be designed in a dimensional relationship that can apply a pressing force to the light emitting substrate A720. In this case, since the pressing force applied to the light emitting substrate A720 can be divided by the number of the projecting portions A751a, the arrangement of the light emitting substrate A720 can be stabilized.

The case where the projecting portion A751a of the front cover member A750 is formed with the same shape for one purpose of diffusing light has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the curvature of the projecting portion A751a at the position on the left side of the front light emitting portion A724 (the position opposite to the irradiation direction, the outer side of the front plate member A730) is on the right side of the front light emitting portion A724 (on the irradiation direction side). The position and the curvature of the projecting portion A751a at the front side plate member A730) may be increased. In this case, since the diffusion angle of the projecting portion A751a on the side close to the front side plate member A730 can be reduced, the diffused light illuminates the front side plate member A730 widely, and the visibility of the line-shaped light by the line-shaped groove portion A732 is improved. It can be avoided to lower it.

In the first embodiment, it has been described that the light emitting substrate A720 is provided with the light emitting portions A724 and A725 that irradiate the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 with light, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light emitting portion that irradiates the front cover member A750 from the light emitting substrate A720 may be arranged. In this case, since the light emitting portions A724 and A725 are arranged near the end portion of the light emitting substrate A720, the front cover member A750 is irradiated with light at a position that does not interfere with the light emitted from the light emitting portions A724 and A725. It is possible to facilitate the provision of the portion and avoid the interference of light.

In the first embodiment, the case where the line-shaped groove portion A732 of the front side plate member A730 is formed according to the shape of the illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. formed on the thin-walled resin plate A743 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the line-shaped groove portion A732 may be formed with a figure or an illustration shape different from the illustration formed on the thin-walled resin plate A743. In this case, when the line-shaped groove portion A732 emits light (when the shape of the line-shaped groove portion A732 emits light) and when the line-shaped groove portion A732 does not emit light (when the illustration formed on the thin-walled resin plate A743 can be seen). The difference in appearance can be increased.

The line-shaped groove A732 may be formed not only on the front plate member A730 but also on the thin resin plate A743 (or, the front plate member A730 may be arranged before and after the light emitting substrate A720). In this case, if a highly directional LED is also used for the rear light emitting portion A725, it is possible to realize a light effect that allows the line-shaped light to be visually recognized even on the thin-walled resin plate A743.

Further, not only the thin-walled resin plate A743 but also the front side plate member A730 may be formed with an illustration including a specific character, logo, etc. (or, the rear side plate member A740 may be arranged before and after the light emitting substrate A720. The front and rear arrangement of the front side plate member A730 and the rear side plate member A740 may be reversed.

In each of these cases, the directivity of the front light emitting unit A724 and the rear light emitting unit A725 may be selected according to the purpose (the higher the directivity, the easier it is to cause total reflection, and the lower the directivity, the total reflection occurs. Since it is difficult, it is easy to illuminate a wide range of the side surface of the plate member). Further, the shape of the illustration including the specific character, logo, etc. formed may be the same or different between the member arranged on the front side and the member arranged on the rear side of the light emitting substrate A720. ..

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side plate member A730, the light emitting substrate A720, and the rear side plate member A740 are positioned by the portion protruding from the front cover member A750 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the front cover member A750, the light emitting substrate A720, and the rear side plate member A740 may be positioned by a portion projecting back and forth from the front side plate member A730. In this case, since the projecting length of the portion projecting from the front plate member A730 can be shortened, the possibility of accidentally damaging the projecting portion by dropping the front plate member A730 during assembly is reduced. be able to.

Further, the front side plate member A730, the light emitting substrate A720, and the front cover member A750 may be positioned by the portion protruding from the rear side plate member A740. Since the rear side plate member A740 is different from the member on which the line-shaped groove portion is formed, the position of the protruding portion is not limited by the line-shaped groove portion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the protruding portion.

Further, the light emitting substrate A720, the front side plate member A730, and the rear side plate member A740 may be positioned only, and may not be positioned with the front cover member A750. In this case, the front cover member A750 can be removed while keeping the positions of the light emitting substrate A720, the front side plate member A730, and the rear side plate member A740 aligned. As a result, the front cover member A750 as a decorative portion can be easily replaced (replacement when it becomes dirty, replacement due to a change in specifications, etc.).

Various aspects of the forming position of the portion projecting for positioning are exemplified. For example, if positioning with the front cover member A750 is assumed, it is better to form the front cover member A750 at a rear position. On the other hand, if positioning with the front cover member A750 is not assumed, it may be formed at a position different from the rear position of the front cover member A750, as is the case with the fastening portion A733.

In the first embodiment, the case where the visibility of the sphere flowing down the rear flow path of the downstream guide member A803 is changed by the difference in the inclination angle in the direction of the line of sight in the left-right direction by the visual mode change sheet A806 has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. When the visibility is changed by the difference in the inclination angle in the direction of the line of sight in the left-right direction, there is an effect that the possibility that the player playing next to the player can peep at the flow of the ball can be reduced. For example, when the visibility mode change sheet A806 is configured so that the visibility of the sphere flowing down the rear flow path of the downstream guide member A803 changes due to the difference in the inclination angle in the direction of the line of sight in the vertical direction, the game is played. It has the effect of reducing the possibility of being peeped by others standing behind the person.

In the first embodiment, the case where the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 is attached to the front side of the plate-shaped main body A803a of the front member A803z has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 may be attached to the left and right outer surfaces of the extension plate A803b. In this case, when the left side flow path ATL1 and the right side flow path ATL2 are visually recognized from the left-right direction side, the left side flow path ATL1 and the right side flow path ATL2 are easily visually recognized, and the left side flow path ATL1 and It is possible to create a directional view in which it is difficult to visually recognize the right flow path ATL2.

In the first embodiment, the visibility of the ball is reduced when the player whose head is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 looks at the downstream side guide member A803 side with a side view by the visual mode change sheet A806. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a player who attaches a sheet having the same function as the visual mode change sheet A806 to the entire display surface of the third symbol display device 81 and arranges his head on the front side of the downstream guide member A803 is looking sideways at the third symbol. The display of the display device 81 may be configured so as to be difficult to see (light-shielded by the visual recognition mode change sheet A806). In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by not visually recognizing the display of the third symbol display device 81 in the situation where the ball flowing down behind the downstream guide member A803 is being focused on. Since the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 can be configured so as not to reach the player, the player can avoid the situation where the player receives the dazzling light and can rest his eyes. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the left side flow path ATL1 is difficult to be visually recognized is configured by the visual recognition mode change sheet A806, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the case where it is difficult to visually recognize may be the right flow path ATL2, the left side flow path ATL1 and the right side flow path ATL2, and the selection thereof is arbitrary. The right flow path ATL2 is a flow path that guides the ball to the second winning opening 640, but the shape of the left flow path ATL1 is deformed so that the ball flowing down the left side flow path ATL1 is guided to the specific winning opening 65a. By configuring it, depending on the design of the visual mode change sheet A806, it is easy to visually recognize only the ball guided to the second winning opening 640, or it is easy to visually recognize only the ball guided to the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to produce such as.

For example, assuming that the visual mode change sheet A806 is arranged so as to cover the front side of the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2, the visual mode change sheet A806 covering the front side of the left flow path ATL1 is in the front view and the diagonal direction to the left. The visual mode change sheet A806, which covers the front side of the right flow path ATL2, is designed so that the transparency is high in the directional view from the right side, but the transparency is low in the directional view from the right oblique direction. When designed so that the transparency is high in the directional view from the direction but low in the directional view from the left oblique direction, the transparency of the left flow path ATL1 and the right flow path ATL2 is high in the front view. However, while the transparency of the left flow path ATL1 is high when viewed from the diagonally left direction, the transparency of the right flow path ATL2 is low, and the transparency of the left flow path ATL1 is low when viewed from the diagonally right direction. On the other hand, the transparency of the right flow path ATL2 can be increased.

Further, in this case, the transparency of the left side flow path ATL1 and the right side flow path ATL2 may be reduced when viewed from the front. In this case, it is possible to eliminate the situation where both the left side flow path ATL1 and the right side flow path ATL2 can be visually recognized at the same time. It is possible to make the side guide member A803 look into the game from above.

The surface of the visual mode change sheet A806 may be decorated with the shape of an illustration including a specific character, logo, or the like.

In the first embodiment, the case where the visibility of the flowing sphere is changed by the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a louver plate portion that does not transmit light is arranged between a pair of front and rear light transmitting plates, and the louver swings or bends to block the player's line of sight and to transmit light. You may be able to switch between.

Further, when an opening is formed in a pair of front and rear non-transparent plate members, for example, when the front plate member is configured to be able to translate with respect to the rear plate member, the opening formed in each plate member. Due to the deviation of the position in the front view, the back side can be visually recognized for the directional view passing through the inside of the front and rear openings, while the line of sight is blocked by the plate member for the directional view outside either the front or rear opening. This may be configured so that the back side cannot be visually recognized.

In the first embodiment, the case where the prize ball is paid out when the ball is detected by the detection sensor SE1 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the prize ball may not be paid out. As an application when the prize ball is not paid out, for example, it is assumed to be used in a gaming machine that allows the type of jackpot game (number of rounds, etc.) to be selected based on the detection of the ball by the detection sensor SE1. In such a gaming machine, it is considered that the attention to the detection sensor SE1 is extremely reduced except for the timing of selecting the type of the jackpot game. Therefore, the visual mode change sheet A806 is arranged in front of the detection sensor SE1 to hide the detection sensor SE1. It makes sense.

Further, as another application when the prize balls are not paid out, for example, the detection sensor SE1 is arranged on the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a, and the passage of the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game is detected. In such a case, it is expected to be used for a gaming machine used as a "V winning opening (specific area)" in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is controlled to shift to a predetermined advantageous state. In such a gaming machine, the ball is not guided to the detection sensor SE1 except during the jackpot game, so that the attention to the detection sensor SE1 may be extremely reduced except during the jackpot game. It is meaningful to arrange the visual mode change sheet A806 to hide the detection sensor SE1.

If the player moves his / her head to the front position of the visual mode change sheet A806 during the big hit, the visual mode change sheet A806 can be seen through and the detection sensor SE1 on the back side thereof can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction that the detection sensor SE1 is difficult to see during the jackpot game.

Further, for example, when a prize ball is paid out, a number (“+1”, “+3”, etc.) corresponding to the number of payouts may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the detection of the ball. good. In this case, the player can understand that the prize ball has been paid out from the display of the third symbol display device 81 even when the ball flowing down behind the downstream guide member A803 cannot be visually recognized. , It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the first embodiment, in the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810, the front side plate member A840 is provided with the line-shaped groove portion A842 to enable a light effect such that the outline of the light is visually recognized, while the rear side plate member A850 is provided with the rear side plate member A850. Although the case where the line-shaped groove portion A842 is not formed and the light effect is performed by uniform surface emission has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the line-shaped groove A842 may be formed not only on the front plate member A840 but also on the rear plate member A850. In this case, if LEDs having high directivity are also adopted for the edge light emitting portions A833 and A837, it is possible to realize a light effect that allows the rear side plate member A850 to visually recognize the line-shaped light.

Further, not only the rear side plate member A850 but also the front side plate member A840 may be formed with an illustration including a specific character, logo, etc., or the front side plate member A840 and the rear side plate member A850 may be arranged in reverse. You may.

In each of these cases, the directivity of the edge light emitting portions A823, A827, A833, and A837 may be selected according to the purpose (the higher the directivity, the easier it is to cause total reflection, and the lower the directivity, the more total reflection occurs. Since it is unlikely to occur, it is easy to illuminate a wide range of the side surface of the plate member). Further, the shape of the illustration including the specific character, logo, etc. formed by the front side plate member A840 and the rear side plate member A850 may be the same or different.

In the first embodiment, the front light emitting unit A724 and the rear light emitting unit A725 are configured so that the optical axes of the plurality of LEDs are parallel to each other, and the edge light emitting units A823 and A827 and the edge light emitting units A833 and A837 are The case where the optical axes of a plurality of LEDs are configured to be radial to each other (set in such a manner that the distance from the adjacent optical axis increases toward the tip side in the traveling direction) has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the relationship between these optical axes may be reversed.

In the second embodiment, the case where the linear portion of the guide elongated hole A2414 extends in the direction of inclination has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the linear portion may be configured to extend in the horizontal direction. In this case, the difference in operating resistance between the outward path and the return path can be reduced.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the solenoid A4940 for driving the light guide displacement member A4920 is individually prepared has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device for the electric accessory 640a may also be used. In this case, it is possible to easily match the operation timing of the electric accessory 640a with the operation timing of the light guide displacement member A4920.

Further, instead of the light guide displacement member A4920, a movable accessory (for example, the first operation unit A400) that mainly performs an operation of projecting to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 is used as a base through the internal region of the center frame A86. A movable accessory may be used to block the line of sight of the sphere by being configured so as to project to the front side of the plate A60 and being movable to a position where the line of sight to the flow path of the sphere is blocked. .. In this case, the solenoid A4940 can be eliminated because the drive device that is individual to the movable accessory may also be used as the drive device for blocking the line of sight to the flow path of the sphere.

In the fourth embodiment, if an illustration including a specific character, logo, or the like is formed on the front guide plate portion A4931 of the lining member A4930, the line-shaped groove portion A4921a can be made difficult to see by the illustration. As a result, the appearance of the ball guide unit A4900 can be improved when the light emitting means A4933a is not turned on. Further, by forming the line-shaped groove portion A4921a in a shape corresponding to the illustration formed on the front side guide plate portion A4931, the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the fourth embodiment, the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 may be attached to the guided plate portion A4921 of the light guide displacement member A4920. In this case, even if the line of sight of the player does not change, the relative positional relationship between the line of sight of the player and the visual recognition mode change sheet A806 changes due to the displacement of the light guide displacement member A4920, so that the player can see the line of sight. It is possible to cause a case where the visibility of the sphere flowing down behind the light guide displacement member A4920 is changed even though the above is not changed.

In the fourth embodiment, the light incident on the guided plate portion A4921 of the light guide displacement member A4920, the number and arrangement of the light emitting means, the selection of the light emitting means to be lit, and the design of the structure will be described in the first embodiment. All or all of the structures of the auxiliary light guide plate unit A700b and the auxiliary light guide plate unit A810 may be diverted.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the columnar projecting member A5448 is pushed by the extension guide portion A5438 to cause a relative displacement with respect to the moving member A5440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by configuring the gear and rack that rotate in teeth based on the tilt angle of the rotary operation unit A5400b and the columnar protrusion member A5448 to interlock, the columnar protrusion corresponds to the tilt angle of the rotary motion unit A5400b. The member A5448 may be displaced, or a drive device for driving the columnar projecting member A5448 may be arranged in the rotary operation unit A5400b and the columnar projecting member A5448 may be driven and displaced by the drive control of the drive device. ..

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, one engaging portion W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a are connected (arranged), and a pair of (two) engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wm530b, Wm530b, Wm530b, Wm530b, Wm530b, Wm530b, Wm530b, Wm530b, Wm530b Although the case where is connected (arranged) is described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a , Wy530a or engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b may be omitted.

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, the recesses W224a and W224b are front surfaces on the flat surface portions W320, W4320, We320, Wj320, Wm320 and Ws320 engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b and Wu530b. W531a, W531b, which are the connecting pieces W531a and W531b of the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b, may be arranged at positions where they overlap the recesses W224a and W224b.

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, At Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500, the back wall portions W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 face the front wall portions W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520. The standing portion W222 may be erected on the side surface. By arranging the standing portion W222 on the tip side (opposite side of the left wall portion W502) of the back wall portions W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510, the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wx500 , The standing portion W222 can easily damage the sealing seal WSL.

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, the sealing seal WSL may be cut by using the standing portions W540, Wc540, Wd540, and the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b may be sealed using the inclined portion W532 (protruding tip). As a result, the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, W5 The function of easily deforming the Wu530b elastically and the function of cutting the seal WSL can be combined, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, the standing portions W540, Wc540, and Wd540 are non-molded, and the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, Box covers W200, W2200, W4200 with We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 reversed. , W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 cover side engaged part W210 and box base W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300 , Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 may be acceptable to the base-side engaged portion W310. As a result, a person who commits fraud mistakenly makes a protective cover W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Box covers W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200 with Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 reversed. , Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 cover side engaged part W210 and box base W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 base side engaged part W310 W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, Wv530a , Wu530b and the sealing seal WSL can be brought into contact with each other to provide an opportunity to damage the sealing seal WSL.

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, one engaging portion W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a are arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more (plural) engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wv530a May be disposed. When a plurality of engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, Wv530a, Wy530a , Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a may be configured to be engaged by the protrusion Wr214b of the cover portion Wr214 in the 33rd embodiment. That is, in the plurality of engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, the direction of elastic deformation can be opposite. Therefore, for example, the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, which are engaged with the protrusion W221 in order to disengage the protrusion W221 in the seventh embodiment, By elastically deforming (displacement) Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a, the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wg530a, Wj530a The Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a can be displaced in a direction in which the engagement with the protrusion Wr214b is maintained. As a result, the box cover W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 and the box base W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300. , Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500 , Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 can be suppressed from being illegally removed.

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, the case where the pair (two) engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b are arranged has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, one engaging portion W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b may be arranged, or three or more may be arranged. When three or more engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b are arranged, at least one of the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b is the 34th embodiment. It may be configured to be engaged by the protrusion Ws328 of the flat surface portion Ws320. That is, in the plurality of engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b, the direction of elastic deformation can be opposite. Therefore, for example, in order to disengage the protrusion W312c in the seventh embodiment, the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b that are engaged with the protrusion W312c are elastically deformed (displaced). Thereby, the engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b engaged with the protrusion Ws328 in the 34th embodiment can be displaced in the direction in which the engagement with the protrusion Ws328 is maintained. .. As a result, the box cover W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 and the box base W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300. , Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500 , Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 can be suppressed from being illegally removed.

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, the protective covers W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, One engaging portion W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a on the back wall portions W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 in Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500, Wp500, Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500. We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a are arranged, and a pair (two) engaging portions on the front wall portions W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 side. W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b are arranged, and a different number of engagements are provided between the back wall portion W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 side and the front wall portion W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 side. Although the case where the portion is arranged has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the rear wall portion W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 side and the front wall portion W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 side are in relation to each other. The same number of joints may be arranged. For example, the back wall portions W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 side engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wv530a, Wp530a Two engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b may be provided on the front wall portions W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, and Wq520.

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, between the pair of engaging portions W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, and Wu530b in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), The case where W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a are arranged has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this, and a pair of engagements in the rear view. W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Ww530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a May be disposed. That is, the engaging portions W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, and Wy530a may be arranged unevenly in one direction.

In the 7th to 40th embodiments, the inclined surface formed by the notch portions W226, We226, W325, and We325 may be formed in a straight line, and the surface is opposite to the surface on which the sealing seal WSL is attached. It may be formed in a curved shape that is concave toward the surface.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the protrusion W4534 is formed so as to project from the engaging portions W4530a and W4530b toward the opposite side of the back wall portion W510 and the front wall portion W520 in a quadrangular pyramid shape has been described. The shape is not limited, and may be formed into a polygonal pyramid such as a triangular pyramid, a conical shape, a polygonal column such as a quadrangular prism or a triangular column, or a columnar shape. When it is formed in a polygonal columnar shape or a columnar shape, the fracture surface of the sealing seal WSL can be torn off, and when the broken (damaged) sealing seal WSL is reused, a trace of breaking (damage) is given to the operator. It can be easily recognized.

In the tenth to twelfth embodiments, the thirty-second embodiment and the thirty-seventh embodiment, the box covers W200, W4200, Wq200, Wv200 and the box bases W300, W5300, W6300 are provided with protective covers W4500, W5500, Wq500, Wv500. At the time of attachment, the sealing seal WSL may be damaged by the protrusions W4534, W5534, Wq534, Wv534.

In the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment, a part of the pair of both end wall portions W223 and W321 may be non-formed. For example, when a part of the pair of both end wall portions W223 and W321 on the side opposite to the sealing unit W400 (the side in the direction of arrow L) is not formed, the box cover W200 and the protective cover W5500 for the box bases W5300 and W6300 are formed. Before the engagement hole W533 and the protrusion W312c of the engagement portion W5530b are engaged with each other, or when the protective cover W5500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box bases W5300 and W6300, the engagement hole W533 and the engagement hole W533 After the engagement with the protrusion W312c is released, the protective cover W5500 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). As a result, the protrusion W5534 can be brought into contact with the sealing seal WSL, and the sealing seal WSL can be damaged.

In the eleventh embodiment and the twelfth embodiment, the sealing seal WSL may be cut by using the protrusion W5534 of the engaging portion W5530b cut from the protective cover W5500. As a result, it is not necessary to carry a cutting tool (not shown), and the opening work of the box cover W200 and the box base W300 can be facilitated.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the recess W6326 is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the regulated state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion W5534 is used. May be formed so as to extend to the side opposite to the protrusion W312c (the side in the direction of arrow L). For example, half of the protrusion W312c side (arrow R direction side) of the range in which the protective cover W5500 is displaced so that the recess W6326 disengages the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533 (displaced to be illegally removed). By extending to the first half of the range to be formed), it is possible to form a trace (damage) on the sealing seal WSL and to prevent the protective cover W5500 from being removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300. Can be compatible with each other.

That is, when the engaging portion 5530b is elastically deformed without cutting the connecting pieces W531a and W531b and the engagement between the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533 is released, the protrusion W5534 is accepted by the recess W6326. By displacing the engaging portion 5530b toward the side opposite to the protrusion W312c (the side in the direction of arrow L), a trace (damage) can be formed on the sealing seal WSL. On the other hand, the protrusion W5534 is brought into contact with the inner wall of the recess W6326 on the side opposite to the protrusion W312c, so that the displacement of the engaging portion 5530b toward the side opposite to the protrusion W312c (arrow L direction side) is restricted. , It is possible to prevent the protective cover W5500 from being removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W6300.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the recess W6326 is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the regulated state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion W5534 is used. May be formed so as to extend toward the protrusion W312c side (arrow R direction side) on the side opposite to the protrusion W312c (arrow L direction side). For example, the recess W6326 displaces the protective cover W5500 in order to disengage the protrusion W312c from the engagement hole W533. Therefore, it may be formed by extending to the latter half of the displacement range).

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the concave portion W6326 is formed at a position overlapping the protrusion W5534 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) in the regulated state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion W5534 is used. May be formed at a position opposite to the protrusion W312c (on the side in the direction of arrow L). The protective cover W5500 may be formed in the middle of the displacement range in order to disengage the protrusion W312c and the engagement hole W533.

In the 14th embodiment, the surface of the connecting piece W8531b facing the seal WSL or the surface opposite to the side facing the seal WSL may be formed non-parallel to the seal WSL.

In the 14th embodiment, at least one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b may be formed on a curved surface that is convex toward the opposite side to the opposite side. As a result, the cutting tool can be easily rotated along the curved surface formed on at least one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.

In the 14th embodiment, at least one of the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b may be formed on a curved surface that is concave toward the opposite side.

In the 14th embodiment, the case where the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W8531b is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the pair of connecting pieces W8531b is formed. One of the side surfaces may be formed so as to be inclined with respect to the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220), and the other side of the pair of side surfaces may be formed orthogonal to the sealing seal WSL (flat surface portion W220).

In the fifteenth embodiment, the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9351b2 of the connecting piece W9531b may be formed in a substantially elliptical shape in a cross-sectional view. As a result, the cutting tool can be easily rotated along the curved surface, and the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.

In the fifteenth embodiment, a case where a step portion is formed at the boundary between the first part W9351b1 and the second part W9351b2 of the connecting piece W9351b (the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9351b2 are directly connected) has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a connecting portion for smooth connection may be provided between the first portion W9531b1 and the second portion W9351b2. That is, the interposition portion has a shape in which the cross-sectional shape of the interposition portion gradually changes from the cross-sectional shape of the first portion W9351b1 to the cross-sectional shape of the second portion W9351b2 as the interposition portion moves from the first portion W9351b1 to the second portion W9351b2. Formed as a site. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of stress concentration in the connecting portion of the first part W9531b1 and the second part W9351b2, and it is possible to secure the strength of the connecting piece WV9531b. Further, the intermediate portion makes it easy to displace the cutting tool from the second part W9351b2 toward the first part W9351b1.

In the fifteenth embodiment, when the engaging portion W530a is illicitly elastically deformed, the sealing seal WSL may be damaged by the first portion W9351b1.

In the 16th embodiment, the cut portion Wa550 is arranged at a position deviated from the substantially center of the left wall portion W502 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) toward the front wall portion W520 side (arrow F direction side), and the front surface. The posture in which the wall portion W520 and the back wall portion W510 are opposite to each other (the posture in which the back wall portion W510 faces the front side of the front wall portion W520) When the protective cover Wa500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300, it is cut. The portion Wa550 may be arranged at a position facing the notch portions W226 and W325. As a result, even when the engaging portions W530a and W530b are cut and the protective cover Wa500 is displaced toward the sealing unit W400 side (arrow R direction side), it is possible to prevent the sealing seal WSL from being cut. On the other hand, the protective cover Wa500 is removed from the box cover W200 and the box base W300, and the protective cover Wa500 is attached to the box cover W200 and the box base W300 with the front wall portion W520 and the back wall portion W510 in opposite positions. The Wa550 can be arranged at a position facing the notches W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL can be cut using the cutting portion Wa550. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a person who commits fraud to use the cutting portion Wa550.

In the 16th embodiment, the case where the cut portion Wa550 is formed in the shape of a saw blade has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cut portion Wa550 may be formed in a straight line, and the protruding tip portion of the cut portion Wa550 is formed. It may be formed from a shape in which sin waves from 0 degrees to 180 degrees are connected. When the cut portion Wa550 is formed in a straight line, it may be formed in parallel with the sealing seal WSL, or at least a part thereof may be formed in an inclined manner. Since the cut portion Wa550 is formed parallel to the seal seal WSL, the fracture surface of the seal seal WSL can be formed in a torn form when the seal seal WSL is cut. This makes it difficult for a fraudster to join the fractured surfaces of the seal seal WSL without gaps and reuse the seal seal WSL.

In the 16th embodiment, the entire saw blade shape formed in the cut portion Wa550 is received in the space formed by the cutout portions W226 and W325, and the sealing seal WSL is formed on the flat portion W220 side and the flat portion W320 side. Although the case of separation has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this, and the sealing seal WSL on the flat surface portion W220 side and the flat surface portion W320 side may be partially connected (at least a part may be cut). .. In other words, the cut portion Wa550 may form a perforation (a shape in which the cut portion and the connecting portion are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction) on the seal seal WSL. As a result, the seal seal WSL can be easily cut (separated into the flat surface portion W220 side and the flat surface portion W320 side). On the other hand, when the connecting portion formed on the seal seal WSL is cut (broken), the fracture surface can be torn off, and when the cut (broken) seal seal WSL is reused, a trace of cutting is left. It can be easily recognized by the operator. Further, by displacing the protective cover Wa500 toward the side wall portion W212 side (arrow R direction side), it is possible to easily form a perforation on the sealing seal WSL.

In the 17th embodiment, the case where the blade portion Wb552 includes a tip portion formed in a conical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tip of the blade Wb552 may be formed in a columnar shape, and the cross-sectional shape of the tip of the blade Wb552 may be constant in the protruding direction (arrow LR direction). In other words, the tip of the blade Wb552 does not have to be sharply formed. As a result, when the sealing seal WSL is cut using the blade portion Wb552, the fracture surface of the sealing seal WSL can be formed in a torn form. This makes it difficult for a fraudster to join the fractured surfaces of the seal seal WSL without gaps and reuse the seal seal WSL. Further, the tip of the blade Wb552 may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid or a quadrangular pyramid, and the tip of the blade Wb552 may be formed in a polygonal prism such as a triangular prism or a quadrangular prism.

In the 17th to 20th embodiments, the 24th embodiment, and the 40th embodiment, the sealing seals on the flat surfaces W220 and We220 of the box covers W200, Wb200, and We200 or the flat surfaces W320 and We320 of the box base W300 and We300. Concavities and convexities may be formed on the surface to which the WSL is attached (the guide portion Wb560, Wd560, the lower wall portion W501, or the surface along which the connecting piece We531a is placed). As a result, the guide portions Wb560, Wd560, the lower wall portion W501, or the connecting piece We531a are attached to a pair of both end walls along the flat portions W220, We220 of the box covers W200, Wb200, We200 or the flat portions W320, We320 of the box base W300, We300. When displaced from one side of the portion W223 toward the other, the position of the fracture surface formed on the seal seal WSL between one end and the other end of the seal seal WSL in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is set in the front-rear direction. It can be changed in the direction of arrow FB. As a result, it is difficult for a fraudster to join the fractured surfaces of the sealing seal WSL without gaps and reuse the sealing seal WSL.

In the 19th embodiment, in addition to the fitting (engagement) between the upright portion Wd540 and the engaging hole W533, the protective cover Wd500 may include an engaging portion for engaging the engaging portion Wd530a. For example, an engaging portion is formed on the back wall portion W510 of the protective cover Wd500, and an end portion of the engaging portion Wd530a on the opposite side (inclined portion W532 side) of the connecting piece W531a is formed on the back wall portion W510. It may be engaged with the portion. As a result, the engaging portion Wd530a can be engaged at two different locations of the protective cover Wd500, and the engaging portion Wd530a can be firmly attached to the protective cover Wd500. Further, the posture of the engaging portion Wd530a can be easily maintained. As a result, the sealing work of the sealing seal WSL can be easily performed by using the engaging portion Wd530a.

In the 25th embodiment, the case where the elastic deformation regulating means Wj230 (the first regulating portion Wj240 and the second regulating portion Wj250) is formed on the flat surface portion Wj220 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the elastic deformation regulating is not always limited. The means Wj230 is formed on the back surface side (arrow B direction side) of the flat surface portion Wj320, and by combining the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300, the elastic deformation regulating means Wj230 engages with the engaging portion Wj530a in the regulated state. It may be arranged at a position inside the joint hole W533. By combining the box cover Wj200 and the box base Wj300, the elastic deformation regulating means Wj230 and the engaging portion Wj530a are engaged with each other. Since the box cover Wj200 includes a cover portion Wj214 and elastic deformation controlling means Wj230, the resin molding mold of the box cover Wj200 becomes complicated, whereas the elastic deformation controlling means Wj230 is formed on the box base Wj300 to form a box. The resin molding mold of the cover Wj200 can be simplified. As a result, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the 26th embodiment, the tip end portion of the engaging portion W530b2 may not be in contact with the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f (the engaging portion W530b2 may not be elastically deformed). As a result, it is possible to prevent one and the other of the pair of engaging portions W530b from being elastically deformed in different directions. As a result, the amount of elastic deformation of one (the other) of the pair of engaging portions W530b can be reduced, and one (the other) of the pair of engaging portions W530b can be hardly damaged.

In the 26th embodiment, the case where the locking portion Wk312f of the cover portion Wk312 is formed on the box base Wk300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the locking portion Wk312f is on the front side (arrow) of the side wall portion W212. It is formed on the surface on the F direction side), and by combining the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, the locking portion Wk312f is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with the tip end portion of the engaging portion W530b2 in the regulated state. Is also good. By combining the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300, the tip end portion of the engaging portion W530b2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion Wk312g of the locking portion Wk312f. Since the box base Wk300 includes a cover portion Wk312, the resin molding mold of the box base Wk300 becomes complicated, whereas the locking portion Wk312f is formed on the box cover W200 to form a resin molding mold of the box base Wk300. Can be simplified. As a result, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the 26th embodiment, the protective cover W500 may be formed with the engaging portion W530b1 or the engaging portion W530b2 at two or more locations, and the box base Wk300 may be formed with the protrusions W312c or the protrusions Wk312c at two or more locations. For example, when a pair of engaging portions W530b2 are formed on both ends of the protective cover W500 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and an engaging portion W530b1 is formed between the pair of engaging portions W530b2, the engaging portions W530b1 are engaged. Elastic deformation of the portion W530b1 toward the box cover W200 side (in the direction of arrow B) can be easily suppressed at both ends of the engaging portion W530b1, and the engaging portion W530b1 is illicitly elastically deformed to protect it from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300. The cover W500 can be made difficult to remove illegally. Further, for example, when a pair of engaging portions W530b1 are formed on both ends of the protective cover W500 in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) and an engaging portion W530b2 is formed between the pair of engaging portions W530b1. In the rear view, the engaging portion W530b2 can be arranged at a position overlapping the engaging portion W530a. As a result, the engaging portion W530a is illegally elastically deformed, and the protective cover W500 can be made difficult to be illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Wk300.

In the 27th embodiment, a notch may be formed in the connecting portion Wl535. As a result, the connecting portion Wl535 can be easily rotated (twisted).

In the 28th embodiment, the case where the regulation protrusion Wm228 is arranged at a position overlapping substantially the center of the extension portion Wm332 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be arranged below the regulation part Wm334. As a result, the engaging portion Wm530b can be made difficult to be elastically deformed illegally.

In the 34th embodiment, the case where the pair of protrusions Ws328 is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and only one (the other) of the pair of protrusions Ws328 is formed, and the other (one) of the pair of protrusions Ws328 is formed. The protrusion W312c according to the seventh embodiment may be formed at the position corresponding to. In other words, the protrusion Ws328 may be formed on one side (the other side) in the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), and the protrusion W312c may be formed on the other side (one side). As a result, one of the pair of engaging portions W530b of the protective cover W500 and the other can be elastically deformed in opposite directions. Therefore, by elastically deforming (displacement) one (other) engaging portion W530b in order to disengage the one (other) engaging portion W530b and the protrusion Ws328 (protrusion W312c), the other (one) The engaging portion W530b and the protrusion W312c (protrusion Ws328) can be displaced in a direction to maintain the engagement. As a result, it is possible to prevent the protective cover W500 from being illegally removed from the box cover W200 and the box base Ws300.

In the 35th embodiment, a connecting portion for connecting the protrusions Wt224b may be formed in a pair of notches Wt224b1 formed in the protrusion Wt224b. As a result, the strength of the protrusion Wt224b can be secured.

In the 35th embodiment, the case where the protrusion Wt224b is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in the cross-sectional view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the protrusion Wt224b is directed to the side opposite to the flat portion Wt220 in the cross-sectional view. It may be formed in a convex curved shape. As a result, the seal seal WSL can be easily attached to the protrusion Wt224b (the seal seal WSL can be prevented from peeling off from the protrusion Wt224b).

In the 35th embodiment, the case where the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b is formed to be substantially the same as the dimension of the connecting piece W531b of the engaging portion W530a in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. The dimension of the protrusion Wt224b may be formed smaller than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b, or may be formed larger than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b.

When the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is formed smaller than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b, the sealing seal WSL attached to the protrusion W531b is shielded by the connecting piece W531b to prevent fraud. It can be made invisible to the performer. This makes it easier for a fraudster to break the seal WSL with a cutting tool.

When the dimension of the protrusion Wt224b in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is formed larger than the dimension of the connecting piece W531b, the tip of the cutting tool is made to face the pair of side surfaces of the connecting piece W531b, so that the connecting piece W531b The cutting tool can be brought into contact with the sealing seal WSL without performing the operation of cutting the seal WSL, and the sealing seal WSL can be damaged.

In the 37th embodiment, the recess Wv229 may be formed so as to extend toward the side opposite to the pair of protrusions Wv534 (the side in the direction of arrow D). As a result, when the engaging portion Wv530a separated from the protective cover Wv500 is removed from the box cover Wv200, the protrusion Wv534 faces the flat portion W320 side (arrow F direction side) with the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as the rotation axis. The engaging portion Wv530a can be displaced in the extending direction (arrow D direction) of the recess Wv229 while maintaining the state in which the protrusion Wv534 is in contact with the sealing seal WSL. As a result, the trace (damage) formed on the sealing seal WSL can be increased.

In the 39th embodiment, the first connecting piece Wx531b1 and the second connecting piece Wx531b2 may be molded by two-color molding using different resin materials. For example, when the first connecting piece Wx531b1 is molded using a resin material having a higher rigidity than the second connecting piece Wx531b2, the shape of the first connecting piece Wx531b1 (from the front wall portion W520 to the back surface of the second connecting piece Wx531b2). In addition to the shape in which the size is formed large in the direction toward the wall portion W510), since it is molded using a highly rigid resin material, it is possible to easily cut the second connecting piece Wx531b2 with respect to the first connecting piece Wx531b1. The blade of the tool can be rotated more easily. As a result, the sealing seal WSL can be easily damaged by the tip of the cutting tool.

In the 39th embodiment, the case where the connecting piece Wx531b is formed in a substantially L-shape in a cross-sectional view has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the connecting piece Wx531b is formed in a substantially U-shape in a cross-sectional view and is open. The side to be sealed may be arranged so as to face the sealing seal WSL. Thereby, during cutting, the cutting resistance of the connecting piece Wx531b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) can be changed, and the cutting tool (not shown) can be easily rotated.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Displacement means whose outer shape changes during rotation>
An effect means having a displacement means configured to be tiltable about a predetermined rotation axis is provided, and the effect means changes the outer shape so as to extend at least in a direction away from the rotation axis while the displacement means is tilted. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it can be visually recognized.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a displacement means configured to be rotatable around the first axis and a drive means for operating the displacement means are provided, and the displacement means receives an urging force at the terminal position to brake. There is a gaming machine configured to be used (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144283).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if the displacement means is directed to tilt vigorously, the outer shape of the displacement means does not change at the time of tilting, so that the force is lacking and there is room for improvement in terms of the effect. There was a problem that there was.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the effect means is configured so that the outer shape can be changed while the displacement means is tilted, the force of changing the outer shape while the displacement means is vigorously tilted. A certain effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine A1 is configured to be capable of transitioning from a first state in which the outer shape of the displacement means being tilted is maintained to a second state in which the outer shape of the displacement means being tilted is changed while the displacement means is tilted. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the fact that.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, as the tilting motion of the displacement means progresses, the first state in which the outer shape is maintained shifts to the second state in which the outer shape changes, so that the tilting begins. It is possible to suppress the force required in the above and to facilitate the smooth start of the tilting motion.

The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be in the first state at the displacement end position on the side where tilting is started.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, it is possible to eliminate the need for a force for changing the outer shape at the start of tilting, so that the force required at the start of tilting can be limited to the force required for tilting. The required force can be reduced.

The gaming machine A2 or A3 includes a section in which the degree of change in the outer shape with respect to the tilt angle of the displacement means increases in the process of tilting the displacement means in the direction of transition from the first state to the second state. A game machine A4 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the change in the outer shape during the tilting of the displacement means in the second state is so far away from the side arranged in the first state (the more it is tilted). Since it becomes large, it is possible to associate the degree of inclination of the displacement means with the degree of change in the outer shape of the displacement means.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, the displacement means is a shaft-side means supported so as to be tiltable about the predetermined rotation axis, and a configuration means configured to be relatively displaceable with respect to the shaft-side means. The second posture is configured to be in the second posture by tilting from the first posture, and the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis is longer in the second posture than in the first posture. A game machine A5 characterized by being configured to be.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the direction of change in the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis is determined in one direction according to the direction of inclination. Therefore, the degree of effect can be increased as the tilt angle becomes larger.

That is, the more the displacement means is tilted, the more the constituent means are separated from the predetermined rotation axis. Therefore, the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means can be moved to the tilted tip side, and the momentum of tilting is due to the own weight of the displacement means. Since it can be assisted, it is possible to realize a vigorous tilting motion, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, as the displacement means is displaced in the opposite direction of tilting (raising direction), the constituent means are closer to the predetermined rotation axis, so that the position of the center of gravity of the displacement means can be moved to the rotation axis side. It is possible to reduce the force required for the rising motion.

In the game machine A5, the predetermined angle having the second posture as the terminal posture is more than the degree of change in the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis with respect to tilting at a predetermined angle with the first posture as the terminal posture. The gaming machine A6 is characterized by comprising a degree changing means for increasing the degree of change in the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis with respect to the inclination of the game machine A6.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of the game machine A5, the distance from the predetermined rotation axis of the constituent means can be greatly changed in the vicinity of the second posture even with a small tilt angle. It is possible to perform an effect of significantly changing the outer shape of the displacement means without significantly changing the arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the rotating shaft.

Further, when the displacement means causes a displacement (displacement in the direction opposite to the tilt) that rises from the second posture to the first posture, the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis is greatly changed after the start of the displacement (the distance between the constituent means and the predetermined rotation axis is greatly changed (). Since it can be shortened), the center of gravity of the displacement means can be moved to the predetermined rotation axis side at an early stage, and the force required for the rising displacement can be reduced.

In the game machine A5 or A6, the constituent means include a first constituent means that can be displaced in the radial direction of a circle centered on the predetermined rotation axis, and a second constituent means that can be displaced in a direction orthogonal to the radial direction. A game machine A7 characterized by providing means and means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the outer shape of the displacement means can be further different between the first posture and the second posture.

In the gaming machine A7, the gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the displacement of the second constituent means is started later than the start of the displacement of the first constituent means while the displacement means is tilted.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A7, the required force is reduced as compared with the case where the displacement of the first constituent means and the displacement of the second constituent means are started at the same time. Can be done.

In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the second constituent means is arranged on the shaft-side means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7 or A8, the displacement means can be visually recognized by the appearance shape in which the predetermined rotation axis side is bulged.

In the gaming machine A7 or A8, the gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the second constituent means is arranged in the constituent means.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A7 or A8, the displacement means can be visually recognized with a wide appearance shape on the side of the constituent means.

<Driving force transmission at a position away from the rotation axis>
A displacement unit that includes a displacement means that can be tilted around a predetermined rotation axis and a drive means that displaces the displacement means, and is arranged on the tilt tip side of the displacement means with respect to the predetermined rotation axis. The gaming machine B1 is configured such that the driving force of the driving means is transmitted to the displacement means via the above.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a displacement means configured to be rotatable around the first axis and a drive means for operating the displacement means are provided, and the displacement means receives an urging force at the terminal position to brake. There is a gaming machine configured to be used (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144283).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the structure of the displacement means on the side of the first axis tends to be large, and it becomes difficult to arrange the displacement means by moving the first axis to the corner of the arrangement space. there were. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the arrangement of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the driving force of the driving means is transmitted through the arrangement portion arranged on the tilted tip side of the displacement means, so that the structure of the displacement means on the side of the first axis is defined. It can be simplified, and it becomes easy to arrange the displacement means by moving the first axis to the corner of the arrangement space. Thereby, the arrangement of the displacement means can be improved.

The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the displacement direction of the arrangement portion can be changed while maintaining the direction of the driving force by the driving means in a predetermined direction while the displacement means is tilted. ..

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the displacement direction of the arrangement portion can be changed while maintaining the direction of the driving force of the driving means, so that the operation of the driving means can be changed. Even if it is monotonous, the displacement of the arrangement portion can be complicated.

In the gaming machines B1 or B2, the closer the displacement means is to the displacement end position on the tilting side, the closer the direction of the driving force applied to the arrangement portion is to the linear direction passing through the predetermined rotation axis and the arrangement portion. A game machine B3 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1 or B2, when the displacement means approaches the displacement end position on the tilting side by changing the direction of the driving force applied to the arrangement portion during tilting, It is possible to prevent the load generated in the tilting direction from becoming excessive.

As a result, even when the displacement means tilts at a high speed, the impact when the displacement means reaches the displacement end position on the tilt side can be easily softened, so that the durability of the displacement means can be improved. Can be done. In addition, a cushioning material for shock absorption can be eliminated.

A gaming machine B4, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the direction of the driving force of the driving means is configured to generate a load in a predetermined linear direction with respect to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to easily stabilize the driving force. Further, the ratio of the component of the driving force that faces the tilting direction of the displacement means and the component that faces in the direction orthogonal to the tilting direction of the displacement means is determined according to the position (posture) of the displacement means, so that the displacement The magnitude of the load in the tilting direction of the means can be made to correspond to the position (posture) of the displacement means.

In the game machine B4, the angle between the predetermined linear direction and the rotation direction component about the predetermined rotation axis in the movement direction of the contact portion of the displacement means abutting on the arrangement portion. B5 is characterized in that the larger the value is, the longer the distance between the arrangement portion and the predetermined rotation axis is.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, even in a situation where it is difficult to transmit the load in the tilting direction because the angle between the direction of the driving force and the displacement direction of the tilting displacement means is large. By increasing the distance between the arrangement portion to which the driving force is transmitted and the predetermined rotation axis, it is possible to easily avoid insufficient driving force for tilting the displacement means.

That is, by suppressing the local increase or decrease in the driving force required for tilting in the tilting range of the displacement means, the range of change in the required driving force is suppressed to a small size, and the selection of the driving force is facilitated. Can be done.

In the game machine B4 or B5, the displacement means can be displaced between the front position of the display device and the outer position of the display device, and the movement of the arrangement portion about the predetermined rotation axis at the front position. The angle between the direction and the predetermined linear direction is larger than the angle between the moving direction of the arrangement portion about the predetermined rotation axis at the outer position and the predetermined linear direction. Characteristic gaming machine B6.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B4 or B5, the momentum in the rotation direction at the front position can be reduced, so that the rotation operation can be easily stopped at the target position. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the operation of rotating at high speed during rotation while smoothly stopping the rotation at the front position.

The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the angle between the moving direction of the arranged portion centered on the predetermined rotation axis and the predetermined linear direction increases from the outer position to the front position. Game machine B7 to play.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the rotation operation can be gradually decelerated.

A gaming machine B8, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the electrical wiring to be connected to the displacement means is connected from the predetermined rotating shaft side.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the space vacated by shifting the arrangement of the driving means toward the tilted tip side can be effectively used as the arrangement space for the electrical wiring. can.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the arrangement portion is configured so that the distance from the predetermined rotation axis can be changed by moving in the second predetermined linear direction, and the arrangement portion passes through the arrangement portion. The gaming machine B9 is configured so that the predetermined linear direction of 2 does not pass through the predetermined rotation axis.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the force for moving the arrangement portion in the second predetermined linear direction is rotated by rotating the displacement means about the predetermined rotation axis. It can also be used to operate.

A gaming machine B10, wherein any of the gaming machines B1 to B9 is provided with an endless belt capable of transmitting the driving force of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, it is possible to easily secure a large displacement width of the displacement means.

<Change the feeling of resistance for each range>
In a gaming machine including a displaceable displacement means and a drive means for displace the displacement means, a mode changing means for changing the mode of the force received by the displacement means during displacement according to the position of the displacement means. The gaming machine C1 characterized by being provided with.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a displacement means configured to be rotatable around the first axis and a drive means for operating the displacement means are provided, and the displacement means receives an urging force at the terminal position to brake. There is a gaming machine configured to be used (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144283).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the force received by the displacement means during displacement is not considered at all, and the load applied to the drive means may change suddenly during the displacement, and there is room for improvement. There was a problem that there was. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the displacement of the displacement means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the mode of the force received by the displacement means during displacement can be changed according to the position of the displacement means by the mode changing means, it is given to the displacement means during the displacement. The force applied can be adjusted appropriately, and the load applied to the driving means can be prevented from suddenly changing. Thereby, the displacement of the displacement means can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1, the displacement means can displace the first range and a second range different from the first range, and the force received by the displacement means by the mode changing means is within the first range. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the displacement means is larger when the displacement means is arranged in the second range than when the displacement means is arranged.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the mode of the force received by the displacement means can be changed for each range.

In the gaming machine C2, the first range or the second range is a range including at least one displacement end of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, it is possible to prevent the force received by the displacement means from changing at the end of the displacement.

In the game machine C3, the first range includes the displacement end of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the driving force required for the displacement of the displacement means from the displacement end can be reduced.

In the gaming machine C4, the mode changing means includes relative displacement means capable of relative displacement with respect to the displacement means, and the number of the relative displacement means that is relatively displaced in the second range is relative displacement in the first range. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the number of relative displacement means is larger than the number of the relative displacement means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, it is possible to increase or decrease the force generated from the mode changing means while enhancing the effect by changing the number of relative displacement means that are relatively displaced.

In the game machine C5, the relative displacement means includes a first relative displacement means that is relatively displaced in the first aspect and a second relative displacement means that is relatively displaced in the second aspect, and the displacement means is one of them. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that when the displacement is started from the end of the displacement, it is generated from the relative displacement of the first relative displacement means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C5, the displacement means of the displacement means are displaced by shifting the timing of the relative displacement instead of starting the relative displacement at the same time by the relative displacement means that are displaced relative to each other in a plurality of modes. Can be stabilized.

In the gaming machine C6, when the displacement means starts to be displaced from the other displacement end, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the displacement is caused by the relative displacement of the second relative displacement means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the effect of the effect can be improved by differentiating the relative displacement means for which the displacement means is first relative-displaced at each end where the displacement means starts to be displaced. ..

In the gaming machine C3, the first range includes the displacement ending of at least one of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, the displacement means can be easily decelerated at at least one of the displacement ends.

The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the force received by the displacement means in the gaming machine C8 is a predetermined resistance force.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, the displacement of the displacement means is expedited by increasing the predetermined resistance force received by the displacement means at the end of the displacement and decreasing it in the middle of the displacement. Can be planned.

In the gaming machine C8 or C9, the first range includes the displacement endings of both of the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8 or C9, the displacement means can be easily decelerated at both displacement ends, so that the displacement of the displacement means can be speeded up in both displacement directions. ..

In the gaming machine C10, the displacement means are composed of a pair, and the load transmitted from the pair of the displacement means to the driving means side is the same at both displacement ends of the gaming machine C11. ..

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C10, the driving force required to start the displacement from both displacement ends can be made the same.

<Irradiate light parallel to the light guide plate aligned with the substrate>
A first means composed of a plate-shaped member, a first light emitting means arranged on a predetermined surface side of the first means, and a plate-shaped first light receiving means capable of receiving the light of the first light emitting means. The gaming machine D1 comprising the above, wherein the side surface of the first light receiving means, which is arranged to face the predetermined surface, is in contact with the predetermined surface of the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a light receiving light having a plate-shaped member on which a light emitting means is arranged and a plate-shaped portion arranged opposite to the light emitting means of the plate-shaped member and configured to receive the light of the light emitting means. There is a gaming machine including the means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-198675).

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the structure is complicated because another member for aligning the light receiving means is required. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the arrangement of the light receiving means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the first light receiving means can be aligned with the first means by the contact between the first means and the first light receiving means, so that the first light receiving means is aligned. The structure for this can be simplified. That is, the arrangement of the light receiving means can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the second light emitting means arranged on the side opposite to the predetermined surface side of the first means and the plate-shaped second light receiving means capable of receiving the light of the second light emitting means. The gaming machine D2 comprising means, and the second light receiving means is characterized in that a side surface arranged to face the opposite surface is in contact with the opposite surface.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the second light receiving means can also be aligned with the first means by abutting with the first means, so that the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means and the second light receiving means can be aligned with each other. The structure for aligning the light receiving means can be simplified. That is, the arrangement of the light receiving means can be further improved.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means can be fixed to the first means by pressing from a predetermined pressing means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, the three members can be fixed by pressing from the pressing means, so that the number of fixing points for fixing a plurality of members can be reduced and the manufacturing man-hours can be reduced. Can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a support means configured to support the first means and the first light receiving means is provided, and the support means is a first protrusion that can be fitted to the first means. The gaming machine D4 comprising a portion and a second projecting portion that can be fitted to the first light receiving means.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, by supporting the first means and the first light receiving means by the supporting means, the first means in a direction parallel to the plate surface of the first means. It is possible to prevent the misalignment between the first means and the first light receiving means.

When the second light receiving means is arranged, the second projecting portion may be configured to be fitted to the second light receiving means. In this case, it is possible to prevent the position shift between the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means in the direction parallel to the plate surface of the first means.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, a second light emitting means arranged on the opposite surface side of the first means from the predetermined surface side and a plate-shaped first light emitting means capable of receiving the light of the second light emitting means. The second light receiving means is provided with two light receiving means, the side surface of the second light receiving means is in contact with the opposite surface, and the first means is arranged outside the second projecting portion. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means are pressed and fixed by a predetermined pressing means at the second projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the pressing force from the means can be applied to the end portion of the first means. As a result, even if the pressing force becomes excessive, the end portion of the first means can be damaged and fastened, and the central portion side on which the light emitting means is arranged can be easily prevented from being damaged.

The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the first light receiving means or the second light receiving means is configured so that the shapes of the contact portions that come into contact with the first means correspond to each other.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D5, a portion in which a force is applied to the first means via the first light receiving means by pressing from a predetermined pressing means, and a portion via the second light receiving means. Since the portion to which the force is applied to the one means can be made to correspond to the portion to which the force is applied, the direction of the force applied to the first means can be easily set to the plane direction, and the balance of the forces applied to the front and back can be improved. As a result, it is possible to prevent the first means from cracking due to the force applied in the direction in which the surface of the first means is inclined.

In any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, a second light emitting means arranged on the side opposite to the predetermined surface side of the first means and a plate capable of receiving the light of the second light emitting means. The second light receiving means is provided with a second light receiving means, and the side surface of the second light receiving means is in contact with the opposite surface, and the first light emitting means is attached to the second light emitting means. The gaming machine D7 is arranged at a corresponding position and is configured to irradiate light in a direction parallel to the irradiation direction of the second light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the position where the first light emitting means emits light to the first light receiving means and the light from the second light emitting means to the second light receiving means. Can be made to correspond to the position where the light is irradiated. As a result, the positions illuminated by the different light emitting units can be adjusted, so that the light emitting effect in the direction orthogonal to the plane of the first light receiving means and the second light receiving means can be improved.

In the gaming machine D7, the first light emitting means includes a plurality of light emitting units, and the optical axis directions of the light from the plurality of light emitting units are parallel to each other.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D7, the first means can be uniformly illuminated over a wide range by the light of the first light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the first means and the support means configured to support the first light emitting means are provided, and the first light receiving means is the side on which the first means is arranged. The supported surface on the opposite side of the above is configured to be supported by the supporting surface of the supporting means, and the supported surface or the supporting surface includes a plurality of protrusions, the plurality of protrusions of a predetermined light emitting means. The gaming machine D9 is characterized in that it can be produced by receiving light from the pachinko and pachislot machine D9.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, a plurality of protrusions are used as an effect surface that receives light to produce an effect and a structural surface that can divide the pressing force. Can be done.

In the gaming machine D9, the gaming machine D10 is characterized in that the predetermined light emitting means is arranged on the opposite side of the first light receiving means with respect to the first light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D9, it is possible to prevent the light from the predetermined light emitting means from interfering with the light from the first light emitting means.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, the first means is a gaming machine D11 including a plurality of plate-shaped members.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, it is possible to increase the number of arrangements of the first light emitting means for irradiating the first light receiving means with light. The degree of freedom in designing the size can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, the light receiving side end portion of the first light receiving means is arranged closer to the light emitting means side than the end portion of the first light emitting means on the irradiation direction side of the first light emitting means. The gaming machine D12 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, by using the first means as a shielding member, it is possible to prevent the light before being received by the first light receiving means from leaking. be able to.

<Restriction means to limit the direction of light passage>
A flow-down means that constitutes an area on which the game ball can flow down on the front side, and a front-side means that is provided on the front side of the flow-down means and may allow the game ball to flow down on the area located on the back side. The front side means is configured to be visible in a directional view in the first direction and a directional view in the second direction in which it is easier to see the game ball flowing down the region than the directional view in the first direction. The gaming machine E1 characterized by this.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine in which a transparent plate on which decorative characters and figures are drawn is arranged on the front side of the flow path of the game ball (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-23543). reference). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game ball flowing down the flow path is visually recognized through the decorative characters and figures, but if one of them is easy to see (for example, if the decorative characters and figures are darkened). ), The visibility of the other is deteriorated (for example, the game ball becomes difficult to see), and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the visibility of the game ball during the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the front-side means can be configured to have a state in which it is easy to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the flowing-down means and a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the flowing-down means. That is, in the first direction view, the front side of the front side means is visually recognized, while in the second direction view, the game ball is visually recognized through the front side means, so that the game can be played while the front side means is adopted. The visibility of the game ball inside can be improved.

In the gaming machine E1, the front-side means is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, blocks light in the first direction toward the region, and allows light in the second direction to head toward the region. A gaming machine E2 comprising a selection means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the difference in the degree of visibility due to the difference in the direction can be clarified by limiting the direction in which light can be transmitted by the direction selection means. can.

The gaming machine E2 includes front side surface forming means which are arranged on the front side of the flow-down means and form a front side surface of a region where the game ball flows down, and the direction selection means has the front side means and the front side surface configuration. The gaming machine E3, which is arranged in an area between the means and has a predetermined thickness.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E2, the direction selection means in which the change in visibility due to the difference in directional vision is arranged in a thin region between the front side means and the front side surface forming means. Therefore, it is possible to make it less likely to be affected by the attenuation of light by the direction selection means itself, and it is possible to make the difference in appearance between the direction view in the first direction and the direction view in the second direction remarkable. ..

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a first flow path in which the visibility of the gaming ball changes in the direction visually recognized by the direction selection means, and a second flow path in which the visibility of the gaming ball does not change in the viewing direction. The gaming machine E4, characterized in that the flow paths of the above are provided adjacent to each other.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the difference in the direction of the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the predetermined range makes it easier to pay attention to the second flow path and the first. It is possible to create a state in which both the flow path and the second flow path are equally easy to pay attention to.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the gaming machine E4 includes a detecting means capable of detecting a gaming ball flowing down the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, even if the direction selection means makes it impossible to visually recognize that the gaming ball has flowed down the first flow path, the detecting means detects the flow of the gaming ball. Since it is possible to control so that the player is notified when the game is played, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know whether or not the game ball has flowed down the first flow path.

In the gaming machine E4 or E5, the gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the gaming ball that has flowed into the first flow path is discharged from the gaming area through the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4 or E5, the gaming area flows down even after flowing down as compared with the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path scheduled to be discharged from the gaming area. It is possible to pay more attention to the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path to be obtained.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the front side means includes a direction selection means that blocks the light in the first direction toward the region and allows the light in the second direction to go toward the region. The direction selecting means is a gaming machine E7, wherein a light-transmitting resin member is arranged so as to cover the surface side thereof, and a decorative figure is formed on the surface of the resin member.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the player who sends the line of sight from the first direction to the region side can visually recognize the decorative figure on the surface of the resin member. Therefore, the effect of the front side means can be improved.

In the gaming machine E7, the direction selecting means is formed from plate-shaped means having a plurality of plate-shaped portions arranged in a laminated manner.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E7, when the gap dimension in the front-rear direction is large, the gap can be easily filled by the direction selection means.

The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines E1 to E8 is provided with a light irradiating means, and the visibility of the front side means is changed by the light of the light irradiating means.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the visibility of the front-side means is changed depending on whether the light of the light irradiating means is turned on or off. Therefore, it is possible to switch the visibility of the game ball flowing down the area in accordance with the effect.

The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the range in which the visibility of the front side means is changed by the light of the light irradiating means can be switched.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, the visibility of each range of the front side means can be changed by switching the irradiation mode of the light irradiating means. Thereby, the direction in which the area where the game ball flows down can be visually recognized with good visibility can be switched by the light irradiation means.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E10, the front-side means is configured to be displaceable.

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E10, even if the player does not move the line of sight, the front side means is displaced to allow the space between the player's line of sight and the front side means. It is possible to cause a case where the angle of is changed, and the visibility of the area can be changed.
<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes W100 to W3100 and W700 to W9100 as examples>
The first member and the second member, at least an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with the first member, and an arrangement member disposed on the first member and the second member are provided, and the engagement member is provided. In a gaming machine in which the fitting member is removed and the disposing member is removed, when the engaging member is removed, a situation equivalent to that in which the disposing member is removed can be formed. Gaming machine WA1-0.

A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-244900).

Here, the removed disposition member may be re-arranged. In this case, it is preferable to be able to confirm the state of the arrangement member, but in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in making it possible to confirm the state of the arrangement member.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming the state of disposition members.

According to the gaming machine WA1-0, since the main body portion and the engaging portion are connected by the connecting portion, the engaging portion can be separated from the engaging member (main body portion) by cutting the connecting portion. As a result, the engaging member (main body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

In this case, when the engaging member is removed, a situation equivalent to that in which the disposing member is removed can be formed. Thereby, based on the situation, it is possible to confirm the state of the disposition member (whether the disposition member is new, reused, or subject to unauthorized operation).

In the gaming machine WA1-0, the engaging member includes a main body portion, an engaging portion engaged with the first member, and a connecting portion connecting the main body portion and the engaging portion. The gaming machine WA1-1 is characterized in that a recess is formed at a position corresponding to the connecting portion in a portion of the first member on which the disposition member is disposed.

According to the gaming machine WA1-1, since a recess is formed in the portion where the arrangement member of the first member is arranged, a space can be formed between the arrangement member and the first member, and also. Since the recess is formed at a position corresponding to the connecting portion, when the connecting portion is cut, the recess (space) is used (assuming that the tip of the tool for cutting the connecting portion can be received in the recess). , The disposition member can be easily damaged. That is, when the cut portion is cut, a trace can be formed on the disposing member. As a result, based on the presence or absence of traces of the disposing member, the state of the disposing member (whether the disposing member is new or reused, or is the target of unauthorized operation) is determined. It can be confirmed.

Further, by forming a trace on the disposing member, it is possible to prevent the disposing member from being reused.

If there is no trace on the disposition member, it can be determined that the disposition member is likely to be new. When the disposing member has a trace, the trace is formed on the disposing member when the engaging member is removed from the first member and the second member, and the disposing member is removed from the first member and the second member to be the same or the same. A first member, which is a disposition member re-arranged (reused) in another first member and a second member, or in order to perform an illegal operation on the first member and the second member or a stored object. It can be determined that there is a high possibility that only the engaging member is removed from the member and the second member, and a trace is formed when the engaging member is removed.

In the gaming machine WA1-1, the gaming machine WA1-2 is characterized in that the first member and the second member are connected by fastening a screw, and the head of the screw is located in the recess.

According to the gaming machine WA1-2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WA1-1, the first member and the second member are connected by fastening the screw, and the head of the screw is located in the recess. Traces of the disposing member formed when the connecting portion is cut can be formed at a position corresponding to the head of the screw. Therefore, even when the head of the screw is hidden by the disposing member, the position of the screw can be grasped based on the trace of the disposing member. As a result, the workability of the work of releasing the screw fastening can be improved.

In the gaming machines WA1-1 or WA1-2, the engaging member has a smaller facing distance between the connecting portion and the disposing member than the facing distance between the main body and the disposing member. The gaming machine WA1-3, which is characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine WA1-3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WA1-1 or WA1-2, the engaging member is not the facing distance between the main body and the disposing member, but rather the connecting portion and the disposing member. Since the facing distance between the two is reduced, the tip of the tool for cutting the connecting portion can be brought closer to the disposing member, and the disposing member can be easily damaged when the connecting portion is cut.

In any one of the gaming machines WA1-1 to WA1-3, the connecting portion is formed by inclining at least one side surface of the gaming machine WA1-4.

According to the gaming machine WA1-4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines WA1-1 to WA1-3, the connecting piece is formed so that at least one side surface is inclined, so that the connecting piece is cut. At that time, the tool can be moved along the inclination of the side surface. Therefore, the tip of the tool can be brought into contact with the disposing member, and the disposing member can be easily damaged.

For example, when a tool for cutting a connecting piece by sandwiching a connecting piece between a pair of blades (with the pair of blades abutting on both sides) is used, the side surface when the connecting piece is cut. The tool can be rotated along the inclination of the tool, and the tip of the tool can be easily brought into contact with the disposing member with the rotation.

In any of the gaming machines WA1-1 to WA1-4, the connecting portion includes a first portion and a second portion in which the distance between both side surfaces is smaller than that of the first portion, and the first portion is provided. The gaming machine WA1-5, characterized in that the facing distance between the second portion and the disposing member is smaller than the facing distance between the portion and the disposing member.

According to the gaming machine WA1-5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines WA1-1 to WA1-4, the distance between both side surfaces of the second portion is smaller than that of the first portion. By cutting the two parts, it is possible to easily cut the connecting portion.

In this case, since the facing distance between the second part and the disposing member is smaller than the facing distance between the first part and the disposing member, the tip of the tool for cutting the second part is arranged. It can be brought closer to the installation member, and the arrangement member can be easily damaged when the second portion is cut.

Further, in this way, the facing distance between the second part and the disposing member is made smaller than the facing distance between the first part and the disposing member (that is, the second part is moved toward the disposing member side). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference in the cross-sectional area between the first portion and the second portion. Therefore, when the engaging member is formed from a resin material, its moldability can be ensured.
<Concept of the invention using the substrate box W4100 to W6100 as an example>
A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member. The engaging member includes a main body portion, an engaging portion engaged with the first member, and a connecting portion connecting the main body portion and the engaging portion, and the engaging member is engaged. The gaming machine WA2-1 is characterized in that the joint portion includes a protrusion portion that protrudes toward the disposing member.

A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-244900).

Here, the removed disposition member may be re-arranged. In this case, it is preferable to be able to confirm the state of the arrangement member, but in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in making it possible to confirm the state of the arrangement member.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming the state of disposition members.

According to the gaming machine WA2-1, since the main body portion and the engaging portion are connected by the connecting portion, the engaging portion can be separated from the engaging member (main body portion) by cutting the connecting portion. As a result, the engaging member (main body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

In this case, since the engaging member includes a protruding portion projecting toward the disposing member, if an attempt is made to disengage the engaging member by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion. , The disposition member can be damaged by the protrusion. That is, regardless of whether or not the engagement is released, a trace can be formed on the disposing member when the engaging portion is illegally operated. As a result, based on the presence or absence of traces of the disposing member, the state of the disposing member (whether the disposing member is new or reused, or is the target of unauthorized operation) is determined. It can be confirmed.

Further, by forming a trace on the disposing member, it is possible to prevent the disposing member from being reused.

If there is no trace on the disposition member, it can be determined that the disposition member is likely to be new. When the disposing member has a trace, the trace is formed on the disposing member when the engaging member is removed from the first member and the second member, and the disposing member is removed from the first member and the second member to be the same or the same. A first member, which is a disposition member re-arranged (reused) in another first member and a second member, or in order to perform an illegal operation on the first member and the second member or a stored object. It can be determined that there is a high possibility that only the engaging member is removed from the member and the second member, and a trace is formed when the engaging member is removed.

In the gaming machine WA2-1, the gaming machine WA2-2 is characterized in that the protrusion is located on the outer edge side of the engaging portion.

According to the gaming machine WA2-2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WA2-1, the protrusion is located on the outer edge side of the engaging portion, so that the engaging member is engaged with the first member. Even if there is, the traces of the arrangement member can be easily visually recognized. That is, it is possible to easily confirm the state of the disposition member (whether the disposition member is new, reused, or subject to unauthorized operation).

In the gaming machine WA2-1 or WA2-2, the gaming machine WA2 is characterized in that a recess is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion at a portion where the arrangement member of the first member is arranged. -3.

According to the gaming machine WA2-3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WA2-1 or WA2-2, a recess is formed in the portion where the arrangement member of the first member is arranged, so that the arrangement member A space can be formed between the first member and the first member, and the recess is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion, so that the first member can be operated (elastic deformation) by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion. When the engagement with the member is released, the recess (space) can be used (the tip of the protrusion can be accepted by the recess) so that the disposition member can be easily damaged by the protrusion. That is, when the engaging portion is illegally operated, it is possible to easily form a trace on the disposing member.

In the game machine WA2-3, the engaging member is removed from the first member by being displaced in a predetermined direction by a predetermined distance while the engaging portion is operated in a direction approaching the disposing member. The recess corresponds to the protrusion when the engaging member is displaced in the predetermined direction by the predetermined distance while the engaging portion is operated in a direction approaching the disposing member. The gaming machine WA2-4, which is characterized in that it is formed at least in the range to be used.

According to the game machine WA2-4, in addition to the effect of the game machine WA2-3, the engaging member is displaced by a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction while the engaging portion is operated in a direction approaching the disposing member. As a result, it can be removed from the first member, and the recess is the protrusion when the engaging member is displaced in a predetermined direction by a predetermined distance while the engaging portion is operated in a direction approaching the disposing member. Since it is formed at least in the range corresponding to the portion, the damage range of the disposition member can be secured.

That is, when the engagement between the first member and the engaging member is released by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, the engaging portion is engaged with the tip of the protruding portion received in the recess. Since the member is displaced in a predetermined direction, the disposition member can continue to be damaged by the tip of the protrusion received in the recess while the engaging member is displaced in a predetermined direction by a predetermined distance. Therefore, the damage range of the disposition member can be secured.

In the game machine WA2-3, the engaging member is removed from the first member by being displaced by a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction while the engaging portion is operated in a direction approaching the disposing member. The recess corresponds to the protrusion when the engaging member is displaced in the predetermined direction by the predetermined distance while the engaging portion is operated in a direction approaching the disposing member. The gaming machine WA2-5, characterized in that it is formed only in the first half of the range to be played.

According to the game machine WA2-5, in addition to the effect of the game machine WA2-3, the engaging member is displaced by a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction while the engaging portion is operated in a direction approaching the disposing member. As a result, it can be removed from the first member, and the concave portion is a protrusion when the engaging member is displaced in a predetermined direction by a predetermined distance while the engaging portion is operated in a direction approaching the disposing member. Since it is formed only in the first half of the range corresponding to the above, it is possible to secure the damaged range of the disposing member and prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member.

That is, when the engagement between the first member and the engaging member is released by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, the engaging portion is engaged with the tip of the protruding portion received in the recess. Since the member is displaced in a predetermined direction, the disposition member can continue to be damaged by the tip of the protrusion received in the recess while the engaging member is displaced in the first half portion of a predetermined distance in the predetermined direction. Therefore, the damage range of the disposition member can be secured.

On the other hand, after the engaging member is displaced in the first half portion of a predetermined distance in a predetermined direction, the tip of the protrusion received in the recess can be engaged with the end of the recess. As a result, the displacement of the engaging member in a predetermined direction can be regulated, so that the engaging member can be prevented from being illegally removed from the first member.
<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes Wa100 to Wc100 and Wi100 as an example>
A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member. In the above, the engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member, and the main body portion from which the engaging portion is separated is provided. The gaming machine WB1-1 is characterized in that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed by using the gaming machine WB1-1.

A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-244900).

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in changing the arrangement state of the arrangement members.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the arrangement state of the arrangement members.

According to the gaming machine WB1-1, the engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member, and the engaging portion is separated. Since the arrangement state of the arrangement portion can be changed by using the main body portion, it is not necessary to carry a tool (for example, a cutter knife) for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. Further, since the main body of the engaging member is relatively large and easy to grip, it is easy to perform the work of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. Therefore, it is possible to preferably change the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

In the gaming machine WB1-1, the engaging member includes a main body portion and a connecting portion connecting the engaging portion, and the main body portion is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined region of the arrangement member. In a state where the connecting portion is cut, the main body portion can be displaced with respect to the first member and the second member until at least a position where the changing means abuts on a predetermined region of the arrangement member. The gaming machine WB1-2, which is characterized by being said to be.

According to the gaming machine WB1-2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB1-1, the main body portion and the engaging portion are connected by the connecting portion. Therefore, by cutting the connecting portion, the engaging portion is engaged with the engaging member. Can be separated from (main body). As a result, the engaging member (main body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

In this case, the main body includes a changing means arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined area of the disposing member, and when the connecting portion is cut, the changing means at least abuts on the predetermined area of the disposing member. Since the main body can be displaced with respect to the first member and the second member, the main body is displaced after the connecting portion is cut and before the main body is removed from the first member and the second member. Then, at least the changing means can be brought into contact with the predetermined region of the arrangement member (the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed). That is, the work of cutting the connecting portion and removing the main body portion from the first member and the second member and the work of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member by using the removed main body portion (changing means) are separately performed. Since it is not necessary to perform these operations efficiently as a series of operations, it is possible to easily change the arrangement state of the arrangement members.

Further, since the changing means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined area of the disposing member, it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means. Therefore, when the engaging member is manufactured or transported, when the engaging member is attached (removed) to the first member and the second member, or when the connecting member is cut, the engaging portion is separated from the main body. It is possible to prevent the operator from being injured by the changing means during the disposal process.

Further, the rigidity of the main body can be increased by the amount that the changing means is formed on the main body.

In the gaming machine WB1-2, the gaming machine WB1-3 is characterized in that at least a part of the changing means of the main body portion is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the predetermined region of the arrangement member.

According to the gaming machine WB1-3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB1-2, at least a part of the changing means of the main body portion is formed so as to be inclined with respect to a predetermined region of the arrangement member. It is possible to easily change the arrangement state of the arrangement member when the portion is displaced and at least the changing means is brought into contact with the predetermined area of the arrangement member.

In the gaming machine WB1-1, the engaging member includes a main body portion and a connecting portion connecting the engaging portion, and the main body portion is formed so that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed. The gaming machine WB1-4, characterized in that it includes a changing means arranged at a position facing the joint portion.

According to the gaming machine WB1-4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB1-1, the main body portion and the engaging portion are connected by the connecting portion. Therefore, by cutting the connecting portion, the engaging portion is engaged with the engaging member. Can be separated from (main body). As a result, the engaging member (main body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

Since the main body portion includes a changing means formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the disposing member and arranged at a position facing the engaging portion, the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion). This makes it possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member by using the changing means.

In this case, the changing means is arranged at a position facing the engaging portion, and the changing means can be used by separating the engaging portion from the engaging member (main body portion), so that the engaging portion can be used. In the state before being separated from the engaging member (main body portion), it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being injured by the changing means during the manufacturing of the engaging member, the transportation thereof, and the attachment work of the engaging member to the first member and the second member.

Further, the rigidity of the main body can be increased by the amount that the changing means is formed on the main body.

In the gaming machine WB1-4, at least one of the first member or the second member is provided with a contacted portion, and the main body portion has a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the contacted portion. The gaming machine WB1-5 is provided, wherein when the contact portion is brought into contact with the contacted portion, at least the changing means is brought into contact with a predetermined region of the arrangement member.

According to the gaming machine WB1-5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB1-4, when the abutting portion is brought into contact with the abutted portion, at least the changing means is brought into contact with a predetermined area of the disposing member. Therefore, when the arrangement state of the arrangement member is changed by using the changing means (at least the changing means is brought into contact with the predetermined area of the arrangement member), the trouble of searching for the position of the predetermined area of the arrangement member is suppressed. can.

In the gaming machine WB1-5, the abutted portion is formed so that the abutted portion abutted on the abutted portion can be displaced along the abutted portion and along the abutted portion. The gaming machine WB1-6 is characterized in that when the abutting portion is displaced, the changing means is displaced along a predetermined region of the disposing member.

According to the gaming machine WB1-6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB1-5, when the abutting portion is displaced along the contacted portion, the changing means is displaced along a predetermined region of the disposing member. Therefore, the work of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member (cutting a predetermined area of the arrangement member by the changing means) can be facilitated by using the contacted portion as a guide.
<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes We100 to Wg100 as an example>
A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member. In the above, the engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member, and the engaging portion separated from the main body portion is provided. The gaming machine WB2-1 is characterized in that it is formed so that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed by using it.

A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-244900).

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in changing the arrangement state of the arrangement members.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the arrangement state of the arrangement members.

According to the gaming machine WB2-1, the engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member, and is separated from the main body portion. Since the arrangement state of the arrangement portion can be changed by using the joint portion, it is not necessary to carry a tool (for example, a cutter knife) for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. Further, since the engaging portion of the engaging member is relatively small and can suppress interference with the periphery of the disposing member (first member or second member), the work of changing the disposing state of the disposing member is performed. Cheap. Therefore, it is possible to preferably change the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

In the gaming machine WB2-1, the engaging member includes a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engaging portion, and the engaging portion is formed so that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed. The gaming machine WB2-2, characterized in that it includes a changing means arranged at a position facing the main body.

According to the gaming machine WB2-2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB2-1, the main body portion and the engaging portion are connected by the connecting portion. Therefore, by cutting the connecting portion, the engaging portion is engaged with the engaging member. Can be separated from (main body). As a result, the engaging member (main body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

Since the engaging portion includes a changing means formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the disposing member and arranged at a position facing the main body portion, the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion). This makes it possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member by using the changing means.

In this case, the changing means is arranged at a position facing the main body portion, and the changing means can be used by separating the engaging portion from the engaging member (main body portion), so that the engaging portion is engaged. In the state before being separated from the joint member (main body portion), it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being injured by the changing means during the manufacturing of the engaging member, the transportation thereof, and the attachment work of the engaging member to the first member and the second member.

In the gaming machine WB2-1, the engaging member includes a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engaging portion, and the engaging portion is formed so that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed. The gaming machine WB2-3, which comprises a changing means projecting toward the disposing member.

According to the gaming machine WB2-3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB2-1, the main body portion and the engaging portion are connected by the connecting portion. Therefore, by cutting the connecting portion, the engaging portion is engaged with the engaging member. Can be separated from (main body). As a result, the engaging member (main body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

Since the engaging portion includes a changing means formed so as to be able to change the arrangement state of the disposing member and projecting toward the disposing member, the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion). Therefore, it is possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member by using the changing means.

In this case, the changing means is changed by projecting toward the disposing member (that is, disposing at a position facing the disposing member) and separating the engaging portion from the engaging member (main body portion). Since the means can be used, it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means in the state before the engaging portion is separated from the engaging member (main body portion). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being injured by the changing means during the manufacturing of the engaging member, the transportation thereof, and the attachment work of the engaging member to the first member and the second member.

Further, since the engaging means is projected from the engaging portion toward the disposing member, if an attempt is made to disengage the engagement with the first member by operating the engaging portion without cutting the connecting portion, The disposing member can be damaged by the engaging means. That is, regardless of whether or not the engagement is released, a trace can be formed on the disposing member when the engaging portion is illegally operated. As a result, based on the presence or absence of traces of the disposing member, the state of the disposing member (whether the disposing member is new or reused, or is the target of unauthorized operation) is determined. It can be confirmed.

Further, by forming a trace on the disposing member, it is possible to prevent the disposing member from being reused.

In the gaming machine WB2-2 or WB2-3, at least one of the first member or the second member is provided with a contacted portion, and the engaging portion is formed so as to be able to contact the contacted portion. The gaming machine WB2-is provided with a contact portion, and when the contact portion is brought into contact with the contacted portion, at least the changing means is brought into contact with a predetermined region of the arrangement member. 4.

According to the gaming machine WB2-4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB2-2 or WB2-3, when the abutting portion is brought into contact with the abutted portion, at least the changing means is provided in a predetermined area of the arrangement member. Since they are in contact with each other, when the arrangement state of the arrangement member is changed by using the changing means (at least the changing means is brought into contact with the predetermined area of the arrangement member), the position of the predetermined area of the arrangement member is changed. You can save the trouble of searching.

In the gaming machine WB2-4, the abutted portion is formed so that the abutted portion abutted on the abutted portion can be displaced along the abutted portion and along the abutted portion. The gaming machine WB2-5 is characterized in that when the abutting portion is displaced, the changing means is displaced along a predetermined region of the disposing member.

According to the gaming machine WB2-5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB2-4, when the abutting portion is displaced along the abutted portion, the changing means is displaced along a predetermined region of the disposing member. Therefore, the work of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member (cutting a predetermined area of the arrangement member by the changing means) can be facilitated by using the contacted portion as a guide.

In the gaming machine WB2-1, the engaging member includes a connecting portion that connects the main body portion and the engaging portion, and the engaging portion is formed so that the arrangement state of the arrangement member can be changed. The gaming machine WB2-6 comprising changing means, wherein the changing means is formed by the cut connecting portion.

According to the gaming machine WB2-6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB2-1, the main body portion and the engaging portion are connected by the connecting portion. Therefore, by cutting the connecting portion, the engaging portion is engaged with the engaging member. Can be separated from (main body). As a result, the engaging member (main body portion) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

The engaging portion includes a changing means formed so that the arrangement state of the disposing member can be changed, and since the changing means is formed by the cut connecting portion, the engaging portion is the engaging member (main body portion). By being separated from the above, it is possible to change the arrangement state of the arrangement member by using the changing means.

In this case, since the engaging portion of the engaging member is relatively small and the connecting portion is even smaller than the engaging portion, interference with the periphery of the disposing member (first member or second member) can be suppressed, and at the same time, interference with the peripheral member (first member or second member) can be suppressed. It is easy to form a shape (for example, a sharp shape) suitable for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the work of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

Further, since the changing means can be used by separating the engaging portion from the engaging member (main body portion) (that is, the cut connecting portion serves as the changing means), the engaging portion is the engaging member. In the state before being separated from the (main body), it is possible to prevent the operator's hand from touching the changing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operator from being injured by the changing means during the manufacturing of the engaging member, the transportation thereof, and the attachment work of the engaging member to the first member and the second member.

In the gaming machine WB2-6, the connecting portion is opposite to the one-side connecting portion that connects one end of one side of the engaging portion to the main body and the one side of the one side of the engaging portion. The gaming machine WB2-7, characterized in that it includes an other-side connecting portion that connects the other-side end portion of the side to the main body portion.

According to the gaming machine WB2-7, the connecting portion includes a one-sided connecting portion that connects one end of one side of the engaging portion to the main body and the other side opposite to one side of the engaging portion. Since it is provided with a connecting portion on the other side that connects the end portion of the member to the main body portion, the engaging portion is displaced to one side by using the connecting portion on one side in a predetermined region of the disposing member, and is arranged. The arrangement state of the predetermined region can be changed by displacing the engaging portion to the other side by using the other side connecting portion on the other side in the predetermined region of the member. That is, even if the engaging portion is not changed and the direction of the engaging portion is not reversed, interference with surrounding members (first member or second member) is suppressed, and one end of a predetermined region and the other The arrangement state can be changed (cut) up to the end on the side. Therefore, the arrangement state of the arrangement member in a predetermined region can be efficiently changed.

In the gaming machine WB2-6 or WB2-7, the connecting portion is characterized by including a portion where the cross-sectional area is reduced between the side connected to the main body portion and the side connected to the engaging portion. The gaming machine WB2-8.

According to the gaming machine WB2-8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB2-6 or WB2-7, the connecting portion has a cross-sectional area between the side connected to the main body portion and the side connected to the engaging portion. Since a predetermined portion is provided, the connection portion can be easily cut by cutting the predetermined portion. Further, it is possible to easily form a shape (for example, a sharp shape) suitable for changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member in the cut connecting portion (predetermined portion).
<Concept of the invention using the substrate box Wd100 as an example>
A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member. The engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member, and is separated from the main body portion and the main body portion. The gaming machine WB3 is characterized in that the engaging portion is formed so as to be connectable, and the arrangement state of the arrangement member is changeably formed by using the engaging portion connected to the main body portion. -1.

A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-244900).

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in changing the arrangement state of the arrangement members.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the arrangement state of the arrangement members.

According to the gaming machine WB3-1, the engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member, and is provided from the main body portion and the main body portion. Since the separated engaging portion is formed so as to be connectable and the arrangement state of the arrangement portion can be changed by using the engaging portion connected to the main body portion, the arrangement member is arranged. It is not necessary to carry a tool (for example, a utility knife) for changing the state. Further, the main body of the engaging member is relatively large and easy to grip, while the engaging portion of the engaging member is relatively small and interferes with the periphery of the disposition member (first member or second member). Therefore, it is easy to perform the work of changing the arrangement state of the arrangement member. Therefore, it is possible to preferably change the arrangement state of the arrangement member.

In the gaming machine WB3-1, the engaging portion is the gaming machine WB3-2, wherein a portion engaged with the first member is connected to the main body portion.

According to the gaming machine WB3-2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB3-1, the engaging portion is for connecting to the main body because the portion engaged with the first member is connected to the main body. It is not necessary to separately provide a portion in the engaging portion. That is, the portion engaged with the first member can also be used as the portion connected to the main body portion. Therefore, the shape of the engaging portion can be simplified.

In the gaming machine WB3-1 or WB3-2, the engaging member includes a defining portion formed on the main body portion so that a posture of engaging with the first member can be defined, and the main body portion is the defining portion. The gaming machine WB3-2, characterized in that is connected to the engaging portion.

According to the gaming machine WB3-3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WB3-1 or WB3-2, the engaging member has a defining portion formed in the main body portion so that the posture of engaging with the first member can be defined. In addition, since the specified portion of the main body portion is connected to the engaging portion, it is not necessary to separately provide a portion for connecting with the engaging portion in the main body portion. That is, the portion (regulating portion) that defines the posture of the engaging member can also be used as the portion that is connected to the engaging portion. Therefore, the shape of the engaging portion can be simplified.
<Concept of the invention using the substrate box Wj100 as an example>
A game including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member. In the machine, the engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member, and the engaging portion engages with the first member. In the combined state, the first member or the second member is formed so as to be displaceable in a predetermined direction, and the engaging member displaced in the predetermined direction is disengaged from the first member. The gaming machine WC1-1 is provided with a suppressing means formed so as to be able to suppress the displacement of the engaging portion in the direction in which the engaging portion is formed.

A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-244900).

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in suppressing the illegal removal of the engaging member.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing unauthorized removal of an engaging member.

According to the gaming machine WC1-1, by separating (cutting) the engaging portion from the main body portion, even when the engaging portion is engaged with the first member, the first member and the second member are separated from each other. The engaging member (main body) can be removed.

Here, by dissociating (elastically deforming) the engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion is released, and the first member and the first member are released. Where there is a risk of fraudulent removal of the engaging member from the two members, the engaging member is formed so as to be displaceable in a predetermined direction with the engaging portion engaged with the first member, and the first member or The second member includes a suppressing means formed so as to be able to suppress the displacement of the engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released with respect to the engaging member displaced in the predetermined direction. It is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

In the gaming machine WC1-1, the first member or the second member is displaced in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction from a position where the displacement of the engaging portion can be suppressed by the suppressing means. The gaming machine WC1-2, which is provided with a regulatory means for regulating the above.

According to the game machine WC1-2, in addition to the effect of the game machine WC1-1, the engaging member of the first member or the second member is oriented in a predetermined direction from a position where the displacement of the engaging portion can be suppressed by the suppressing means. Since the regulating means for restricting the displacement in the opposite direction to the above is provided, it is possible to prevent the engaging portion from being illicitly disengaged from the first member. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

In the game machine WC1-2, the restricting means is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging portion of the engaging member displaced in the predetermined direction, and by engaging with the engaging portion, the engaging portion is engaged. The gaming machine WC1-3, characterized in that it is possible to regulate the displacement of the member in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction.

According to the game machine WC1-3, in addition to the effect of the game machine WC1-2, the regulating means is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging portion of the engaging member displaced in a predetermined direction, and engages with the engaging portion. By matching, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the engaging member in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. Therefore, the displacement of the engaging member is regulated by the regulating means only by displace the engaging member in the predetermined direction. The state can be formed, and the workability of the assembling work of the engaging member can be improved.

A gaming machine WC1-3, wherein the first member or the second member includes a shielding means for shielding the regulating means.

According to the gaming machine WC1-4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WC1-3, since the first member or the second member includes a shielding means for shielding the regulating means, the engaging portion and the regulating means are engaged with each other. It is possible to prevent unauthorized cancellation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.
<About the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes Wk100, Wl100, and Wr100 as examples>
An engaging member formed to be engageable with the first member and the second member, the first member or at least one of the second members, and an arrangement disposed on the first member and the second member. In a gaming machine provided with a member, at least one of the first member or the second member and the engaging member are engaged at a plurality of places, and the engaging member is engaged by the interaction of the engagement at the plurality of places. A gaming machine WC2-1 characterized in that it is formed so that it is difficult to be released.

A gaming machine including a first member and a second member, an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member, and an arrangement member arranged on the first member and the second member is known. (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-244900).

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in suppressing the illegal removal of the engaging member.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing unauthorized removal of an engaging member.

According to the gaming machine WC2-1, at least one of the first member or the second member and the engaging member are engaged at a plurality of places, and the engagement is difficult to be released due to the interaction of the engagement at the plurality of places. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

In the game machine WC2-1, the engaging member includes a main body portion, and a first engaging portion and a second engaging portion that are detachably formed from the main body portion and are engaged with the first member. The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are formed with the second engaging portion after the first engaging member is engaged with the first member due to the displacement of the engaging member. Is formed so as to be engageable with the first member, and the first member includes a regulating means for regulating the displacement of the first engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is disengaged. WC2-2, a game machine characterized by.

According to the gaming machine WC2-2, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion engage with the first member by separating (cutting) the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion from the main body portion. Even in this state, the engaging member (main body) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

Here, by dissociating (elastically deforming) the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the first member, the first engaging portion, and the second engaging portion are engaged. According to the game machine WC2-2, the effect of the game machine WC2-1 is that there is a possibility that the engagement member is disengaged from the joint portion and the engaging member is removed from the first member and the second member. In addition, in the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion, after the first engaging member is engaged with the first member due to the displacement of the engaging member, the second engaging portion is the first. The first member and the first member are formed so as to be engageable with the member, and the first member includes a regulating means for regulating the displacement of the first engaging portion in a direction in which the engagement with the first member is disengaged. It is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the second member.

That is, the displacement of the first engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released can be regulated by the regulating means, and the displacement in the direction in which the displacement of the first engaging portion is released by the regulating means is released. The displacement of the mating member can be regulated by the engagement between the first member and the second engaging portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

In the game machine WC2-2, the direction of displacement of the engaging member when the first engaging portion is engaged with the first member and the second engaging portion are engaged with the first member. The gaming machine WC2-3 is characterized in that the displacement directions of the engaging members are substantially the same.

According to the game machine WC2-3, in addition to the effect of the game machine WC2-2, the direction of displacement of the engaging member when the first engaging portion is engaged with the first member and the second engaging portion. The direction of displacement of the engaging member when is engaged with the first member is substantially the same direction. Therefore, for example, the engaging member is displaced in the first direction to move the first engaging portion. After engaging, it is not necessary to displace the engaging member in the second direction and perform a two-step operation of engaging the second engaging portion, and the engaging member is attached to the first member and the second member. The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion can be engaged only by operating in one direction at the time of mounting. Therefore, the operation of attaching the engaging member can be simplified and the work efficiency can be improved.

Further, in a configuration that requires two-step operation, if the operator forgets to operate in the second direction, the second engaging portion is not engaged, and the engaging member from the first member and the second-position member. Is likely to be removed illegally, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion should be engaged only by one-way operation when attaching the engaging member to the first member and the second member. This makes it possible to prevent the operator from forgetting the necessary operation, and it is possible to reliably engage the second engaging portion.

In the game machine WC2-1, the engaging member is formed to be separably formed from the main body portion, the first engaging portion that is separably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member, and the main body portion. A second engaging portion that is engaged with the second member, and a direction of displacement of the first engaging portion that disengages the first engaging portion from the first member. The gaming machine WC2-4, wherein the direction of displacement of the second engaging portion from which the second engaging portion is disengaged from the second member is opposite to that of the second engaging portion.

According to the gaming machine WC2-4, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion engage with the first member by separating (cutting) the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion from the main body portion. Even in this state, the engaging member (main body) can be removed from the first member and the second member.

Here, by dissociating (elastically deforming) the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member and the second member is released, the first member and the second member and the second member are first. According to the game machine WC2-4, there is a risk of fraudulent removal of the engaging member from the first member and the second member by disengaging the engaging portion and the second engaging portion. In addition to the effect of the game machine WC2-1, the direction of displacement of the first engaging portion from which the first engaging portion and the first member are disengaged, and the direction of the displacement between the second engaging portion and the second member. Since the direction of displacement of the second engaging portion to be disengaged is opposite to that of the disengaging portion, if either the first engaging portion or the second engaging portion is displaced in the disengaging direction. By the displacement of the engaging member due to the displacement of one of them, the other of the first engaging portion or the second engaging portion can be displaced toward the direction in which the engagement is maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

In the game machine WC2-1, the engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member. In the direction in which the first portion and the second portion of the engaging portion are engaged with the first member, and the engagement between the first portion or one of the second portions and the first member is released. When the engaging portion is displaced, the engaging portion is displaced in a direction in which the engagement between the first portion or the other of the second portion and the first member is maintained. Machine WC2-5.

According to the gaming machine WC2-5, by separating (cutting) the engaging portion from the main body portion, even when the engaging portion is engaged with the first member, the first member and the second member are separated from each other. The engaging member (main body) can be removed.

Here, by dissociating (elastically deforming) the engaging portion in the direction in which the first portion and the second portion are disengaged from the first member, the first member and the engaging portion (the first portion and the first member) are displaced. According to the game machine WC2-5, the game machine WC2-1 plays the role where there is a possibility that the engagement member is disengaged from the first member and the second member and the engaging member is removed from the first member and the second member. In addition to the effect, when the engaging portion is displaced in the direction in which one of the first portion or the second portion and the first member is disengaged, the other portion of the first portion or the second portion and the first member Since the engaging portion is displaced in the direction in which the engagement of the first member is maintained, it is possible to make it difficult to disengage the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.
<Concept of the invention using the substrate boxes Wo100 to Wq100 as an example>
In a game machine including a first member and a second member, and at least an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with the first member, the gaming machine includes a mounting member, and the engaging member is a main body and a main body thereof. It includes an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body and engages with the first member, and the mounting member is formed so as to be mountable to the engaging portion, and the first member and the engaging portion are formed. The gaming machine WD1-1 is characterized in that the displacement of the engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the engaging portion is released is suppressed by the mounting member.

A gaming machine including a first member and a second member and an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with at least the first member is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-244900).

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in suppressing the illegal removal of the engaging member.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing unauthorized removal of an engaging member.

According to the gaming machine WD1-1, by separating (cutting) the engaging portion from the main body portion, even when the engaging portion is engaged with the first member, the first member and the second member are separated from each other. The engaging member (main body) can be removed.

Here, by dissociating (elastically deforming) the engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion is released, and the first member and the first member are released. Where there is a risk of fraudulent removal of the engaging member from the two members, the mounting member is formed so that it can be attached to the engaging portion, and is engaged in a direction in which the first member and the engaging portion are disengaged. Since the displacement of the joint portion can be suppressed by the mounting member, it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

On the other hand, even if the mounting member is attached to the engaging portion, it is possible to separate (cut) the engaging portion from the main body, so in regular work, the engaging portion is separated (cut). , The engaging member (main body) can be easily removed from the first member and the second member.

In the gaming machine WD1-1, when the engaging portion is displaced in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the first surface side of the engaging portion is brought close to the first member, and the above-mentioned When the mounting member is mounted on the engaging portion, a part of the mounting member is arranged between the first surface of the engaging portion and the first member of the gaming machine WD1-. 2.

According to the game machine WD1-2, in addition to the effect of the game machine WD1-1, when the engaging portion is displaced in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is disengaged, the first surface of the engaging portion is disengaged. When the side is close to the first member and the mounting member is mounted on the engaging portion, a part of the mounting member is arranged between the first surface of the engaging portion and the first member. The distance at which the engaging portion can be displaced in the direction in which the engaging portion is disengaged can be shortened by the amount that a part of the mounting member is arranged. As a result, the engagement between the first member and the engaging portion can be made difficult to be disengaged, so that it is possible to prevent the engaging member from being illegally removed from the first member and the second member.

A gaming machine WD1-3, characterized in that, in the gaming machine WD1-2, the mounting member is formed so as to be mountable on the engaging portion engaged with the first member.

According to the gaming machine WD1-3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine WD1-2, the mounting member is formed so as to be mountable to the engaging portion engaged with the first member, and thus engages with the first member. When engaging the portions, the displacement of the engaging portions is not hindered by a portion of the mounting member. Therefore, the engaging portion can be smoothly engaged with the first member (that is, the engaging member can be attached to the first member and the second member). Further, since the engagement allowance between the first member and the engaging portion can be increased, it is possible to easily suppress the disengagement between the first member and the engaging portion.

In the gaming machine WD1-2 or WD1-3, the first member and the second member are provided, and a part of the mounting member to which the engaging portion is attached is the first member. The gaming machine WD1-4, which is formed as a protrusion projecting from a surface, and the protrusion is projected toward the disposition member disposed on the first member.

According to the gaming machine WD1-4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine WD1-2 or WD1-3, the first member and the second member are provided with the disposing members, and the engaging portion is attached. A part of the member is formed as a projecting portion projecting from the first surface, and the projecting portion projects toward the disposing member disposed on the first member, so that the engaging portion is formed from the main body portion. If you try to disengage the first member and the engaging part without separating (cutting) (that is, if you try to displace the engaging part in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is disengaged) ), The disposition member can be damaged by the protrusion. That is, a trace can be formed on the disposition member. As a result, based on the presence or absence of traces of the disposing member, the state of the disposing member (whether the disposing member is new or reused, or is the target of unauthorized operation) is determined. It can be confirmed.

Further, by forming a trace on the disposing member, it is possible to prevent the disposing member from being reused.

In the gaming machine WD1-4, the gaming machine WD1-5 is characterized in that a recess is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion at a portion of the first member where the disposing member is disposed.

According to the game machine WD1-5, in addition to the effect of the game machine WD1-4, a recess is formed in the portion where the arrangement member of the first member is arranged, so that the arrangement member and the first member are formed. A space can be formed between the first member and the engaging portion, and since the recess is formed at a position corresponding to the protruding portion, the engaging portion can be connected to the first member without separating (cutting) the engaging portion from the main body portion. When trying to disengage (that is, when trying to displace the engaging portion in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is disengaged), the recess (space) is used (the tip of the protrusion is made into the recess). (As acceptable), the disposition member can be easily damaged by the protrusions. That is, when the engaging portion is illegally operated, it is possible to easily form a trace on the disposing member.

From game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D12, E1 to E11, WA1-0 to WA1-5, WA2-1 to WA2-5, WB1-1 to WB1-6, WB2-1 In any of WB2-8, WB3-1 to WB3-3, WC1-1 to WC1-4, WC2-1 to WC2-5, and WD1-1 to WD1-5, the gaming machine is a slot machine. The featured gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

From game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D12, E1 to E11, WA1-0 to WA1-5, WA2-1 to WA2-5, WB1-1 to WB1-6, WB2-1 In any of WB2-8, WB3-1 to WB3-3, WC1-1 to WC1-4, WC2-1 to WC2-5, and WD1-1 to WD1-5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine Z2 featuring. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

From game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C11, D1 to D12, E1 to E11, WA1-0 to WA1-5, WA2-1 to WA2-5, WB1-1 to WB1-6, WB2-1 In any of WB2-8, WB3-1 to WB3-3, WC1-1 to WC1-4, WC2-1 to WC2-5, and WD1-1 to WD1-5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being a fusion of and. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
16 Glass unit (front side surface constituent means)
81 Third symbol display device (display device)
A60 base plate (flowing means)
A400 1st operation unit (directing means)
A400b rotary operation unit (displacement means)
A414 Guide slot (part of degree changing means, mode changing means)
A423a belt (endless belt)
A427 connection mechanism (contact part)
A430 Base plate member (shaft side means, displacement means)
A440 Moving member (part of constituent means, first constituent means, part of relative displacement means)
A444 functional long hole (part of mode change means)
A448 Columnar protrusion (arrangement part)
A449 wiring (electrical wiring)
A450 Direction switching member (part of the constituent means, second constituent means, part of the relative displacement means)
A460 Decorative member (part of constituent means, second constituent means, part of relative displacement means)
A500 2nd operation unit (directing means)
A500b rotary operation unit (displacement means)
A514 Guide slot (part of degree changing means, mode changing means)
A523a belt (endless belt)
A527 Connecting mechanism (arrangement part)
A530 Foundation member (shaft side means, displacement means)
A533 functional long hole (part of mode change means)
A540 Moving member (part of constituent means, first constituent means, part of relative displacement means)
A546 Columnar protrusion (contact part)
A550 Direction switching means (part of component means, second component means, part of relative displacement means)
A560 Changing member (part of constituent means, second constituent means, part of relative displacement means)
A662 Rotating plate member (displacement means)
A674 Arc-shaped through hole (part of mode changing means)
A710 Frame-shaped member (part of pressing means)
A720 light emitting substrate (first means)
A724 Front light emitting unit (first light emitting means, multiple light emitting units)
A725 Rear light emitting part (second light emitting means, multiple light emitting parts)
A730 Front plate member (first light receiving means)
A740 Rear plate member (second light receiving means)
A750 Front cover member (part of pressing means, supporting means)
A753 Fastening part (1st protruding part)
A754 Cylindrical fastening part (second protruding part)
A803z front member (front means)
A806 Visual observation mode change sheet (direction selection means)
A820 Front light emitting board (part of the first means, plate-shaped member)
A830 Rear light emitting board (part of the first means, plate-shaped member)
A4920 Light guide displacement member (part of direction selection means, plate-shaped means)
A4930 Covering member (part of direction selection means, plate-shaped means)
A4933a Light emitting means (light irradiation means)
AJ1 Rotating shaft rod (Rotating shaft)
AJ2 rotary shaft rod (rotary shaft)
AMT1 drive motor (drive means)
AMT2 drive motor (drive means)
AMT4 drive motor (drive means)
ASE1 detection sensor (detection means)
ATL1 left channel (first channel)
ATL2 right channel (second channel)
W10 pachinko machine (game machine)
W200, W2200, W4200, W7200, Wb200, We200, Wj200, Wl200, Wm200, Wo200, Wq200, Wr200, Wt200, Wv200 Box cover (first member, second member)
Wj214a Back wall (shielding means)
Wj214b Regulatory wall (suppressing means)
W220 flat surface part (contacted part)
W223 Both ends wall (contact part)
W224a, W224b Recess Wj250 2nd regulation part (regulation means)
W300, W2300, W4300, W5300, W6300, Wb300, We300, Wj300, Wk300, Wm300, Wn300, Ws300, Wu300 Box base (first member, second member)
Wk312f Locking part (regulatory means)
W320, We320 flat surface (contacted part)
W321 Both ends wall part (contact part)
W5326, W6326 Recessed W500, W2500, W3500, W4500, W5500, W8500, W9500, Wa500, Wb500, Wc500, Wd500, We500, Wf500, Wg500, Wh500, Wi500, Wj500, Wk500, Wl500, Wm500, Wn500, Wo500 Wq500, Wu500, Wv500, Ww500, Wx500, Wy500 Protective cover (engagement member)
W501 Lower wall part (contact part)
W502 Left wall (main body)
W510, W2510, W3510, Wp510, Wq510 Back wall (main body)
W510 Back wall (contact)
W520, W2520, W3520, Wp520, Wq520 Front wall (main body)
W520 Front wall (contact part)
W530a, W2530a, W3530a, Wb530a, We530a, Wf530a, Wg530a, Wj530a, Wl530a, Wo530a, Wp530a, Wq530a, Wv530a, Wy530a Engagement part W530a Engagement part (1st engagement part)
W530b, W2530b, W3530b, Wb530b, Wm530b, Wn530b, Wu530b Engagement part (first part, second part)
W530b engaging part (first engaging part, second engaging part)
W530b1 engaging part (second engaging part)
W530b2 engaging part (first engaging part)
W531a, We531a, Wf531a Connecting piece (connecting part)
We531a connecting piece (changing means, contact part, connecting part, one side connecting part, other side connecting part)
W531b, W2531b, W3531b, W8531b, W9531b, Ww531b, Wx531b Connecting piece (connecting part)
W9531b1 Part 1 (Part 2)
W9531b2 Part 2 (Part 1)
W4534, W5534, Wq534, Wu534, Wv534 Protrusion (protrusion)
Wd540 Standing part (Regulation part)
Wa550, Wb550, Wy550 Cutting part (changing means)
Wb560, Wd560 Guide part (contact part)
Wo580 retaining pin (mounting member)
Wo583 Locking part (protrusion part)
WSL seal (arrangement member)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine including a first member and a second member, and at least an engaging member formed so as to be engaged with the first member.
Equipped with mounting members
The engaging member includes a main body portion and an engaging portion that is detachably formed from the main body portion and is engaged with the first member.
The mounting member is formed so as to be mountable on the engaging portion.
A gaming machine characterized in that a displacement of the engaging portion in a direction in which the first member and the engaging portion are disengaged is suppressed by the mounting member. When the engaging portion is displaced in the direction in which the engagement with the first member is released, the first surface side of the engaging portion is brought close to the first member.
Claim 1 is characterized in that, when the mounting member is mounted on the engaging portion, a part of the mounting member is arranged between the first surface of the engaging portion and the first member. The described gaming machine. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the mounting member is formed so as to be mountable on the engaging portion engaged with the first member.

Images